CA File Master™ Plus

ISPF User Guide, Second Edition

r8.5

Second Edition
This documentation, which includes embedded help systems and electronically distributed materials, (hereinafter referred to as
the “Documentation”) is for your informational purposes only and is subject to change or withdrawal by CA at any time.
This Documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed, modified or duplicated, in whole or in part, without
the prior written consent of CA. This Documentation is confidential and proprietary information of CA and may not be disclosed
by you or used for any purpose other than as may be permitted in (i) a separate agreement between you and CA governing
your use of the CA software to which the Documentation relates; or (ii) a separate confidentiality agreement between you and
CA.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, if you are a licensed user of the software product(s) addressed in the Documentation, you may
print or otherwise make available a reasonable number of copies of the Documentation for internal use by you and your
employees in connection with that software, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to each reproduced
copy.
The right to print or otherwise make available copies of the Documentation is limited to the period during which the applicable
license for such software remains in full force and effect. Should the license terminate for any reason, it is your responsibility to
certify in writing to CA that all copies and partial copies of the Documentation have been returned to CA or destroyed.
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, CA PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENTATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OR NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT WILL CA BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OR DAMAGE,
DIRECT OR INDIRECT, FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS, LOST
INVESTMENT, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, GOODWILL, OR LOST DATA, EVEN IF CA IS EXPRESSLY ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGE.
The use of any software product referenced in the Documentation is governed by the applicable license agreement and such
license agreement is not modified in any way by the terms of this notice.
The manufacturer of this Documentation is CA.
Provided with “Restricted Rights.” Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to the restrictions
set forth in FAR Sections 12.212, 52.227-14, and 52.227-19(c)(1) - (2) and DFARS Section 252.227-7014(b)(3), as applicable, or
their successors.
Copyright © 2012 CA. All rights reserved. All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to
their respective companies.
CA Technologies Product References
CA File Master™ Plus

CA Librarian®

CA Panvalet®

Contact CA Technologies
Contact CA Support

For your convenience, CA Technologies provides one site where you can access the
information you need for your Home Office, Small Business, and Enterprise CA
Technologies products. At http://ca.com/support, you can access the following:
■ Online and telephone contact information for technical assistance and customer
services
■ Information about user communities and forums
■ Product and documentation downloads
■ CA Support policies and guidelines
■ Other helpful resources appropriate for your product

Providing Feedback About Product Documentation

If you have comments or questions about CA Technologies product documentation, you

can send a message to [email protected].

If you would like to provide feedback about CA Technologies product documentation,

complete our short customer survey, which is available on the CA Support website at
http://ca.com/docs.
Documentation Changes
The following documentation updates have been made since the last release of this
documentation:
■ Editing Data Sets (see page 59)—Added the MAP command to the Primary
Commands section, and updated other sections as appropriate.
■ Filters (see page 249)—The chapter was reorganized to improve clarity. The
Selection Criteria tables throughout the ISPF User Guide were consolidated into this
chapter.
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction 11
Functional Description ............................................................................................................................................... 11
General Product Features ................................................................................................................................... 12
Audience .................................................................................................................................................................... 12
Notation Conventions ................................................................................................................................................ 12
Command Notations ........................................................................................................................................... 13
Wildcards ............................................................................................................................................................ 13

Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus 15

Main Menu ................................................................................................................................................................. 16
Help ............................................................................................................................................................................ 17
Screen Fields .............................................................................................................................................................. 17
Record Layouts ........................................................................................................................................................... 18
Custom Record Layouts....................................................................................................................................... 18
Filters .......................................................................................................................................................................... 18
Wildcard Selection ..................................................................................................................................................... 19
Select DSN to Resolve Wildcarded DSN .............................................................................................................. 20
Select a Member from the Member Directory ................................................................................................... 21
Display DSN Lists ........................................................................................................................................................ 22
Display DSN List Data Sets .......................................................................................................................................... 23
Confirm Member Delete ............................................................................................................................................ 25
Confirm Data Set Delete ............................................................................................................................................. 26
Rename Data Sets ...................................................................................................................................................... 26
Override Print Output Control ................................................................................................................................... 27

Chapter 3: Main Menu 31

Main Menu ................................................................................................................................................................. 31
Setup ................................................................................................................................................................... 32
Browse and Edit .................................................................................................................................................. 33
Utility Functions .................................................................................................................................................. 33
Data Set Print ...................................................................................................................................................... 34
Record Filter and Selection Criteria .................................................................................................................... 35
Record Layouts .................................................................................................................................................... 35
Custom Record Layouts....................................................................................................................................... 36
DSN Lists .............................................................................................................................................................. 37

Contents 5
Chapter 4: Setup and Processing Parameters 39
Set Up Processing Parameters ................................................................................................................................... 40
Define Processing Defaults and Job Statements ........................................................................................................ 41
Define Print Output Control Parameters ................................................................................................................... 43
Define and Update Processing Data Sets ................................................................................................................... 45
DSN List ...................................................................................................................................................................... 47
Display DSN List Members ......................................................................................................................................... 47
Define Change Log Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 48
How to Print the Change Log Data Sets ..................................................................................................................... 50

Chapter 5: Browsing Data Sets 51

Browse Data Sets........................................................................................................................................................ 51
Select Members to Process ........................................................................................................................................ 56
Browse Primary and Line Commands ........................................................................................................................ 58

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 59

Edit Data Sets ............................................................................................................................................................. 59
Select Members to Process ........................................................................................................................................ 64
Manage Files with the Change Log............................................................................................................................. 66
Edit VSAM ESDS Files .................................................................................................................................................. 67
Edit Commands .......................................................................................................................................................... 67
Primary Commands .................................................................................................................................................... 68
AUTOSAVE ........................................................................................................................................................... 68
BOTTOM .............................................................................................................................................................. 68
BOUNDS .............................................................................................................................................................. 68
BROWSE .............................................................................................................................................................. 69
CANCEL ................................................................................................................................................................ 69
CAPS .................................................................................................................................................................... 69
CHANGE............................................................................................................................................................... 69
CHAR ................................................................................................................................................................... 71
COLS .................................................................................................................................................................... 71
COPY .................................................................................................................................................................... 72
COUNTS ............................................................................................................................................................... 72
CREATE ................................................................................................................................................................ 73
DELETE................................................................................................................................................................. 73
DOWN ................................................................................................................................................................. 74
DSINFO ................................................................................................................................................................ 75
EDIT ..................................................................................................................................................................... 75
END ..................................................................................................................................................................... 75
EXCLUDE .............................................................................................................................................................. 75

6 ISPF User Guide

FIND..................................................................................................................................................................... 77
FINDLIM............................................................................................................................................................... 79
FLIP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 79
HELP .................................................................................................................................................................... 79
HEX ...................................................................................................................................................................... 79
HILITE .................................................................................................................................................................. 79
INSERT ................................................................................................................................................................. 80
KEY ...................................................................................................................................................................... 80
LEFT ..................................................................................................................................................................... 80
LOCATE ................................................................................................................................................................ 81
MAP ..................................................................................................................................................................... 82
MF ....................................................................................................................................................................... 84
NEXT .................................................................................................................................................................... 84
NULLS .................................................................................................................................................................. 85
NUMEXT .............................................................................................................................................................. 85
PDSCHG ............................................................................................................................................................... 86
PREV .................................................................................................................................................................... 86
PROFILE ............................................................................................................................................................... 87
RCHANGE ............................................................................................................................................................ 88
REPEAT ................................................................................................................................................................ 88
REPLACE .............................................................................................................................................................. 88
RESET ................................................................................................................................................................... 89
RFIND .................................................................................................................................................................. 90
RIGHT .................................................................................................................................................................. 90
SAVE .................................................................................................................................................................... 90
SELECT ................................................................................................................................................................. 91
SF ......................................................................................................................................................................... 91
SORT .................................................................................................................................................................... 91
STATS ................................................................................................................................................................... 92
SUBMIT................................................................................................................................................................ 92
TOP ...................................................................................................................................................................... 92
UNSORT ............................................................................................................................................................... 93
UP ........................................................................................................................................................................ 93
V .......................................................................................................................................................................... 93
Rules for Finding Packed Strings on the FIND Command .................................................................................... 94
Line Commands ................................................................................................................................................... 95
VSAM KSDS Keys ................................................................................................................................................. 97
Update VSAM Keys.............................................................................................................................................. 97
Update VSAM Keys Using the Copy or Move Commands ................................................................................... 99
Modify the Key of an Existing Record ................................................................................................................. 99
Change Command "From" and "To" Character Strings of Different Lengths. ................................................... 100
Modify and Control Record Length of New Records ......................................................................................... 101

Contents 7
Increase or Decrease Record Length of an Existing Record .............................................................................. 101
Edit VSAM Paths ....................................................................................................................................................... 103
Edit a VSAM Base Cluster in Alternate Key Sequence ....................................................................................... 103
Edit a Data Set or PDS Member................................................................................................................................ 104
Edit in Single Record Formatted Mode ............................................................................................................. 104
Edit in Multi-Record Formatted Mode .............................................................................................................. 105
Locate Fields when Editing in Formatted Mode ............................................................................................... 107

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 109

Library Utility ............................................................................................................................................................ 111
Field Descriptions .............................................................................................................................................. 112
Library Utility Member Directory ...................................................................................................................... 113
Load Library Utility Member Directory ............................................................................................................. 115
Data Set Utility ......................................................................................................................................................... 117
Field Descriptions .............................................................................................................................................. 118
Data Set Information - PDS ............................................................................................................................... 118
Data Set Information - Sequential File .............................................................................................................. 119
Data Set Information – VSAM File ..................................................................................................................... 119
Allocate New Sequential File or PDS ................................................................................................................. 121
Sequential File/Multiple Volumes ..................................................................................................................... 124
Sequential File Number of Volumes .................................................................................................................. 125
Define GDG (Generation Data Group) .............................................................................................................. 125
Copy Utility ............................................................................................................................................................... 127
Field Descriptions .............................................................................................................................................. 128
Copy Utility Member Directory ......................................................................................................................... 132
Catalog Utility ........................................................................................................................................................... 134
Field Descriptions .............................................................................................................................................. 135
Catalog Utility Data Set List ............................................................................................................................... 136
VTOC Utility .............................................................................................................................................................. 138
VTOC Utility Data Set List .................................................................................................................................. 140
Volume Summary .............................................................................................................................................. 143
PDS Utilities Sub-Menu ............................................................................................................................................ 144
Locate PDSs with Specified Member................................................................................................................. 145
Directory of PDS Containing Member ............................................................................................................... 146
Directory of PDS Containing Wildcarded Members .......................................................................................... 147
Compress PDS ................................................................................................................................................... 148
Update PDS Allocation ...................................................................................................................................... 149
Recover Overlaid or Deleted Members ............................................................................................................ 151
VSAM Utility ............................................................................................................................................................. 153
Define VSAM Files ............................................................................................................................................. 156
Define Alternate Index File ............................................................................................................................... 162

8 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility Build Alternate Index .................................................................................................................. 167
Rename Component ......................................................................................................................................... 168
Modify VSAM File .............................................................................................................................................. 170
VSAM Utility – Define Path ............................................................................................................................... 172
Define VSAM File - Multiple Volumes ............................................................................................................... 174
Data Set Information - VSAM KSDS ................................................................................................................... 175
Data Set Information –2 - VSAM KSDS .............................................................................................................. 179
Data Set Information - VSAM ESDS ................................................................................................................... 182
Data Set Information #2 - VSAM ESDS .............................................................................................................. 185
Data Set Information – VSAM RRDS .................................................................................................................. 187
Data Set Information #2 - VSAM RRDS.............................................................................................................. 190
Data Set Information - VSAM Variable-Length RRDS ........................................................................................ 192
Data Set Information #2 - VSAM Variable-Length RRDS ................................................................................... 195
Data Set Information – VSAM Linear Data Set .................................................................................................. 198
Data Set Information –2 - VSAM Linear Data Set .............................................................................................. 201
Search Utility ............................................................................................................................................................ 203
Search File/Members ........................................................................................................................................ 203
Search Utility Member Directory ...................................................................................................................... 205
Update Utility ........................................................................................................................................................... 207
Update File/Members ....................................................................................................................................... 207
Update Utility Member Directory ..................................................................................................................... 212
Update Utility From and To Character Strings Sub-Menu ................................................................................ 214
Update Utility Update Fields Sub-Menu ........................................................................................................... 216
Data Set Compare Utility .......................................................................................................................................... 220
Field Descriptions .............................................................................................................................................. 221
FMPLUS--Build Compare Position and Synckey Keywords................................................................................ 226
Compare Utility Member Directory .................................................................................................................. 234
Data Set Reformat .................................................................................................................................................... 236
Field Descriptions .............................................................................................................................................. 237
Data Set Reformat Parm ................................................................................................................................... 239
Environment Utilities Sub-Menu .............................................................................................................................. 241
Current ISPF Data Set Allocation ....................................................................................................................... 242
Hardware and Software Environment .............................................................................................................. 243
DASD Unit Configuration ................................................................................................................................... 244

Chapter 8: Printing Data Sets 245

Print Data Sets .......................................................................................................................................................... 245

Chapter 9: Filters 249

Using Cataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus ......................................................................................................... 250
Develop a Plan................................................................................................................................................... 251

Contents 9
Define Selection Criteria Statements ................................................................................................................ 251
Update the SETUP Screen ................................................................................................................................. 253
Apply the Filter .................................................................................................................................................. 254
Review the Results ............................................................................................................................................ 254
Using Uncataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus ..................................................................................................... 255
Develop a Plan................................................................................................................................................... 256
Apply the Selection Criteria Statements ........................................................................................................... 256
Review the Results ............................................................................................................................................ 257
Selection Criteria Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 257

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 259

Ordinary Layouts ...................................................................................................................................................... 259
Custom Record Layouts ............................................................................................................................................ 260
Use Layout Functions ............................................................................................................................................... 261
View Formatted Record Layout................................................................................................................................ 263
View Record Layout Member Directory ............................................................................................................ 263
View Record Layout Screen ............................................................................................................................... 265
How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout ................................................................................................. 266
Create or Update a Custom Record Layout ...................................................................................................... 267
Update CRL Descriptions ................................................................................................................................... 268
Update Custom Layout...................................................................................................................................... 272
Selection Condition Creation ............................................................................................................................ 275
Field-Level Inclusion and Exclusion ................................................................................................................... 277

Chapter 11: DSN List Directory 279

Select a DSN ............................................................................................................................................................. 279
Select a DSN List for Processing ............................................................................................................................... 280
Update DSN Lists ...................................................................................................................................................... 281
Insert DSN Lists ......................................................................................................................................................... 283
Delete DSN Lists ....................................................................................................................................................... 284

Index 285

10 ISPF User Guide

Chapter 1: Introduction
CA File Master Plus is a full function z/OS and OS/390 file/data management product
that provides enhanced capabilities for sequential, partitioned, and VSAM (including
IAM) files in an online ISPF interface, Eclipse-based user interface, and through batch
commands.

CA File Master Plus provides a set of powerful and easy-to-use tools for manipulating
z/OS data files. Many of the functions support specified record filter/selection criteria
and allow data to be displayed and modified using COBOL or PL/I copybooks.

This section contains the following topics:

Functional Description (see page 11)
Audience (see page 12)
Notation Conventions (see page 12)

Functional Description
CA File Master Plus contains online and batch file and data management functions. The
online functions include:
■ Data set browsing and editing
■ Data set, library, and VTOC utility functions
■ Printing of data set contents
■ Searching data sets for character strings
■ Updating data sets, including PDS
■ Definition and support of record filter/selection criteria
■ Definition and support of record layouts from COBOL or PL/I copybooks and record
reformatting control parameters
■ Viewing and modification of data records using record layout formats defined by
COBOL or PL/I copybooks
■ Reformatting data from one format to another
■ Comparing files

Chapter 1: Introduction 11
Audience

■ Defining/managing/referencing groups/lists of commonly used data set names

■ Copying files

For batch file and data management functions, see the CA File Master Plus Batch
Reference Guide.

Note: The term OS/390 refers to both the IBM z/OS and OS/390 platforms, unless
specifically noted.

General Product Features

The following features are available for all screens in the online interface:
■ Wildcard DSNs with subsequent DSN selection screen
■ Specific DSN wildcard masks can be disallowed by updating user exit
CAWAWDSN
■ Wildcard specification of member name with a subsequent screen of member name
directory from which to select
■ Specification of data set group/list names in DSN fields
■ Sorting member name directory by any column
■ Fully qualified or relative GDG data set names
■ Extensive screen and field level help

Audience
This guide is for programmers, database administrators, system programmers, or other
technical persons who are responsible for managing or manipulating data when working
with applications in the mainframe testing and production environments. You are
expected to be familiar with the z/OS ISPF and batch environments.

This guide helps you implement and use CA File Master Plus facilities. This guide also
addresses the concerns of CA File Master Plus administrators and users who are
implementing CA File Master Plus.

Notation Conventions
This guide uses the following conventions:
■ Terms and concepts that appear in italic are being introduced for the first time.
■ Text that appears in bold conveys important information.

12 ISPF User Guide

Notation Conventions

Command Notations
The following conventions are used to illustrate command syntax:
■ Commands that appear in bold should be typed exactly as shown.
■ Commands are shown in all CAPITALS.
■ Commands, libraries, and syntax displayed on the screen are shown in monospace
bold font.
■ Lines of code are shown in monospace bold font.
■ Commands that appear in bold italic require you to supply a value.
■ Uppercase, BOLD names are required.
■ Parameters in brackets [ ] are optional with selections separated by a vertical bar |.
■ Parameters in braces { } are sets of alternatives separated by a vertical bar |.
Choose one of the alternatives.

A parameter can be a single word or set of parameters grouped by brackets or

parentheses (part of the command syntax). An example follows:

COMMANDNAME
[AN OPTIONAL CLAUSE. IF USED, EVERYTHING WITHIN THE BRACKETS IS REQUIRED]
{YOU MAY USE ANY OR ALL OF THE ITEMS IN THESE BRACKETS IN THIS ORDER}
|
{OR YOU MAY USE ANY OF THESE ITEMS IN THESE BRACKETS [WITH AN OPTION] }
(THE ITEMS IN THESE BRACKETS MAY BE REPEATED MULTIPLE TIMES)

Wildcards
Many CA File Master Plus panels allow wildcards for:
■ Specification of data set names with subsequent DSN selection screen
■ Specific DSN wildcard masks can be disallowed by updating user exit
CAWAWDSN
■ Specification of member name with a subsequent screen of member name
directory from which to select

Chapter 1: Introduction 13
Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus
This chapter provides introductory and conceptual information about using CA File
Master Plus.

This section contains the following topics:

Main Menu (see page 16)
Help (see page 17)
Screen Fields (see page 17)
Record Layouts (see page 18)
Filters (see page 18)
Wildcard Selection (see page 19)
Display DSN Lists (see page 22)
Display DSN List Data Sets (see page 23)
Confirm Member Delete (see page 25)
Confirm Data Set Delete (see page 26)
Rename Data Sets (see page 26)
Override Print Output Control (see page 27)

Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus 15

Main Menu

Main Menu
CA File Master Plus performs a variety of functions using files of various data set
organizations. These functions are described in detail in later sections.

16 ISPF User Guide

Help

Help
Screen-level and field-level help for CA File Master Plus provide all of the assistance
needed to perform the various screen functions. The CA File Master Plus help facility
provides the assistance you require to use each screen without a manual. Screen-level
help describes the concepts and the diversified uses of each screen and its associated
fields.

Use the 'HELP' PF key or HELP command to request screen-level help. Field-level help is
available for most fields. HELP is requested when the cursor is positioned at a field. The
field help pop-up window explains what to type into the field and lists any code values
related to the field.

An extended help message is available for each error or informational message that
appears on the top right corner of the screen. If the action required to correct an error is
not apparent, request HELP to cause the extended help text to display on the screen.
The extended help text is designed to provide the diagnostic information that you need.

Screen Fields
CA File Master Plus contains screen fields into which you type a data set name, and
supports two facilities: the wildcard facility and the DSN facility that simplifies the entry
of a DSN.
■ Wildcards
When you type a wildcarded DSN, directories of the DSNs that match that wildcard
display. Select the DSN that replaces the wildcarded DSN. When typing a wildcarded
DSN, you can type an asterisk (*) to represent any number of characters with any
value and type a percent sign (%) to represent one character of any value.
■ DSN list facility
You can define a commonly used data set to a CA File Master Plus DSN list facility by
using D or option 0.4 from the Main Menu. Define one or more DSN lists and they
are saved as members in your DSN list PDS. Each DSN list is a list of DSNs cataloged
to a DSN list name. You can type any of the following syntaxes into a DSN field on a
screen to invoke the DSN list facility to allow selection of the desired DSN.
– D to request a directory of DSN lists
– D dddddd (where 'dddddd' is the name of a DSN list)

Screen fields within CA File Master Plus that contain library member names let you
specify a wildcarded member name where an asterisk (*) represents any number of
characters with any value and a percent sign (%) represents one character of any value.
When you type a wildcarded member name, you see a directory of members within the
library that match the wildcard. You can select the member you want from the list.

Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus 17

Record Layouts

Record Layouts
Record Layouts are used for those functions where field-level processing is required,
such as:
■ Browsing and editing of data sets using a formatted view that displays the data for
individual fields
■ Formatted printing of data records
■ Reformatting data records
■ Specifying filters (selection criteria) using conditions that evaluate field values

To use a record layout, define either the library and member name of a COBOL or PL/I
record layout member or a custom record layout.

Custom Record Layouts

Use custom record layouts when you have record layouts that redefine each other, are
imbedded in a program, and do not start at the first byte of a record. They can also be
used to selectively display or omit one or more fields in a copy book. Use Option 6 from
the CA File Master Plus Main Menu to define a custom record layout with one or more
of the following combinations:
■ Record layout consisting of multiple redefined fields. Choose which redefinition to
use based on field content or as a default.
■ Record layout extracted from the program source.
■ Record layout with an offset applied because it does not start at the beginning of a
record.
■ Select or omit fields from a record layout.

Filters
CA File Master Plus supports cataloged and uncataloged filters.
Cataloged Filters
Cataloged filters are defined using Option 5 (Define and Update Selection Criteria)
from the CA File Master Plus Main Menu. Define filtering using criteria such as
record counts, keys, selection limit, search limit, and filter condition. The cataloged
selection criteria are saved to your selection criteria parm PDS. To use a cataloged
filter, specify the member name of the cataloged filter in the selection criteria
member field of the processing screen.

18 ISPF User Guide

Wildcard Selection

Uncataloged Filters
For simple filters that are not to be reused, specify the filter condition in the
selection criteria field of the processing screen. The field-level help provides the
syntax information you need to define an improvised filter.

You can perform many of the CA File Master Plus utility functions either online or in
batch. Screens that you use to request these functions have an execution mode field at
the bottom of the screen. The three choices for execution mode are as follows:
■ O—Perform the request online
■ S—Generate and submit JCL to perform the request
■ E—Edit the JCL generated to perform the request

Note: To get the most value from CA File Master Plus, continue through the remaining
pages of the Main Menu screen-level help. There are concepts explained in the next few
pages that help you exploit the features of CA File Master Plus. Before using CA File
Master Plus, select Option 0 and define the setup parameters and parameter data sets
that you are using.

You must specify a filter or selection criteria when processing involves selected data
records from a file or selected members from a library. The processing screens that
support filters include the following:
■ Browse
■ Edit
■ Copy
■ Search
■ Update
■ Compare
■ Print

Wildcard Selection
CA File Master Plus supports the use of wildcards in the selection of DSNs and members.
Specific DSN wildcard masks can be disallowed by updating user exit CAWAWDSN.

Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus 19

Wildcard Selection

Select DSN to Resolve Wildcarded DSN

The Select DSN to Resolve Wildcarded DSN screen opens when you type a wildcarded
DSN in any of the DSN fields. A list of the DSNs that match the wildcarded specification
displays on this screen. Selecting the DSN replaces the wildcarded DSN.

To select a DSN to resolve a wildcarded DSN

1. Type a wildcarded data set in any of the DSN fields.
When typing a wildcarded DSN, you can type an asterisk (*) to represent any
number of characters with any value, and you can type a percent sign (%) to
represent one character of any value.
The Select DSN for Edit Data Set screen opens.

SELECT DSN FOR 'Edit Data Set'--------------------------------------Row 1 of 26

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
S - Select B—ISPF Browse E—ISPF Edit
File
S DSN Volume Type
_ TECH.WORK.DOC VOL001 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK.MEMLIST VOL007 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK.MEMLISTU VOL001 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK.MEMLIST2 VOL006 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK.VSAM CLUSTER
_ TECH.WORK.VSAM.DATA VOL011 DATA
_ TECH.WORK.VSAM.INDEX VOL011 INDEX
_ TECH.WORKPDS VOL003 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORKPDS.R VOL004 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORKPDSR VOL004 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORKPDS2 VOL003 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORKPDS3 VOL001 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORKPDS4 VOL002 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORKPDS5 VOL004 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORKPDS6 VOL004 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORKPDS7 VOL004 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORKPDS8 VOL003 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK255 VOL004 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK33.PDS VOL002 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK33.PDSU VOL002 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK33.PDSV100 VOL002 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK33.PDS2 VOL002 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK33.PDS200 VOL002 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK33.PDS3 VOL002 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK33.SEQ VOL006 NONVSAM
_ TECH.WORK33.SEQ2 VOL006 NONVSAM

This screen displays the following information:

DSN
Displays the data set name of each of the data sets that match the DSN
wildcard entered on the previous screen.
Volume
Displays the volume serial that contains the data set of each line item.

20 ISPF User Guide

Wildcard Selection

File type
Specifies the description of the type of file taken from the catalog. The values for
this field are as follows:
Values: CLUSTER (VSAM Cluster), DATA (VSAM Data Component), INDEX (VSAM
Index Component), NONVSAM (Non-VSAM), GDS (Generation data set, GDG
(Generation data group), PATH (VSAM path), AIX (VSAM Alternate Index), ALIAS
(Alias), CAT (User catalog)

2. Type S (Select) next to the DSN you want, and press Enter.

Note: In addition to selecting the DSN you want, you can optionally browse or edit any
of the NON-VSAM data sets from the screen using the ISPF browse/edit functions, by
specifying either B (Browse) or E (Edit) next to the DSN you want to browse or edit.

To browse or edit a wildcarded DSN

1. Type a wildcarded data set in any of the DSN fields.
2. Specify either B (Browse) or E (Edit) next to the DSN you want to browse or edit,
and press Enter.

Select a Member from the Member Directory

When you type a wildcarded member name in any of the member fields, the Member
Directory displays a list of the members in the library.

To select a member from the member directory

1. Type a wildcarded or blank member name.
When typing a wildcarded member name, you can type an asterisk (*) to represent
any number of characters with any value, and you can type a percent sign (%) to
represent one character of any value

Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus 21

Display DSN Lists

The Select Member to Process From screen opens.

SELECT MEMBER TO PROCESS FROM 'TECH.WORKPDS' --------------------- Row 1 of 308

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S Name Size Created Changed ID

_ ARRAY 36 2002/07/23 2002/07/23 12:28:29 PGMR001
_ ARRAYBIG 35 2002/07/25 2002/07/26 08:37:31 PGMR001
_ ARRAY2 35 2002/07/17 2002/07/17 11:04:29 PGMR001
_ CACCT 15 2002/08/11 2002/08/11 13:20:29 PGMR001
_ CCCCOMP3 12 2001/11/27 2001/11/27 17:22:53 PGMR002
_ CCCREC 10 2000/10/02 2000/10/02 19:10:29 PGMR002
_ CCCRECN1 19 2002/03/13 2002/03/13 11:03:22 PGMR001
_ CCCRECS 20 2000/12/29 2000/12/29 10:03:30 PGMR002
_ CCRECS 3 2003/02/28 2003/02/28 11:22:01 PGMR003
_ CICSCOBB 44 1992/04/30 1994/09/20 16:13:38 PGMR004
_ CIGMA 23 2001/01/09 2002/02/21 16:33:43 PGMR001
_ CLAIM 46 2002/07/17 2002/07/17 16:03:41 PGMR005
_ COPYBK1 65 2001/11/13 2001/11/13 17:16:30 PGMR001
_ COPYCOPY 5 2001/03/21 2001/03/21 14:39:03 PGMR002
_ COPY1 4 2001/03/21 2001/03/21 14:38:56 PGMR002
_ COPY2 3 2001/03/21 2001/03/21 14:38:32 PGMR002
_ CRL001 1 2003/03/07 2003/03/07 13:21:58 PGMR001

2. Specify S (Select) next to the member you want to select, and press Enter.
The selected member name replaces the blank or wildcarded member name on the
screen from which the member name directory was requested.
Note: To assist in the location of the member you want, the SORT commands are
supported. Sort the directory by any of the columns in the directory by typing SORT
XXX or SORT XXX Y where XXX is one of the column literals and Y is A for ascending
or D for descending. For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory in descending
order of Created, and SORT ID A sorts the directory in ascending order of User ID.
The command L or LOC followed by a value positions to the first member directory
entry whose sort sequence field is greater than or equal to the specified value.

Display DSN Lists

The Display DSN Lists screen displays a list of DSN lists that are defined in your default
DSN list data set, option 0.3.

To display the DSN lists

1. Select option D from the Main Menu to request a directory of DSN lists.

22 ISPF User Guide

Display DSN List Data Sets

The DSN Lists screen displays a directory of DSN lists.

CA File Master Plus -- DSN Lists in 'USER001.DSNLIST Row 1 to 2 of 2

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S - Select DSN List U - Update I - Insert D - Delete

S DSN List Desc

_ Payroll Payroll data sets
_ PROJ10 Project 10
******************************* End of DSN Lists ******************************

2. Perform any of the line item actions.

Line item action
Specifies an action to be performed on the DSN list:
■ S—Select the DSN list to display its current contents
■ U—Select the DSN list in order to update the DSN list's contents
■ I— Insert a new DSN list. The new DSN list is placed within the list in
ascending order.
■ D—Delete the selected DSN list.

Display DSN List Data Sets

A list of data sets that are defined within a DSN list display when you select a DSN list.

To display the data sets in a DSN list

1. Select option D from the Main Menu to request a directory of DSN lists.
2. Specify S (Select) next to the DSN list you want to select, and press Enter.

Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus 23

Display DSN List Data Sets

The Use DSN List Data Set screen displays the data sets defined within the selected
DSN list.

----- CA File Master Plus -- Use DSN List Dataset ----- Row 1 of 43
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

1 - Browse 3.6 - PDS Utility 3.11 - Reformat

2 - Edit 3.7 - VSAM Utility 4 - Print

3.1 - Library Utility 3.8 - Search Utility B - ISPF Browse

3.2 - Dataset Utility 3.9 - Update Utility E - ISPF Edit
3.3 - Copy Utility 3.10 - Compare V - ISPF View

DSN List PDS ===> USER001.DSNLIST

DSN List ===> PROJ10
Desc ===> Project 10

ACT DATASET
___ _ PROJECT10.LOADLIB
____ PROJECT10.MESSAGE
____ PROJECT10.PANEL
____ PROJECT10.SKELS

Note: You can also access these lists directly from anywhere within CA File Master
Plus by typing D in any DSN field.
The Use DSN List Data Set screen contains the following information:
■ List of data sets available in the DSN list.
■ DSN list PDS—Specifies the DSN of the DSN list Parm PDS in which the DSN list
is stored. This DSN is defined in option 0.3 that is used to define the DSN of
each of the processing parameter data sets.
■ DSN list—Corresponds to the member name within the DSN list Parm PDS in
which the DSN list is stored.
■ Desc—Displays the DSN list description for the DSN list that is typed when the
DSN list is created or updated using the Update DSN List Screen.

24 ISPF User Guide

Confirm Member Delete

Confirm Member Delete

To confirm the deletion of a member, use the Confirm Member Delete screen. This
screen opens when a request is made to delete a library member online and the
processing defaults indicate that member deletes must be confirmed before they are
performed.

To confirm the deletion of a member

1. Select option D from the Main Menu to request a directory of DSN lists.
2. Type D (Select) next to the member you want to delete, and press Enter.
The Confirm Member Delete screen opens.

CA File Master Plus -------- Confirm Member Delete

COMMAND ===>

Data Set Name:

AD1DEV.USER001.JCL

Member to be Deleted:
$COLISN0

Y Confirm subsequent member deletes?

ENTER to confirm delete.

CANCEL or END to cancel delete.

3. Press Enter to proceed with the delete or press CANCEL or END (or PF key) to
prevent the member delete from occurring.
In addition, there is an indicator that controls whether to perform confirmation for
subsequent member deletes during the same invocation of the current screen.
Setting this indicator to N causes member deletes to be performed without
confirmation until the current screen is exited.
Note: You can discontinue the member delete confirmation by opening the
Processing Defaults screen, Option 0.1, and setting the Confirm Member Delete?
field to N.

Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus 25

Confirm Data Set Delete

Confirm Data Set Delete

To confirm the deletion of a data set, use the Confirm Data Set Delete screen. This
screen opens when a request is made to delete a data set online and the processing
defaults indicate that data set deletes are to be confirmed before they are performed.

To confirm the deletion of a data set

1. Select option D from the Main Menu to request a directory of DSN lists.
2. Type D (Select) next to the DSN list you want to delete, and press Enter.
The Confirm Data Set Delete screen opens.

CA File Master Plus -------- Confirm Data Set Delete

COMMAND ===>

Data Set Name:

TECH.DAALLOC.D01

ENTER to confirm delete.

CANCEL or END to cancel delete.

3. Press Enter to proceed with the delete or press CANCEL or END (or the
corresponding PF key) to prevent the data set delete from occurring.

Note: You can discontinue the data set delete confirmation by opening the Processing
Defaults screen, Option 0.1, and setting the Confirm Data Set Delete? field to N.

Rename Data Sets

The Data Set Rename screen lets you specify the new DSN to which the data set is being
renamed.

To rename a data set

1. Select option D from the Main Menu to request a directory of DSN lists.
2. Type E (Select) next to the DSN list you want to edit, and press Enter.

26 ISPF User Guide

Override Print Output Control

3. Specify Rename and press Enter.

The Data Set Rename screen opens.

CA File Master Plus -------- Data Set Rename

COMMAND ===>

Current Data Set Name:

TECH.WORKPDS4

New Data Set Name:

TECH.WORKPDS9

ENTER to rename
CANCEL or END to cancel rename.

4. Over-type the old DSN with the new DSN, and press Enter to perform the rename.
5. To cancel the rename request, use the CANCEL or END command.

Override Print Output Control

To print a database and to control the print destination for the current print, use the
Override Print Output Control screen to give you an opportunity to override the print
control parameters for the current print request. This screen opens when a request is
made through CA File Master Plus and the Confirm Print Class & Destination? parameter
field is set to Y. This parameter field is maintained using CA File Master Plus Option 0.1,
the Processing Defaults and Job Statement screen.

Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus 27

Override Print Output Control

To print a database and to control the print destination output

1. Confirm the Print IMS Database panels variables by pressing Enter.
The Print Output Control Parms screen opens.

---------- CA File Master Plus -- Print Output Control Parms ---------

COMMAND ===>

Sysout class ===> A

Number of copies ===> 1

Enter One of the Following to Control Print Destination (Optional):

Destination printer ===>

OR External JES node ===>

Userid at JES node ===>

OR Sysout writer name ===>

OR Print dataset name ===>

Dataset disposition ===> (NEW, SHR, or MOD)

ENTER to proceed END or CANCEL to bypass override

Use the parameters updated on the Print Output Control Parms screen to control
print destination for the current print request, but do not affect the default print
destination control parameters which are maintained using CA File Master Plus
Option 0.2, the Print Output Control Parms screen.
Using the Override Print Output Control screen, define the default Sysout class and
number of copies. Optionally, the print output can be one of the following:
■ Routed to a remote printer
■ Routed to a User ID at an external node
■ Accessed by a Sysout writer program
■ Copied to a data set
2. Complete the following fields in the lower section of the screen:
SYSOUT class
Defines the one-position Sysout class to which the print is to be routed. This
parameter field corresponds to the SYSOUT= JCL parameter.
Number of copies
Defines the number of print copies requested. This parameter field
corresponds to the COPIES=JCL parameter.

28 ISPF User Guide

Override Print Output Control

3. Complete one of the following selections, and press Enter.

Destination printer
Defines the printer ID of a local or remote printer to which print will be routed.
Printer IDs are often in one of the following formats: Rnnnn, RMnnnn, or
RMTnnnn where nnnn is the one-to four-digit remote printer ID.
This parameter field corresponds to the DEST= JCL parameter.
External JES node & Userid at JES node
Defines an external JES node and the user ID at the JES node to route print
output to a specified user ID within an external node.These fields operate like
the DEST=(nnnnnn,uuuuuu) JCL parameter where nnnn is JES node ID and
uuuuuu is a user ID.
Sysout writer name
Defines the member name of the writer when you want the print to be handled
by a Sysout writer program. A Sysout writer program is a started task that
controls each output record and performs user-defined processing to
manipulate and route the print file.
This parameter field corresponds to the SYSOUT=(c,wwwwww) JCL parameter
where c is the Sysout class and wwwwww is the name of the Sysout writer
program.
Print data set name
Defines the data set name to which the print is to be routed.
Note: Use of this parameter causes the print to be written to the specified data
set instead of being written to a Sysout class.
Data set disposition
Specifies the data set disposition. When print is routed to a specified data set,
you can type one of the following values to control creation or update of the
data set:
■ NEW—Create a new data set
■ SHR—Overlay an existing data set
■ MOD—Copy to the end of an existing data set
Note: Only the first position of the value is required since the rest of the value
is implied from the first position.
Your updates are used only for the current print request.

Chapter 2: Using CA File Master Plus 29

Chapter 3: Main Menu
This chapter introduces the CA File Master Plus Main Menu and its functions.

This section contains the following topics:

Main Menu (see page 31)

Main Menu
The CA File Master Plus Main Menu is the first menu displayed when the default
installation option FM is invoked. (FM may have been changed during installation.) From
the Main Menu, you can easily navigate to all functions.

An optional installation configuration allows for bypassing the Main Menu and going
directly to the desired function from any ISPF data set list by entering the appropriate
line command. These line commands and their corresponding panels follow.
FM1
Data Set Browse
FM2
Data Set Edit
FM31
Library Utility
FM310
Data Set Compare
FM311
Data Set Reformat
FM32
Data Set Utility

Chapter 3: Main Menu 31

Main Menu

FM33
Copy Utility
FM361
Locate PDSs with Specified Member
FM362
Compress PDS
FM363
Update PDS Allocation
FM364
Recover Overlaid or Deleted Members
FM37
VSAM Utility
FM38
Search Utility
FM39
Update Utility
FM4
Print Data Set
FM6
Record Layout

Setup
This function is used to maintain your personal CA File Master Plus defaults, which can
be any of the following:
■ Your jobcard, used when submitting batch jobs from within
CA File Master Plus
■ Your print defaults
■ Your parameter files, used when referencing DSN lists, selection criteria, reformat
controls, and custom record layouts
■ Your DSN list members

32 ISPF User Guide

Main Menu

Browse and Edit

These functions provide online browse and edit capabilities for sequential, VSAM, and
partitioned data sets. The browse and edit functions display data in character, hex, and
record format based on a specified COBOL or PL/I copybook. Browse and edit also
support the filtering or selection of records to be displayed. Record filter or selection
criteria can be predefined or specified when you use the browse and edit function. The
browse function also lets you specify whether you want to browse the data set in view
or browse mode.

For more information, see the Record Layouts (see page 35) section later in this chapter.

Utility Functions
CA File Master Plus provides utility functions that include the following:
■ Library functions
■ Browse, delete, rename members
■ Directory using member name masks

CA File Master Plus provides data set functions that include the following:
■ Allocations
■ Catalogs
■ Catalog/uncatalog
■ Deletes
■ Renames
■ Unused space
■ Data set information
Copy Utility
■ Supports data set types with optional selection criteria

Catalog Utility
■ Lists data sets from catalogs and VTOC
■ Supports all product functions for data sets from the data set list including search
and update

VTOC Utility
■ Lists of data sets on VTOC
■ Deletes, uncatalogs, catalogs, renames, frees, edits, and browses data sets from the
VTOC data set list

Chapter 3: Main Menu 33

Main Menu

PDS Utility
■ Locates member names in multiple PDSs or PDSEs
■ Compresses a PDS
■ Updates PDS allocation parameters
■ Recovers overlaid or deleted PDS members

VSAM Utility
■ Defines all VSAM data set types using existing data sets as a model
■ Builds alternate indexes
■ Displays VSAM data set information

Search Utility
■ Provides for record and member selection

Update Utility
■ Provides for record and member updates by selection criteria that you provide

Compare Utility
■ Compares any supported file types
■ Provides for various report formats
■ Limits compares to certain record locations
■ Starts the compare at a specific file position other than at the first record

Reformat Utility
■ Reformats a file to a different layout

Environment Utility
■ Displays the current ISPF environment, the current system hardware and software
configuration, and the DASD unit configuration

Data Set Print

The data set print utility allows online generation and submission of batch JCL to print
data sets or members. It supports printing records based on optional record filter and
selection criteria, printing records in record layout format from COBOL or PL/I
copybooks, or in character or hex formats.

34 ISPF User Guide

Main Menu

Record Filter and Selection Criteria

The browse, edit, copy, search, update, compare and print functions support selecting
library members and data records by the specification of filter and selection criteria. The
filter and selection criteria support condition or compound conditions that compare
field values to other field values or literals. Specify these conditions using field names or
record position. Select records based on key value, RBA, or record number, depending
on the access method. You can also select records based on the maximum number of
records to which selection criteria will be evaluated, maximum number of records to be
selected, record selection interval (specified number of records selected then a specified
number of records skipped). Store and reuse these selection criteria in multiple
functions, or dynamically specify them on the main screen for all supported functions.

Store record filter and selection criteria in a product SELECT parameter file for reuse by
supported product functions or between users. It can also be dynamically specified from
the menus that support this feature.

For more information on selection criteria and examples of valid syntax, see the chapter
"Filters."

Record Layouts
Online Browse/Edit, Search, Update, and Reformat support the display, printing,
selection, compare, and updating of records based on COBOL or PL/I record layouts or
copybooks and their associated field or data names. You can also view record layouts to
show the position, length, and format of each field in the record layout. Specify record
layouts as a member of a PDS, a CA Librarian data set, a CA Panvalet data set, or embed
them within a program or other member.

Chapter 3: Main Menu 35

Main Menu

Example:

Field Name Pos Format Len

01 CUSTOMER-RECORD 1 70 70
03 CUST-NAME 1 C 15 15
03 CUST-STREET 16 C 18 18
03 CUST-CITY 34 C 12 12
03 CUST-STATE 46 C 2 2
03 CUST-ZIP-CODE 48 10 10
05 CUST-ZIP 48 N 5 5
05 FILLER 53 C 1 1
05 CUST-ZIP-PLUS 54 N 4 4
03 CUST-AMOUNT 58 PS 2.2 3
01 CUSTOMER-RECORD2 1 70 70 Redefinition
03 CUST-NAME2 1 C 15 15
03 CUST-STREET2 16 C 18 18
03 CUST-CITY2 34 C 12 12
03 CUST-STATE2 46 C 2 2
03 CUST-ZIP-CODE2 48 10 10
05 CUST-ZIP2 48 N 5 5
05 FILLER2 53 C 1 1
05 CUST-ZIP-PLUS2 54 N 2 2
03 CUST-AMOUNT2 58 PS 2.2 3

Custom Record Layouts

CA File Master Plus supports standard COBOL and PL/I record layouts (copybooks)
defined as separate members in a COPY or source PDS. CA File Master Plus also supports
Custom Record Layouts (CRL). A CRL lets you define more complex record layouts that
can be constructed in the following ways:
■ Record layout extracted from a program source or other member.
■ Record layout comprising multiple record layouts in a PDS member that redefine
each other.
■ Record layout based on a subset of data names (fields) specified in a stand-alone
copybook or a copybook embedded in a program or other member.
■ Record layout that must be adjusted by a specific offset to match data records.

36 ISPF User Guide

Main Menu

CRLs also support a straightforward parameter syntax that allows the evaluation of
record type fields to determine which redefined record applies to a specific record.
Easy-to-use ISPF panels that format a COBOL or PL/I copybook are available to
automatically generate the syntax used in the following example:

IF=(CUST-BRANCH-NUM GT 00)
LAYOUTFILE=PROD.COPYLIB(CUSTREC)
LAYOUTREC=CUST-REC
SELFLD=CUST-ADDR1
SELFLD=CUST-ADDR2
SELFLD=CUST-DOB

DSN Lists
The online DSN List feature maintains lists of data set names that can be referred to by
their DSN list member name in all "Data Set Name" fields in CA File Master Plus menus.
This feature maintains these custom lists of data sets and allows easy execution of
product related functions against the data sets defined in their DSN lists. You can share
DSN lists or create personal DSN lists.

Chapter 3: Main Menu 37

Chapter 4: Setup and Processing
Parameters
This chapter describes how you can set up parameters that affect processing of CA File
Master Plus. These parameters are used to:
■ Define processing control parameters and the job statement used for batch jobs
and ISPF functions
■ Define the Sysout class and print destination for printed output
■ Define and update the processing parameter PDSs and processing parameter
members
■ Display a list of members in your DSN list PDS
■ Define the parameters of the editor's change log feature

This section contains the following topics:

Set Up Processing Parameters (see page 40)
Define Processing Defaults and Job Statements (see page 41)
Define Print Output Control Parameters (see page 43)
Define and Update Processing Data Sets (see page 45)
DSN List (see page 47)
Display DSN List Members (see page 47)
Define Change Log Parameters (see page 48)
How to Print the Change Log Data Sets (see page 50)

Chapter 4: Setup and Processing Parameters 39

Set Up Processing Parameters

Set Up Processing Parameters

Before you use CA File Master Plus, you must set up the processing parameters. Use the
Setup and Processing Parameters screen to specify these parameters.

To set up the processing parameters

1. Use the Setup and Processing Parameters screen as the starting place to define the
processing parameters and parameter files that affect processing within CA File
Master Plus.

----------- CA File Master Plus -- Setup and Processing Parameters ----------

OPTION ===>

1 DEFAULT Processing defaults and jobcard

2 PRINT Print output control parameters

3 PARM FILES Definition and update of processing datasets

4 DSN LISTS DSN Lists

5 CHANGE LOG Change Log parameters

2. Select each of the four options from the Setup and Processing Parameters screen to
perform the required setup:
1 DEFAULT
Defines processing control parameters and the job statement to be used for CA
File Master Plus jobs and ISPF functions.
2 PRINT
Defines Sysout class and print destination for print output requested from within by
CA File Master Plus
3 PARM FILES
Defines and update processing parameter PDSs and processing parameter members
to be used by CA File Master Plus.
4 DSN LISTS
Defines lists of commonly used DSNs to be processed by CA File Master Plus during
data set selection.
5 CHANGE LOG
Defines the parameters of the editor's change log.

40 ISPF User Guide

Define Processing Defaults and Job Statements

Define Processing Defaults and Job Statements

You can customize CA File Master Plus to define miscellaneous control parameters and
job statements used when submitting batch jobs. The first time you access the screen
you will see the most commonly used values for the various parameters.

Note: CA Technologies recommends setting the processing default parameters and

specifying the job statement before performing other CA File Master Plus functions.

To define screen and batch control parameters

1. Open the Setup and Processing Parameters screen.
2. Select DEFAULT from the menu.
The Processing Defaults and Job Statement screen opens.

---- CA File Master Plus -- Processing Defaults and Job Statement ----
COMMAND ===>

Processing Options:

Confirm data set deletes? ===> Y

Confirm member deletes? ===> Y
Use '=' to jump within CA product? ===> Y
Userid prefix for backup PDSs? ===> N
Confirm print class & destination? ===> Y

Work Space Allocation:

DASD Unit Name ===> SYSDA

or SMS Storage Class ===>
Size in cylinder ===> 0

===> //JOBNAME1 JOB (T,L003,5119),'CA-FILEMASTER',CLASS=A,MSGCLASS=X,

===> // MSGLEVEL=(1,1),NOTIFY=TECH1
===>
===>

3. Complete the following fields:

Confirm data set deletes?
Specifies whether you want a confirmation screen before performing an online
delete of any data set. The confirmation screen gives you the opportunity to
either proceed with the data set deletion or bypass it.
Values: Y (Yes), N (No)
If the field contains 'N', deletes are performed online without confirmation.

Chapter 4: Setup and Processing Parameters 41

Define Processing Defaults and Job Statements

Confirm member deletes?

Specifies whether you want a confirmation screen before deleting a member
from a library. The confirmation screen gives you the opportunity to either
proceed with the member deletion or bypass it. You can set an indicator to
bypass member delete confirmations until you exit the current screen, when
the member delete confirmation screen opens.
Values: Y (Yes), N (No).
If the field contains 'N', deletes are performed online without confirmation.
Use '=' to jump within CA product?
Specifies whether you want to jump from one function to another within CA
File Master Plus (Y), or jump to the ISPF function (N).
Values: Y (Yes), N (No)
Example: With a value of Y, when the command =3.1 is typed, CA File Master
Plus would jump to CA File Master Plus Option 3.1, Extract IMS Database. With
a value of N, the same command would jump to ISPF's Option 3.1.
Userid prefix for backup PDS?
Within the PDS Utility function there are three situations in which a backup or
recovery file may be created as part of the performance of a CA File Master
Plus function. These three situations are as follows:
■ Backup file created before compressing a PDS
■ Backup file created before changing PDS allocation parameters
■ PDS created that contains recovered members
In each of these situations, CA File Master Plus lets you specify the DSN used
for the backup or recovery file, or you can let CA File Master Plus generate the
DSN. Type Y to request that generated DSNs for backup or recovery PDS
contain the user's User ID as the first node.
Confirm print class & destination?
Specifies whether you want a confirmation screen displayed before requesting
an online print and before submitting a batch job that requests print. This
confirmation screen shows the Sysout class and the destination parameters
that have been defined using the Print Output Control Parms screen.
Values: Y (Yes), N (No)
Example: With a value of Y, each time a print is requested, the confirmation
screen opens allowing you to override the Sysout class and destination for the
current output. With a value of N, all print output is routed to the Sysout class
and destination defined to the Print Output Control Parms screen.

42 ISPF User Guide

Define Print Output Control Parameters

DASD Unit Name

Specifies the initial value used for the generic unit name when new workspace
data sets are allocated in CA File Master Plus. When you specify a DASD unit
name, these data sets are allocated on volumes associated with the specified
unit. Examples of common DASD uUnit names are SYSDA, DASD, and SYSALLDA.
Default: SYSDA
To control the volumes on which work space data sets are allocated, the DASD
unit name or the SMS storage class must be specified (but not both).
SMS Storage Class
Defines the initial value for the SMS storage class used for the allocation of new
data sets if the data sets are to be SMS-managed. To control the volumes on
which work space data sets are allocated, the DASD unit name or the SMS
storage class must be specified (but not both).
Size in cylinder
Specifies the number of cylinders for the maximum size of workspace data sets
allocated by CA File Master Plus.
If no limit is placed on the size of workspace data sets, enter a value of zero in
this field.
Job information
Defines one to four lines of JCL control statements, usually jobcard information.
These four lines are added to the beginning of any online generated batch jobs.
The specified job statement is used for all jobs created by the CA File Master
Plus software.
Blank lines for lines 2, 3 and 4 of the job statement specification are ignored when
generating JCL.

Define Print Output Control Parameters

If you want to define the default parameters that control print destinations, use the
Print Output Control Parms screen. You can define the default Sysout class and the
number of copies. Optionally, the print output can be as follows:
■ Routed to a remote printer
■ Routed to a user ID at an external node
■ Accessed by a Sysout writer program
■ Copied to a data set

Chapter 4: Setup and Processing Parameters 43

Define Print Output Control Parameters

Note: If you want to see what these parameters are so that you know whether to
update them, select Y in the Confirm print class & destination field on the Processing
Defaults and Jobcard screen. The pop-up displays all of the default print control
parameters.

To define print output control parameters

1. Select SETUP from the Main Menu.
The Setup and Processing Parameters screen opens.
2. Select Print from the menu.
The Print Output Control Parms screen opens.

------- CA File Master Plus -- Print Output Control Parms ----------

COMMAND ===>

Sysout class ===> A

Number of copies ===> 1

Enter One of the Following to Control Print Destination (Optional):

Destination printer ===>

OR External JES node ===>

Userid at JES node ===>

OR Sysout writer name ===>

OR Print data set name ===>

Data set disposition ===> SHR (NEW, SHR, or MOD)

3. Complete the following fields:

Sysout class
Defines the one-position Sysout class where the print output is routed. This field
corresponds to the SYSOUT= JCL parameter.
Values: *, A to Z, and 0 to 9
Number of copies
Defines the number of printed copies. This field corresponds to the COPIES= JCL
parameter.
Values: 1 to 255

44 ISPF User Guide

Define and Update Processing Data Sets

4. Complete one of the following selections to control print destination, and press
Enter.
Destination printer
Defines the printer ID of a local or remote printer where the print output will be
routed. This field corresponds to the JCL parameter DEST=.
Values: One of the following formats: Rnnnn, RMnnnn, or RMTnnnn (where 'nnnn'
is the one- to four-digit remote printer ID).
This parameter field corresponds to the DEST= JCL parameter.
External JES node & Userid at JES node
Defines the external JES node and user ID where the print output will be
routed.
These fields operate like the DEST=(nnnnnn,uuuuuu) JCL parameter where 'nnnnnn'
is JES Node ID and 'uuuuuu' is a user ID.
Sysout writer name
Defines the member name of the writer program when you want print handled
by a Sysout writer program. This program is a started task that gets control for
each output record and performs user-defined processing to manipulate and
route the print file.
This field corresponds to the SYSOUT=(c,wwwwww) JCL parameter where 'c' is the
SYSOUT Class and 'wwwwww' is the name of the SYSOUT writer program.
Print data set name
Defines the data set name where the print is to be routed.
Note: Use of this parameter causes the print to be written to the specified data
set instead of being written to a Sysout class.
Data set disposition
Specifies the data set disposition.
Values: NEW (Create a new data set), SHR (Overlay an existing data set), and
MOD (Copy to the end of an existing data set)

Define and Update Processing Data Sets

Use the Define and Update Processing Data Sets screen to define the DSNs of the
following processing parameter PDS files:
■ DSN lists
■ Selection criteria
■ Reformat control
■ Custom record layouts

Chapter 4: Setup and Processing Parameters 45

Define and Update Processing Data Sets

For each of these parameter files there is a selection field preceding the DSN that
provides access to the facility for maintaining that type of parameter.

To define and update processing data sets

1. Select SETUP from the Main Menu.
The Setup and Processing Parameters screen opens.
2. Select PARM FILES from the menu.
The Define & Update Processing Parms screen opens.

----- CA File Master Plus -- Define & Update Processing Parms ------
COMMAND ===>

Update the DSN for a Processing Parm PDS or the DSN and Member Name
for a Processing Parm Member. Select the specified file to enter
the update facility for that parm.

Processing Parm PDSs: S = Select to Update

A = Allocate New PDS

DSN Lists ===> _ ===> 'FM85.INST.DSNLIST'

Selection criteria ===> _ ===> 'FM85.INST.SELECT'
Reformat control ===> _ ===> 'FM85.INST.REFORMAT'
Custom Rec Layouts ===> _ ===> 'FM85.INST.LAYOUT'

Note: To make it easier to specify DSNs, each of the DSN fields on this screen
supports wildcarded DSN and DSN lists.
3. Specify S (select to update) or A (allocate new PDS) for the following fields:
DSN Lists
Defines the DSN list PDS. This resolves DSN fields in the user interface.
Selection criteria
Defines the selection criteria PDS. This filters input records for various
functions. You can save the filter/selection criteria to the selection criteria DSN
and use for various online functions.
Reformat control
Defines the operations to perform when reformatting a record using the
reformat utility (CA File Master Plus Option 3.11).
Custom Record Layouts
Defines the custom record layouts used by other product functions.

More Information:

For more information on DSN lists, see the chapter "DSN List Directory."
For more information on selection criteria, see the chapter "Filter Option."
For more information on record layouts, see the chapter "Record Layouts."

46 ISPF User Guide

DSN List

DSN List
You can display a list of members in your DSN list PDS using the DSN List Member
Directory screen. Each member of the DSN list PDS contains a list of DSNs that you can
reference by the member name. You can perform actions to DSN list members using
primary commands or line item commands.

Display DSN List Members

Use the following procedure to display a list of members in your DSN List PDS.

To display the members in your DSN List PDS

1. Select SETUP from the Main Menu.
The Setup and Processing Parameters screen opens.
2. Select DSN Lists from the menu.
The DSN List Member Directory screen opens.

CA File Master Plus --- DSN LISTS IN 'FM85.INST.DSNLIST' Row 1 of 4

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S - Select to Update I - Insert New DSN List D - Delete DSN List

S DSN List Desc

_ #1 desc for #1
_ #2 dsn list #2
_ TEST testdsn list
_ XX
******************************* END OF DSN LISTS ******************************

You can perform actions to DSN list members using primary commands or line item
commands.
3. For primary commands, type on the command line one of the following commands:
S listname
Select DSN list to update.
Example: S TEST selects the 'TEST' DSN List for update
I listname
Insert a new DSN list.
Example: 'I TEST2' invokes the DSN list update process for a new DSN list
named 'TEST2', The command 'I' invokes the DSN list update process and lets
you define the DSN list's member name during the update process.

Chapter 4: Setup and Processing Parameters 47

Define Change Log Parameters

D listname
Delete a DSN List.
Example: 'D TEST2' deletes the DSN list member named 'TEST2.
4. For line item commands, type S (select to update), I (insert a new DSN list) or D
(delete a DSN list) next to the DSN list.
S
Selects the line item DSN list to update.
For more information about this line command, see line item 'U' in the chapter
"DSN List Directory".
I
Inserts a DSN list whose member name is to be specified.
For more information about this line command, see the chapter "DSN List
Directory".
D
Deletes the line item DSN list.
For more information about this line command, see the chapter "DSN List
Directory".

Define Change Log Parameters

Use the Change Log Parameters Screen to define the processing parameters that affect
the change log data set within CA File Master Plus.

To define parameters for the change log

1. Select SETUP from the Main Menu.
The Setup and Processing Parameters screen opens.

48 ISPF User Guide

Define Change Log Parameters

2. Select Change Log from the menu.

The Change Log allocation parameters screen opens.

---------- CA File Master Plus -- Change Log allocation parameters ----------

COMMAND ===>

New Data set name ===> USERID.FMMVS.CHANGE.L0000000

Volume serial ===> ______

or
Generic unit name ===> ________

Space allocation unit ===> C C-cylinders

Primary allocation ===> ________ (0 = No Logging)
Secondary allocation ===> ________

3. Complete the following fields:

New Data set name
Displays the generated change log file name.
Volume serial
Defines a new change log file on a specific volume.
Generic unit name
Defines a generic unit name that CA File Master Plus will use to allocate a new
change log data set.
Space allocation unit
Displays the space allocation unit: C for cylinders.
Primary allocation
Defines the number of cylinders to indicate the space of the primary allocation
of the change log data set. The default primary allocation value is set by your
File Master Plus administrator. You cannot activate the Change Log feature
when using the Edit option if this value is zero.
Valid values: 0 through 99999999.
Secondary allocation
Defines the number of cylinders to indicate the space of the secondary
allocation of the change log data set. The default secondary allocation value is
set by your File Master Plus administrator.
Valid values: 0 through 99999999.

Chapter 4: Setup and Processing Parameters 49

How to Print the Change Log Data Sets

How to Print the Change Log Data Sets

Use the following methods to print the contents of the change log data set. To produce
a formatted report, use the CA File Master Plus batch's PRINTLOG command.

There are two ways of printing change log data sets:

■ After logging an Edit session, complete options P or PD from the Change Log Data
Set Processing panel
■ The CA File Master Plus batch's PRINTLOG command

More Information:

Batch User Guide.

50 ISPF User Guide

Chapter 5: Browsing Data Sets
This section describes how to browse data sets for members. To browse a data set you
do not have to know the member name: you can use a wildcard, or leave the field blank.

This section contains the following topics:

Browse Data Sets (see page 51)
Select Members to Process (see page 56)
Browse Primary and Line Commands (see page 58)

Browse Data Sets

To browse data sets of various file types, use the Browse Data Set screen. This screen
supports the following file types: sequential files, PDS members, and VSAM files.

To browse data sets

1. Select BROWSE from the Main Menu screen.
The Browse Data Set screen opens:

-------------- CA File Master Plus -- Browse Data Set -------------

COMMAND ===>

Specify Data Set to Browse

Data Set name ===> 'ABC.WORKPDS3'
Member name ===>
Volume ===> If data set not cataloged

Record Layout for Formatted Displays

Layout data set ===> 'FM3.INST.COPYLIB'
Layout member ===> GPRM

Selection criteria below or Selection criteria member ===>

===>
===>
===>

Display mode ===> C ( C Character S Single-rec Format M Multi-rec Format )

Browse mode ===> V ( V View B Browse )

Chapter 5: Browsing Data Sets 51

Browse Data Sets

2. Complete the following fields:

Data Set Name
Defines the data set name of the file to be browsed with member name, if
appropriate. The data set can be sequential, PDS, or VSAM. If you type a
wildcarded DSN or member name you will be able to select the data set or
member that will be browsed from a list of data sets.
Member Name
Defines the member name of the member to browse if the data set is a PDS.
Leave this field blank to receive a directory of the members in the data set. You
can also type a wildcarded member name to receive a directory of members
that match that wildcard.
Volume
Defines the volume serial number on which the data set resides, if the data set
is uncataloged.
Layout Data Set
Defines the DSN or the custom record layout member of the file to be
processed. Type a wildcarded DSN to request a list of data sets from which you
can select the desired data set. This field is required when displaying records in
single or multi-formatted modes.
Layout Member
Defines the member name of the record description copy member or custom
record layout member that describes the file to be processed.
Leave this field blank to see a directory of the members in the layout data set.
Type a wildcarded member name to see a directory of members that match
that wildcard.
Specify the LAYOUT command on this panel when you specify a layout data set
and member and you also want to dynamically build the selection criteria by
Field-Names defined in the record layout.

52 ISPF User Guide

Browse Data Sets

Selection criteria below or Selection criteria member

Defines the selection criteria if the records or members of the input file will be
filtered according to selection criteria.
Selection criteria are used to restrict your view to certain members or records
based on the following types of parameters:
■ A condition that evaluates data values in each record or member
■ Presence of a character string within a library member, record, or specified
columns
■ Specification of the first record displayed based on relative record number,
VSAM key, or VSAM RBA
■ Limit to the number of records displayed
For a complete explanation of selection criteria and examples of valid syntax,
see the chapter "Filters."

a. Supply a selection criteria member that was created with the filter utility.
b. Use the primary command LAYOUT
When you type LAYOUT, the layout defined by the layout data set name
and layout member displays. Type the selection criteria on this panel.
3. When the browse session starts in either Single (S) or Multi (M) record formatted
mode, the editor determines if the layout member contains one or several layouts.
If multiple layouts are detected, then a list of those layouts is presented to the user.
The user selects which layout is to be used by the browse session. If the layout
member is a custom record layout, or if only one layout is detected, then this step is
skipped. Once the layout is displayed, the user may change or add any conditions
and update the inclusion or omission of fields to display. If the browse session starts
in C (Character format), this step is skipped. At any time after the session has
started, and in any display mode, the MAP command can be used to display the
current layouts.
4. After the browse session starts, display the data set records in any of the following
modes:
Character Mode
Displays the record in character format as it appears on the file. You can also
use the HEX ON command to view the record data in hex. Use the CHAR
primary/line command from a browse session to display records in character
mode.

Chapter 5: Browsing Data Sets 53

Browse Data Sets

The following example shows a record in character display:

Browse YOUR.FILE Columns 00001 00072

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
****** ****************************** Top of Data *****************************
000001 1234567XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ab12345 6789
000002 7654321YYYYYYYYYYYYYYY 00000 0000
000003 9999999ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 00000 0000
****** ****************************** Bottom of Data **************************

Single Record Formatted

Displays one record at a time with the field names on the left and formatted
data values on the right. Use the HEX ON command to view the record data in
hex. You can also use the SF primary/line command from a browse session to
display a record in single record formatted mode.
Record Number
Displays the relative record number within the file.
Record Length
Displays the length of the displayed record.
Record Layout
Displays the name of the layout that is currently being used to overlay the
data.
Field Name
Contains the field level number and field name with indentation to indicate
the hierarchy of the fields.
The indentation rules for the field name column are as follows:
■ The indention amount is 2 as long as the entire name of each field fits
within the space provided.
■ The indention amount is 1, if the previous point is not true, and the entire
name of each field fits within the space provided.
■ The indention amount is 0 if both the previous points are not true.
■ Table index values will overwrite the rightmost characters of the field
name if the field name and table index values cannot fit in the space
provided.
Pos
Displays the starting position of the field within the record.
Format
Displays the data-type indicator followed by either the number of digits or
characters allowed for the field as defined by the field definition.

54 ISPF User Guide

Browse Data Sets

Valid data-type indicators are:

B – Binary N – Zoned numeric
C – Alphanumeric P – Packed
F – Floating point S – Signed
Value
Displays the formatted data as defined by the field definition.
The following example shows a record in single record format:

Browse YOUR.FILE Columns 00001 00074

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Record Number: 1 Record Length: 341 Record Layout: RFMTINA
Field Name Pos Format Value
01 CUSTOMER-RECORD 1 341
03 RFMTINA-REC-TYPE 1 C 1
03 RFMTINA-ID 2 N 7 1234567
03 RFMTINA-NAME 9 C 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
03 RFMTINA-STREET 24 C 18
03 RFMTINA-CITY 42 C 12
03 RFMTINA-STATE 54 C 2 ab
03 RFMTINA-ZIP-CODE 56 C 10 12345 6789
03 RFMTINA-ZIP-CODE2 56 10
05 RFMTINA-ZIP 56 N 5 12345
05 FILLER 61 C 1
05 RFMTINA-ZIP-PLUS 62 N 4 6789
03 RFMTINA-CENTURY-PAYMENTS(1) 66 138
05 RFMTINA-YEARLY-PAYMENTS(1 1) 66 69
10 RFMTINA-YEARLY-PAYMENT(1 1) 66 PS 3.2 111.11
10 RFMTINA-MONTHLY-PAYMENTS(1 1 1) 69 33
15 RFMTINA-MONTHLY-PAYMENT(1 1 1) 69 PS 3.2 1.00
15 RFMTINA-WEEKLY-PAYMENTS(1 1 1 1) 72 15
20 RFMTINA-WEEKLY-PAYMENT(1 1 1 1) 72 PS 3.2 0.00

Multi-Record Formatted
Displays multiple records at a time with the field name on the top of each column
and with each column containing a formatted display of the values of that field for a
screen full of records. You can also use the HEX ON command to view the record
data in hex. Use the MF primary/line command from a Browse session to display a
record in multi-record formatted mode.

Chapter 5: Browsing Data Sets 55

Select Members to Process

The following example shows a record in multi-record format:

Edit YOUR.FILE Columns 00001 00055

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
RFMTINA RFMTINA RFMTINA
REC TYPE ID RFMTINA NAME RFMTINA STREET RFMTINA CITY STATE
C 1 N 7 C 15 C 18 C 12 C 2
1------- 2------ 9-------------- 24---------------- 42---------- 54-----
****** ****************************** Top of Data *****************************
000001 1234567 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ab
000002 7654321 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
000003 9999999 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ
****** ****************************** Bottom of Data **************************

5. Browse the data set in any of the following modes:

View
Allows record modifications to the records and supports the REPLACE and
CREATE commands.
Values: C (character formatted) S (single record formatted)
M (multi-record formatted)
Tip: Change the display mode within the browse session using the primary
command that corresponds to the desired display mode (for example, CHAR or
SF or MF).
Browse
The records cannot be modified and the REPLACE and CREATE commands are
not supported.
Values: V (view) B (browse)
Tip: Use Browse mode for browsing very large data sets.

Select Members to Process

If you do not know the name of the data set, you can type in a wildcard or leave the
member name field blank on the Browse Data Set screen, and choose the member
name from the list that appears.

To select members to process

1. Select BROWSE from the Main Menu screen.
The Browse Data Set screen opens.

56 ISPF User Guide

Select Members to Process

2. On the Browse Data Set screen leave the Data Set name blank, or type in a
wildcard. Press Enter.
The Select member to process screen opens. If you specified the Member
parameter (or default) in the Selection Criteria field on the Browse Data Set screen,
this list of members reflects only those members that matched any wildcard in the
member name field and contained records that matched the specified selection
criteria.

Select member to process from 'DEV.TECH10.JCL' -------- Row 1 to 18 of 296

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S Name Size Created Changed ID

_ $BB 1033 2003/01/09 2003/01/09 15:01:55 TECH10
_ #CHGJCL 20 2001/08/14 2001/12/21 10:55:28 TECH10
_ @2838121 27 2003/07/22 2003/07/22 15:48:43 TECH10
_ ACCUM 15 2001/12/19 2002/07/19 10:02:40 TECH10
_ ACCUM2 91 2002/07/22 2002/07/22 13:41:20 TECH10
_ AIX 29 2003/04/15 2003/04/15 12:02:16 TECH10
_ ALLOCATE 39 2001/10/26 2002/02/25 13:54:09 TECH10
_ APFFM 7 2003/06/03 2003/08/28 09:00:31 TECH10
_ APFTP 5 2003/05/01 2003/06/02 08:36:35 TECH10
_ ASM 32 2002/03/04 2002/08/19 10:27:44 TECH10
_ CALLIKJ 162 2002/03/18 2002/04/10 10:38:48 TECH10
_ CALLIKJB 153 2002/03/21 2002/04/10 15:25:55 TECH10
_ CALLIKJC 142 2002/04/10 2002/04/10 16:45:29 TECH10
_ CALLIKJD 130 2002/04/10 2002/04/11 15:53:45 TECH10
_ CAWABATC 10 2003/06/20 2003/08/28 08:52:40 TECH10
_ CAWABATD 14 2003/07/10 2003/07/10 15:48:54 TECH10
_ CAWAC223 20 2003/05/23 2003/07/23 15:08:23 TECH10
_ CAWAC233 10 2002/09/20 2002/09/20 15:11:25 TECH10

3. Use the following commands to locate the members you are looking for, and type
an S (for select) next to the member once you have found it.
LOCATE | L
Positions to the first member directory entry whose sort sequence field is
greater than or equal to the specified value, when followed by a value. For
example, when the directory list is sorted by the Name column, the L ABC
positions the member list to the first member in the list whose member name
is greater than or equal to the name ABC.
MEMBER
Specifies additional member selection criteria when followed by valid selection
criteria. Using this command format reduces the current member list to only
those members that contain records that match the specified selection criteria.
Use successive MEMBER commands to continually reduce the current member
list. For example, MEMBER ABC reduces the member list to only those
members that contain the characters ABC in one of their records. A subsequent
MEMBER XYZ command reduces the member list to only those members that
contain the characters ABC and XYZ.

Chapter 5: Browsing Data Sets 57

Browse Primary and Line Commands

S member
Selects a member from the data set for processing. The member does not have
to be in the current member list to be selected.
SORT
Sorts the directory by any of the columns in the directory when you type SORT
XXX or SORT XXX Y, where XXX is one of the column literals and Y is A for
ascending or D for descending. For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory
in descending order of Created Date and SORT ID A sorts the directory in
ascending order of User ID.
4. Press Enter.

Browse Primary and Line Commands

For a description of the primary and line commands available while browsing a data set,
see the Editing Data Set chapter. When you look through a data set in browse mode,
primary and line commands that modify data are not supported.

58 ISPF User Guide

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets
This section contains the following topics:
Edit Data Sets (see page 59)
Select Members to Process (see page 64)
Manage Files with the Change Log (see page 66)
Edit VSAM ESDS Files (see page 67)
Edit Commands (see page 67)
Primary Commands (see page 68)
Edit VSAM Paths (see page 103)
Edit a Data Set or PDS Member (see page 104)

Edit Data Sets

CA File Master Plus is primarily a data editor as opposed to a source or text editor (like
the IBM ISPF editor). Special features are available that make it easier to edit data that is
in non-text format and file types not supported by the IBM ISPF editor.

To edit data sets

1. Select EDIT from the Main Menu.
The Edit Dataset screen opens. This screen lets you edit data sets for sequential
files, PDS members, and VSAM files.
2. Complete the following fields:
Dataset name
Defines the data set name of the data set to be edited. The data set can be
sequential, PDS, or VSAM. This field can also be a wildcarded DSN that lets you
select the data set or member to be edited.
Member name
Defines the member name of the member to edit if the data set to be edited is
a PDS. Leave this field blank to get a directory of the members in the data set.
You can also type a wildcarded member name to receive a directory of
members that match that wildcard.
Volume
Defines the volume serial number of the volume on which the data set resides
if the data set is uncataloged.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 59

Edit Data Sets

Layout dataset
Defines the DSN of the record description copy library or custom record layout
library that describes the file to be processed. The field can also be a
wildcarded DSN that requests a list of data sets from which you can select the
desired data set. This field is required when displaying records in single or
multiple formatted modes.
Layout member
Defines the member name of the record description copy member or custom
record layout member that describes the file to be processed.
If the field is blank you will receive a directory of the members in the layout
data set. If the field is a wildcard you will receive a directory of members that
match that wildcard.
Specify the LAYOUT command on this panel when you specify a layout data set
and member and you also want to dynamically build the selection criteria by
Field-Names defined in the record layout.
Selection criteria below or Selection criteria member
Selection criteria are used to restrict your view to certain members or records
based on the following types of parameters:
■ A condition that evaluates data values in each record or member
■ Presence of a character string within a library member, record, or specified
columns
■ Specification of the first record displayed based on relative record number,
VSAM key, or VSAM RBA
■ Limit to the number of records displayed
For a complete explanation of selection criteria and examples of valid syntax,
see the chapter "Filters."
Use a cataloged selection criteria parameter member, which has been defined
using CA File Master Plus Option 0.3.
Use the primary LAYOUT command.
Display Mode
Specifies the following values:
C – Character

60 ISPF User Guide

Edit Data Sets

The following example shows a record in character display:

Browse YOUR.FILE Columns 00001 00072

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
****** ****************************** Top of Data *****************************
000001 1234567XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX ab12345 6789
000002 7654321YYYYYYYYYYYYYYY 00000 0000
000003 9999999ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ 00000 0000
****** ****************************** Bottom of Data **************************

S – Formatted single record

The following example shows a record in single format display:

Browse YOUR.FILE Columns 00001 00074

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Record Number: 1 Record Length: 341 Record Layout: RFMTINA
Field Name Pos Format Value
01 CUSTOMER-RECORD 1 341
03 RFMTINA-REC-TYPE 1 C 1
03 RFMTINA-ID 2 N 7 1234567
03 RFMTINA-NAME 9 C 15 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
03 RFMTINA-STREET 24 C 18
03 RFMTINA-CITY 42 C 12
03 RFMTINA-STATE 54 C 2 ab
03 RFMTINA-ZIP-CODE 56 C 10 12345 6789
03 RFMTINA-ZIP-CODE2 56 10
05 RFMTINA-ZIP 56 N 5 12345
05 FILLER 61 C 1
05 RFMTINA-ZIP-PLUS 62 N 4 6789
03 RFMTINA-CENTURY-PAYMENTS(1) 66 138
05 RFMTINA-YEARLY-PAYMENTS(1 1) 66 69
10 RFMTINA-YEARLY-PAYMENT(1 1) 66 PS 3.2 111.11
10 RFMTINA-MONTHLY-PAYMENTS(1 1 1) 69 33
15 RFMTINA-MONTHLY-PAYMENT(1 1 1) 69 PS 3.2 1.00
15 RFMTINA-WEEKLY-PAYMENTS(1 1 1 1) 72 15
20 RFMTINA-WEEKLY-PAYMENT(1 1 1 1) 72 PS 3.2 0.00

The fields for this screen are described following:

Record Number
Displays the relative record number within the file.
Record Length
Displays the length of the displayed record.
Record Layout
Displays the name of the layout that is currently being used to overlay the
data.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 61

Edit Data Sets

Field Name
Contains the field level number and field name with indentation to indicate
the hierarchy of the fields.
The indentation rules for the field name column are as follows:
■ The indention amount is 2 as long as the entire name of each field fits
within the space provided.
■ The indention amount is 1, if the previous point is not true, and the entire
name of each field fits within the space provided.
■ The indention amount is 0 if both the previous points are not true.
■ Table index values will overwrite the rightmost characters of the field
name if the field name and table index values cannot fit in the space
provided.
Pos
Displays the starting position of the field within the record.
Format
Displays the data-type indicator followed by either the number of digits or
characters allowed for the field as defined by the field definition.
Valid data-type indicators are:
B – Binary N – Zoned numeric
C – Alphanumeric P – Packed
F – Floating point S – Signed
Value
Displays the formatted data as defined by the field definition.
M – Formatted multi-record
The following example shows a record in multi-record format display:

Edit YOUR.FILE Columns 00001 00055

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
RFMTINA RFMTINA RFMTINA
REC TYPE ID RFMTINA NAME RFMTINA STREET RFMTINA CITY STATE
C 1 N 7 C 15 C 18 C 12 C 2
1------- 2------ 9-------------- 24---------------- 42---------- 54-----
****** ****************************** Top of Data *****************************
000001 1234567 XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX New London CT
000002 7654321 YYYYYYYYYYYYYYY Providence NH
000003 9999999 ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Miami FL
****** ****************************** Bottom of Data **************************

Note: Change the display mode within the edit session using the primary command
that corresponds to the desired mode (for example, CHAR or SF or MF).

62 ISPF User Guide

Edit Data Sets

Change Log
Specifies that all editor changes made to a data set will be captured in the
change log file defined in the option Setup Change Log parameters.
Y–Capture all changes. Requires that the change log be activated through the
option Setup Change Log parameters.
N–Do not capture any changes.
Note: This option appears as protected it if your File Master Plus administrator
has set the Change Log feature to remain activated.
3. When the browse session starts in either Single (S) or Multi (M) record formatted
mode, the editor determines if the layout member contains one or several layouts.
If multiple layouts are detected, then a list of those layouts is presented to the user.
The user selects which layout is to be used by the browse session. If the layout
member is a custom record layout, or if only one layout is detected, then this step is
skipped. Once the layout is displayed, the user may change or add any conditions
and update the inclusion or omission of fields to display. If the browse session starts
in C (Character format), this step is skipped. At any time after the session has
started, and in any display mode, the MAP command can be used to display the
current layouts.
4. Edit the data set using the following display modes:
Character Mode
Displays the record in character format as it appears on the file. Use the HEX
command within character mode to view the record data in hex. You can also
use the CHAR primary/line command from a browse session to display records
in character mode.
Single Record Formatted
Displays one record at a time with the field names on the left and formatted
data values on the right. Line commands are not available in this editing mode.
You can also use the SF primary/line command from a browse session to
display a record in single record formatted mode.
Multi-Record Formatted
Displays multiple records on a screen in rows and columns with the field name
on the top of each column and with each column containing a formatted
display of the values of that field for a screen full of records. You can also use
the MF primary/line command from a browse session to display a record in
multi-record formatted mode.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 63

Select Members to Process

Select Members to Process

If you do not know the member name in the library, you can type a wildcard or leave the
member name field blank on the Browse Data Set screen, then choose the member
name for the list that appears.

To select members to process

1. Select EDIT from the Main Menu.
The Edit Data Set screen opens.
2. Leave the data set name blank, or type in a wildcard. Press Enter.
The Select Member to Process screen opens and lists the members in the library in
response to a wildcarded or blank member name field. If you specified the member
parameter in the Selection Criteria, the list of members reflects only those
members that matched any wildcard in the member name field and contains
records that match the specified selection criteria.

Select member to process from 'DEV.TECH10.JCL' -------- Row 1 to 18 of 296

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S Name Size Created Changed ID

_ $BB 1033 2003/01/09 2003/01/09 15:01:55 TECH10
_ @2838121 27 2003/07/22 2003/07/22 15:48:43 TECH10
_ ACCUM 15 2001/12/19 2002/07/19 10:02:40 TECH10
_ ACCUM2 91 2002/07/22 2002/07/22 13:41:20 TECH10
_ AIX 29 2003/04/15 2003/04/15 12:02:16 TECH10
_ ALLOCATE 39 2001/10/26 2002/02/25 13:54:09 TECH10
_ APFFM 7 2003/06/03 2003/08/28 09:00:31 TECH10
_ APFTP 5 2003/05/01 2003/06/02 08:36:35 TECH10
_ ASM 32 2002/03/04 2002/08/19 10:27:44 TECH10
_ CALLIKJ 162 2002/03/18 2002/04/10 10:38:48 TECH10
_ CALLIKJB 153 2002/03/21 2002/04/10 15:25:55 TECH10
_ CALLIKJC 142 2002/04/10 2002/04/10 16:45:29 TECH10
_ CALLIKJD 130 2002/04/10 2002/04/11 15:53:45 TECH10
_ CAWABATC 10 2003/06/20 2003/08/28 08:52:40 TECH10
_ CAWABATD 14 2003/07/10 2003/07/10 15:48:54 TECH10
_ CAWAC223 20 2003/05/23 2003/07/23 15:08:23 TECH10
_ CAWAC233 10 2002/09/20 2002/09/20 15:11:25 TECH10
_ CAWADRVR 74 2002/04/12 2003/05/01 12:06:20 TECH10

3. Use the following commands to locate the members you are looking for, and type
an S next to the member once you have found it:
LOCATE | L
Positions to the first member directory entry whose sort sequence field is
greater than or equal to the specified value, when followed by a value. For
example, when the directory list is sorted by the Name column, the L ABC
positions the member list to the first member in the list whose member name
is greater than or equal to the name ABC.

64 ISPF User Guide

Select Members to Process

MEMBER
Specifies additional member selection criteria when followed by valid selection
criteria. Using this command format reduces the current member list to only
those members that contain records that match the specified selection criteria.
Use successive MEMBER commands to continually reduce the current member
list. For example, MEMBER ABC reduces the member list to only those
members that contain the characters ABC in one of their records. A subsequent
MEMBER XYZ command reduces the member list to only those members that
contain the characters ABC and XYZ.
S membername
Selects a member from the data set for processing. The member does not have
to be in the current member list to be selected.
SORT
Sorts the directory by any of the columns in the directory when you type SORT
XXX or SORT XXX Y, where XXX is one of the column literals and Y is A for
ascending or D for descending. For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory
in descending order of Created Date, and SORT ID A sorts the directory in
ascending order of User ID.
4. Press Enter.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 65

Manage Files with the Change Log

Manage Files with the Change Log

When the change log indicator on the Edit Dataset screen is set to Y, all updates made
to a data set during the edit session are logged to the change log data set defined
through option 0.5, Setup Change Log parameters.

Manage files with the change log

1. Fill out the fields on the Edit Dataset screen for editing a data set.
2. Set the change log field to Y. Press Enter.
You will see Logging in the upper left corner of the Edit session when logging is
active, as shown in the following example:

Edit - Logging USER.FILE Columns 00001 00071

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
****** ****************************** Top of Data *****************************
000001 001 NH
000002 002 df
000003 003 NH
000004 004 NH
000005 005 NH
000006 006 NH
000007 007 NV
000008 008 NV
000009 009 NV
000010 011 NV |
000011 012 NV ^
000012 013 NV

3. Exit the edit session with change logging active.

The Change Log Data Set Processing panel displays:

----------- CA File Master Plus -- Change Log Data set Processing ----------
Command ==> __________________________________________________________________

Select one of the following dispositions ===> __

P. Print dataset (add to same dataset in next session)
PD. Print dataset and delete
D. Delete dataset without printing
K. Keep dataset (add to same dataset in next session)
KN. Keep dataset (allocate new dataset in next session)

Log data set: USERID.FMMVS.CHANGE.L0000000

Description of Change:
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________

ENTER or PF3 to proceed

Use this panel to instruct CA File Master Plus on how to handle the created file:
Select one of the following dispositions:

66 ISPF User Guide

Edit VSAM ESDS Files

P
Displays the Change Log Dataset Print Options panel on which you can update
your print options. This creates a print JCL that you can submit.
PD
Displays the Change Log Dataset Print Options panel on which you can update
your print options. This creates a print JCL that you can submit. The change log
data set will be deleted whether or not the JCL is submitted. This value is
unavailable when Change Log is activated by your File Master Plus
administrator.
D
Deletes the change log data set immediately. No printing is done. This value is
unavailable when Change Log is activated by your File Master Plus
administrator.
K
Keeps the current change log data set and appends the next logging editor
session to it.
KN
Keeps the current change log data set and allocates a new one with the start of
the next logging editor session.
Description of Change
Displays three lines where you can record comments or any data related to this
particular edit session. These comments are written to the log data set and
printed to the change log report.

Edit VSAM ESDS Files

When editing a VSAM ESDS, only updating of existing records is supported. Records
cannot be deleted, inserted, copied, or moved.

Edit Commands
The CA File Master Plus data editor supports both primary and line commands to
perform data searching and manipulation during your edit session. Specify Primary
commands on the (Command ===>) line that are performed against the entire data set.
Specify Line commands in the six position record sequence or line command field. Line
commands are performed against a single line or a block of lines.

This section provide an alphabetical listing of the primary commands available when
using the CA File Master Plus data editor. The line commands follow.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 67

Primary Commands

Primary Commands
This section describes the primary commands.

AUTOSAVE
Sets autosaving of a data set when the END command is processed during the current
edit session. If autosaving is off, you must specify the SAVE command to save any
changes made to the data set during the edit session, or CANCEL to cancel the edit
session without saving changes. To retain the value of AUTOSAVE between edit
sessions, use the PROFILE command.

Syntax:
AUTOSAVE [ON | OFF]

BOTTOM
Jumps to the last line of the data set.

Alias: B

BOUNDS
Sets the left and right boundary for subsequent commands.

Syntax:
BOUNDS [lmargin rmargin]

Syntax description:
lmargin
Column number for left boundary/margin.
rmargin
Column number for right boundary/margin.

Note: When you do not type a sub-command, the BOUNDS command resets the left and
right margins to their default values, which is position 1 for the left margin, and the last
record position for the right margin.

68 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

To view the current BOUNDS setting, insert a BOUNDS line by typing the line command
BNDS on any line.

Alias: BNDS, BND

BROWSE
Switches the current edit session to a browse session. If you made any record changes
during the edit session, a prompt is sent to save or cancel the changes before switching
to a browse session.

CANCEL
Terminates the CA File Master Plus edit session without saving the changes to the data
set since the last save command.

Alias: CAN

CAPS
Turns CAPS on or off in the current edit session. To retain the CAPS value between edit
sessions, use the PROFILE command.

Syntax:

CAPS [ON|OFF]

CHANGE
Changes one string to another. For more details on changing to or from strings of
different lengths, see the section "Change Command "From" and "To" Character Strings
of Different Lengths" later in this chapter, and also see the PDSCHG command.

Syntax:

CHANGE
fromstr tostr
[FIRST|LAST|NEXT|PREV|ALL]
[WORD|PREFIX|SUFFIX|CHAR]
[label1 label2]
[lcol rcol]
[X|NX]

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 69

Primary Commands

Syntax Description:
fromstr
Specifies the from string. This can be a simple character string, with or without
quotes; a character string specified as C'ccc', a text string specified as T'ccc', a hex
string specified as X'xx', or a packed-decimal expression specified as P'y' or PL'vvv'.
See the section following on Rules for Finding Packed Strings on the FIND
Command.
tostr
Specifies the to string. This can be a simple character string, with or without quotes;
a character string specified as C'ccc', a text string specified as T'ccc', a hex string
specified as X'xx', or a packed-decimal expression specified as P'y' or PLn'vvv'.
FIRST
Starts search at the beginning of the data set, and locates the first occurrence of
fromstr.
LAST
Starts search at the end of the data set, and locates the last occurrence of fromstr.
NEXT
Starts from the current cursor position, and locates the next occurrence of fromstr.
PREV
Starts from current cursor position, and locates the previous occurrence of fromstr.
ALL
Locates all occurrences of fromstr.
WORD
fromstr should match only complete words.
PREFIX
fromstr should match only strings at the beginning of words.
SUFFIX
fromstr should match only strings at the end of words.
CHAR
fromstr should match regardless of word status.
label1
Specifies the first end point in a range of lines to which the CHANGE command
should be restricted.

70 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

label2
Specifies the second end point in a range of lines to which the CHANGE command
should be restricted.
lcol
Specifies the leftmost column in which fromstr can appear; if rcol is not also
specified, fromstr must begin exactly in lcol.
rcol
Specifies the rightmost column in which fromstr can appear.
X
Only excluded lines should be examined.
NX
Excluded lines should not be examined.

Alias: C, CHG

CHAR
Switch the display mode to character.

COLS
Displays a stationary ruled column header immediately below the command line.

Syntax:

COLS ON|OFF

Alias: COL

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 71

Primary Commands

COPY
Copies records from another data set into your EDIT or VIEW session.

The COPY primary command accepts no arguments but must be accompanied by an A or

B line command to identify the target location for the copy. Place an A on any line to
copy the selected records after that line or B on any line to copy the selected records
before that line.

The COPY command prompts you for the name of the data set (and optionally the
member and volume serial number) from which the records should be copied. In the
dsname field, use a wildcard to display a selection list of data sets matching the
wildcard, or use a D command to select a data set from one of your pre-existing dsname
lists. In the member field, use a wildcard to display a selection list, but select only one
member can be selected.

Use selection criteria to limit the records being selected for the copy. Follow the same
rules for entering selection criteria that apply to any CA File Master Plus function,
including EDIT or VIEW. Type dynamic selection criteria in the space provided, or type
the name of a member from your selection criteria library.

Copy selected records directly into your EDIT or VIEW session, or choose to preview the
selected records before completing the copy operation. If you choose the preview
option, the selected records are placed into a new edit session for a temporary data set
containing the selected records. You can modify, insert, or delete records as needed.
You can copy the resulting set of records into your original edit session. You also have
the option of canceling the copy operation if you are not satisfied with the records
selected.

Each time you use the COPY primary command, the values selected during the previous
COPY command are retrieved for your convenience.

COUNTS
Displays records currently displayed, total records in the file, and optionally the total
records selected.

Alias: COUNT

72 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

CREATE
Copies the specified records to a new data set or PDS member. If you do not use the C
or CC line commands to specify which records to select during the CREATE function, all
records being edited or viewed are copied to the new dsn or member. If the edit or view
session is using record filtering or selection criteria, only those records that match the
selection criteria are copied to the specified data set.

If a DSN is not supplied, a pop-up window displays requesting the new data set name or
new member name.

Syntax:

CREATE dsn(member) | member

Syntax Description:
dsn(member)
Specifies a fully qualified (in quotes) or unqualified data set name (no quotes) of a
new sequential data set or existing PDS data set and new member into which the
selected records are copied.
member
Specifies the name of a new PDS member into which the selected records are
copied. This syntax is only valid when browsing or editing a PDS.
If the data set or PDS member already exists, the command fails with an error
message.
Alias: CRE

The CREATE command is not valid while in browse mode.

DELETE
Deletes records from the top of the edit display. You can delete a single record or a
number of records.

You can also delete only excluded or non-excluded lines. When used in this way you can
delete ALL excluded or non-excluded lines, or you can specify a range using labels.

Syntax:

DELETE
{1 | number} | {{NX | X} {ALL | label1 label2 }}

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 73

Primary Commands

Syntax Description:
number
Specifies the number of records to delete. The default is one.
ALL
Specifies that all excluded or non-excluded records will be deleted.
label1
Specifies that the first end point in a range of records to which the DELETE
command should be restricted. Use labels only with X or NX.
label2
Specifies that the second end point in a range of records to which the DELETE
command should be restricted. Use labels only with X or NX.
X
Specifies that only excluded records will be deleted.
NX
Specifies that only non-excluded records will be deleted.

Alias: DEL

DOWN
Moves the current line position toward the end of the data set when in character or
multiple record display mode. Moves the current column position towards the end of
the record when in single record display mode.

Syntax:
DOWN number | MAX | PAGE | CSR | HALF | DATA

Syntax Description:
number
Identifies the number of lines or columns to move.
MAX
Jumps to the last line in the data set or last column in the record.
PAGE
Scrolls forward one screen-length.
CSR
Attempts to make the line containing the cursor the first line displayed on the
screen when the cursor is on a data line.

74 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

HALF
Scrolls forward half of the screen length.
DATA
Scrolls forward so that the last visible line becomes the first visible line.

DSINFO
Displays data set information for the data set being edited. Information displayed
includes; data set organization, data set definition information, data set allocation
information, creation, last referenced, expiration dates, and SMS information.

EDIT
Switches current browse session into an edit session.

END
Terminates the CA File Master Plus edit or browse session.

Alias: RETURN

EXCLUDE
Excludes lines that match a pattern or string. Contiguous excluded lines are displayed as
a single line of dashes letting you view unexcluded lines on the same or fewer screens.

Syntax:

EXCLUDE
fromstr
[FIRST|LAST|NEXT|PREV|ALL
[WORD|PREFIX|SUFFIX|CHAR]
[label1 label2]
[lcol rcol]

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 75

Primary Commands

Syntax Description:
fromstr
Specifies the from string. This may be a simple character string, with or without
quotes; a character string specified as C'ccc', a text string specified as T'ccc', a hex
string specified as X'xx', a picture expression specified as P'ppp', or a
packed-decimal expression specified as PL'vvv'.
FIRST
Starts search at the beginning of the data set, and locates the first occurrence of
fromstr.
LAST
Starts search at the end of the data set, and locates the last occurrence of fromstr.
NEXT
Starts from the current cursor position, and locates the next occurrence of fromstr.
PREV
Starts from the current cursor position, and locates the previous occurrence of
fromstr.
ALL
Locates all occurrences of fromstr.
WORD
fromstr should match only complete words.
PREFIX
fromstr should match only strings at the beginning of words.
SUFFIX
fromstr should match only strings at the end of words.
CHAR
fromstr should match regardless of word status.
label1
Specifies the first end point in a range of lines to which the EXCLUDE command
should be restricted.
label2
Specifies the second end point in a range of lines to which the EXCLUDE command
should be restricted.

76 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

lcol
Specifies the leftmost column in which fromstr may appear; if rcol is not also
specified, fromstr must begin exactly in lcol.
rcol
Specifies the rightmost column in which fromstr may appear.

Alias: X

FIND
Locates data or, when in formatted mode, can also be used to locate fields.

Syntax:

FIND
fromstr
[FIRST|LAST|NEXT|PREV|ALL]
[WORD|PREFIX|SUFFIX|CHAR|FIELD]
[label1 label2]
[lcol rcol]
[X|NX]

Syntax Description:
fromstr
Specifies the from string; this may be a simple character string, with or without
quotes; a character string specified as C'ccc', a text string specified as T'ccc', a hex
string specified as X'xx', or a a packed-decimal expression specified as P'y' or
PLn'vvv'. See the section on Rules for finding packed strings on the FIND Command
later in this chapter.
FIRST
Starts search at the beginning of the data set, and locates the first occurrence of
fromstr.
LAST
Starts search at the end of the data set, and locates the last occurrence of fromstr.
NEXT
Starts from the current cursor position, and locates the next occurrence of fromstr.
PREV
Starts from current cursor position, and locates the previous occurrence of fromstr.
ALL
Locates all occurrences of fromstr.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 77

Primary Commands

WORD
fromstr should match only complete words.
PREFIX
fromstr should match only strings at the beginning of words.
SUFFIX
fromstr should match only strings at the end of words.
CHAR
fromstr should match regardless of word status.
FIELD
fromstr should match a partial or entire field name when displaying formatted
records.
label1
Specifies the first end point in a range of lines to which the EXCLUDE command
should be restricted.
label2
Specifies the second end point in a range of lines to which the EXCLUDE command
should be restricted.
lcol
Specifies the leftmost column in which fromstr can appear; if rcol is not also
specified, fromstr must begin exactly in lcol.
rcol
Specifies the rightmost column in which fromstr can appear.
X
Only excluded lines should be examined.
NX
Excluded lines should not be examined.

Alias: F

78 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

FINDLIM
Sets the number of records to be searched when using the FIND command in the
current edit or browse session. To retain the FINDLIM value between edit sessions, use
the PROFILE command.

Syntax:

FINDLIM [50000 | number ]

Syntax Description:
number
Limits the number of subsequent records searched when using the FIND command.
number must be an integer value between 0 and 99999999, inclusive. A value of 0
means that there is no limit to the number of records that are searched.

FLIP
Flips (or reverses) the EXCLUDE status of all lines in the data set. Lines that were not
excluded will be excluded and lines that were excluded will not be excluded.

HELP
Invokes the CA File Master Plus HELP processor.

HEX
Turns HEX mode on or off in the current edit or browse sesson. To retain the HEX value
between edit sessions, use the PROFILE command.

Syntax:

HEX [on|OFF]

HILITE
Turns FIND or CHANGE highlighting on or off in the current edit or browse session. To
retain the HILITE value between edit sessions, use the PROFILE command.

Syntax:
HILITE [on|OFF]

Alias: HI, HILIGHT

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 79

Primary Commands

INSERT
Inserts a new record immediately after the record at the top of the screen. When in
character mode, a record containing all blanks is inserted. When in single or multiple
record formatted mode, the inserted record is initialized using the field-name data types
as defined in the record layout.

Alias: I

KEY
Toggle to unlock or lock (unprotect or protect) the first VSAM KSDS record at the top of
the screen key's field, letting the key field be modified when unprotected, or not
modified when protected. All key fields are initially displayed protected.

Alias: K

LEFT
Moves the current column position towards the record's position 1 when in character or
multiple record formatted mode, and moves the current file position towards the
beginning of the file when in single record formatted mode. Scrolling in multiple record
formatted mode will not split a field unless it is too long to display.

Syntax:

LEFT number | MAX|PAGE|CSR|HALF|DATA

Syntax Description:
number
Identifies the number of columns or records to scroll.
MAX
Sets the column or record position to the beginning of the line or file.
PAGE
Scrolls one screen or record to the left. When in multi-record format mode the
rightmost visible column will be the column before the leftmost visible column on
the screen.
CSR
Attempts to make the column under the cursor the rightmost displayed column if
the cursor is on a data line.

80 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

HALF
Scrolls half of the screen width to the left when in character or multiple record
display modes. Scrolls one record left when in single record formatted mode.
DATA
Attempts to change the column position so that the leftmost visible column
becomes the rightmost column position.

LOCATE
Jumps directly to a record.

Syntax:

LOCATE lnum | label | key value | kwd

[FIRST|LAST|NEXT|PREV|KEY]

Syntax Description:
lnum
Displays the numeric line number.
label
Displays a previously defined label.
key value
Displays a full or partial VSAM key field value. Hex values (X'value') are also
supported.
kwd
Includes one of the following commands:
CHANGE
Jumps to record with line CHANGE attribute
COMMAND
Jumps to record with line COMMAND attribute
ERROR
Jumps to record with ERROR attribute
FIRST
Jumps to the first record with the requested attribute with kwd.
LAST
Jumps to the last record with requested attribute with kwd.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 81

Primary Commands

NEXT
Jumps to the next record with the requested attribute with kwd.
PREV
Jumps to the previous record with the requested attribute with kwd.
KEY
Jumps to the record with a key value GTEQ the key_value. The KEY command is only
valid for keyed files.

Alias: L, LOC

MAP
Displays the current layouts and allows changing conditions that determine the use of a
layout to display records in Single or Multiple record format mode and which fields to
display. This command also supports the following actions, which are valid only within
MAP command:
■ The ability to specify a Record Offset value at the layout level in a custom record
layout (CRL)
■ The ability to define the field in a layout that the editor considers to be the start of
the description for a data record using line action LS

The following list describes the results of the MAP command for layout members in
different formats:
■ Copybook containing a single layout—that layout is displayed. You can then exclude
or apply conditions to the fields. Upon exit, the editor formats records according to
these conditions.
■ Copybook containing several layouts—a list of the layouts is displayed. You can then
select any layout and exclude or apply conditions to the fields. When you exit the
list of layouts, the editor formats records according to these conditions.
■ CRL member—a list of the views is displayed. Select any entry and exclude or
change the conditions that apply to fields in the related layout. Conditions and
exclusions for the related layout already contained in a CRL member are displayed
when this entry is selected for processing. You cannot insert or delete any layout
from the layout list or from the CRL’s view list. You also cannot save your updates to
the existing CRL member.

82 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

Specify Record Offset Value Using MAP Command

You can specify a record offset value at the layout level in CRL using the MAP command.

Follow these steps:

1. Type MAP on the command line when editing or browsing a file.
The Custom Record Layout Member Update screen opens.
2. Type the line action S on any layout member.
3. Press Enter.
The Layout Entry Field Update screen opens.
4. Specify a new record offset value in the Record Offset Value field.
5. Press Enter.
A new value is set for this updated layout member only.

Note: Leave empty or specify a 0 (zero) in the Layout Entry Field Update screen to reset
the record offset value of a layout member.

Set Layout Start Using MAP Command

Using the MAP command, you can indicate the field in a layout that the editor considers
the start of the data record's description.

When you type the MAP command, the screen that opens depends on the type of
layout you are working with.
■ When working with a custom record layout, the Custom Record Layout Member
Update screen opens.
■ When working with a copybook with multiple layouts, the Layout Selection screen
opens.
■ When working with a copybook with a single layout, the Layout Entry Field Update
screen opens.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 83

Primary Commands

Follow these steps:

1. Complete the following steps if you are working with a custom record layout or a
copybook with multiple layouts, :
a. Type S on any layout member.
b. Press Enter.
The Layout Entry Field Update screen opens.
2. Type LS in any field.
3. Press Enter.
The selected field is identified as the layout start, and the editor recognizes this
field as the start of the data record's description.

The following rules and restrictions apply when using the layout start command (LS):
■ The LS action at the first field is ignored when there is no layout start defined.
Otherwise, the previous layout start specification is reset.
■ The LS action is allowed at the first occurrence only when a layout contains OCCURS
definitions.
■ S/SS line actions are not allowed above an existing layout start specification.
■ The LS action should precede the first field with selection conditions.

MF
Displays records in multiple record formatted mode using the layout data set and
member specified on the Edit or Browse Dataset panels.

NEXT
Moves the current column position towards the record's last position when in character
or multiple record formatted mode, and moves the current file position towards the end
of the file when in single record formatted mode. Scrolling in multiple record formatted
mode will not split a field unless it is too long to display.

Syntax:

NEXT [number]

84 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

Syntax Description:
number
In character and single record modes number signifies the relative number of
records to advance. The default value is 1.
In multi-record mode number signifies the relative number of fields to advance. The
default value is the number of fields necessary to populate a new display.

Alias: N

NULLS
Determines if blanks in data record are written to the panel as blanks or nulls in the
current edit session. To retain the NULLS value between edit sessions, use the PROFILE
command.

Syntax:

NULLS [ON | OFF | STD | FULL]

Syntax Description:
ON
Defaults to STD. Trailing blanks at the end of the data are written as one blank and
nulls
OFF
Trailing blanks at the end of the data are written to the panel as blanks.
STD
Trailing blanks at the end of data are written as one blank and nulls.
FULL
All trailing blanks at the data are written as nulls.

Note: Omitting a value will default to STD.

NUMEXT
Controls the number of digits allowed in a binary or packed field when the physical field
size is larger than the number of digits specified in the COBOL or PL/I picture clause. To
retain the NUMEXT value between edit sessions, use the PROFILE command.

Syntax:

NUMEXT [OFF | ON]

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 85

Primary Commands

PDSCHG
Sets the mode for the CHANGE command in the current edit session when editing a PDS
member and changing to and from strings of different lengths. To retain the PDSCHG
value between edit sessions, use the PROFILE command.

Syntax:

PDSCHG [D|DATA | I|ISPF]

Syntax Description:
D|DATA
When the length of the to string differs from the length of the from string, the line
data is shifted left or right as needed, after confirmation from the user.
I|ISPF
When the length of the to string differs from the length of the from string, the line
data is shifted left or right as needed within the regions bounded by multiple
blanks. The rules for shifting are the same as those for ISPFEDIT. When shifting
cannot be completed, the line is marked with ERROR.

PREV
Moves the current column position towards the record's position 1 when in character or
multiple record formatted mode, and moves the current file position towards the
beginning of the file when in single record formatted mode. Scrolling in multiple record
formatted mode will not split a field unless it is too long to display.

Syntax:

PREV [number]

Syntax Description:
number
In character and single record modes number signifies the relative number of
records to back up. The default value is 1.
In multi-record mode number signifies the relative number of fields to back up. The
default value is the number of fields necessary to populate a new display.
Alias: P

86 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

PROFILE
Displays and updates the current profile settings, or switches to a different profile.

Syntax:

PROFILE [name]

Syntax Description:
name
Name of the profile to be loaded and displayed. If omitted, the DEFAULT profile is
used.
Autosave
Controls whether outstanding updates are saved when the END command is
specified.
Caps
Controls the upper/lower case of inserted alphabetic data.
Findlim
Controls the maximum number of records searched during a FIND command.
Hex
Controls how data is displayed in CHAR, SF, or MF modes.
Hilite
Controls the highlighting of FIND command target data.
Nulls
Controls the value for trailing blanks at the end of data.
Numext
Controls the number of digits allowed in a binary or packed field when the physical
field size is larger than the number of digits specified in the COBOL or PL/I picture
clause.
PdsChg
Controls the shifting of data for a CHANGE command when editing a PDS member.
Stats
Controls whether ISPF statistics are generated for partitioned data sets.

Alias: PRO, PROF

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 87

Primary Commands

RCHANGE
Repeats the most recent CHANGE command.

REPEAT
Repeats the record that appears at the top of the screen.

Alias: R

REPLACE
Copies the data to an existing or new data set or PDS member with the specified
records. If you do not use the C or CC line commands to specify which records to select
during the REPLACE function, all records being edited or viewed are copied to the
existing dsn/member. If the edit/view session is using record filtering/selection criteria,
only those records that match the selection criteria will be recopied to the specified
data set.

If you do not supply a DSN, a pop-up window displays requesting an existing data set
name or existing member name.

Syntax:

REPLACE dsn(member) | member

Syntax Description:
dsn(member)
Specifies a fully qualified (in quotes) or unqualified data set name (no quotes) of an
existing sequential data set or existing PDS data set and member into which the
selected records are copied.
member
Specifies the name of an existing member into which the selected records are
copied. This syntax is only valid when browsing or editing a PDS.
If the data set or PDS member does not exist, the command fails with an error
message.
ALIAS: REPL

The REPLACE command is not valid while in browse mode.

88 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

RESET
Resets selected processing options and status conditions.

Syntax:

RESET ALL
LAB | LABELS
CMD | COMMAND
ERR | ERROR
C | CHG | CHANGE
X | EX | EXCLUDED
SPEC | SPECIAL
F | FIND
range

Syntax Description:
ALL
Resets everything; this is the default.
LAB or LABELS
Removes line labels.
CMD or COMMAND
Clears pending line commands.
ERR or ERROR
Removes ERROR flags.
CHG, C, or CHANGE
Removes CHG flags.
X, EX, or EXCLUDED
Resets exclude status.
SPEC or SPECIAL
Removes all SPECIAL lines (MASK, COLS, TABS, BNDS).
F or FIND
Clears all FIND highlights.
range
A line range specified as a start label and end label. Only lines within the specified
range are affected.

Alias: RES

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 89

Primary Commands

RFIND
Repeats the most recently entered FIND command, or the search part of the most
recent CHANGE command.

RIGHT
Moves the current column position towards the record's last position when in character
or multiple record formatted mode, and moves the current file position towards the end
of the file when in single record formatted mode. Scrolling in multiple record formatted
mode will not split a field unless it is too long to display.

Syntax:
RIGHT number | MAX|PAGE|CSR|HALF|DATA

Syntax Description:
number
Identifies the number of columns or records to scroll.
MAX
Sets the column or record position to the end of the line or file.
PAGE
Scrolls one screen-width or record to the right. When in multi-record format mode
the leftmost visible column will be the column after the rightmost visible column on
the screen.
CSR
If the cursor is on a data line, attempts to make the column under the cursor the
rightmost displayed column.
HALF
Scrolls half of the screen width to the right when in character or multiple record
display modes. Scrolls one record right when in single record formatted mode.
DATA
Attempts to change the column position so the rightmost visible column becomes
the rightmost column position.

SAVE
Saves the current edit changes to the data set being edited.

Alias: S

90 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

SELECT
Displays record selection criteria used to browse or edit the data set or member.

SF
Displays the record at the top of the display in single record format mode using the
layout data set and member specified on the Edit or Browse Dataset panels.

SORT
In general, syntax is the same as the ISPF SORT command. If you do not specify
operands, the entire memory copy of the records being browsed or edited is sorted into
ascending order. If the data set is VSAM, the default sort key is the key column for a
KSDS, the RBA for an ESDS, and the RRN for an RRDS. Otherwise, the default sort key is
the entire record.

Syntax:

SORT [fcol1 lcol1[A|D]]…[fcol10 lcol10[A|D]

[KEY[A|D]]
[X|NX|ALL]
[label1 label2]

Syntax Description:
SORT
Sorts and displays the data according to the sort criteria.
fcol1 – Beginning column in which data is sorted.
col1 – Ending column in which the data is sorted.
KEY
An alias for the appropriate column range that contains the VSAM key.
Specify up to ten sort keys. For each, you must specify the starting (fcolx) and
ending (lcolx) column. Optionally, you can specify a direction (ascending or
descending). When specified, a direction applies to the most recently
specified column range, and to all ranges that follow unless overridden by a later
direction.
X
If specified, only excluded lines are sorted.
NX
If specified, only non-excluded lines are sorted.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 91

Primary Commands

label1
Specifies the beginning point in a range of lines to which the SORT command should
be restricted.
label2
Specifies the ending point in a range of lines to which the SORT command should be
restricted.

Examples:

SORT KEY D
Sort on VSAM key into descending sequence
SORT 10 20 30 40
Sort on columns 10-20 and 30-40, in ascending sequence
SORT 10 20 D 30 40 50 60 A
Sort on columns 10-20 and 30-40, in descending sequence, and
on columns 50-60 in ascending sequence.

STATS
Turns PDS STATS to either ON or OFF in the current edit session. If the parameter value
is missing, ON is used. To retain the STATS value between edit sessions, use the PROFILE
command.

Syntax:

STATS [ON|OFF]

SUBMIT
Submits the current data set for execution.

Alias: SUB

TOP
Jumps to the first line in the edit or browse session.

Alias: T

92 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

UNSORT
Sorts the records in their original sequence when the browse or edit session started.
This command lets you use the SORT command to view sequential file and PDS member
data in different sequences and UNSORT the records to their original sequence.

UP
Moves the current line position toward the beginning of the data set when in character
or multiple record formatted mode. Moves the current column position towards the
beginning of record when in single record formatted mode.

Syntax:

UP number | MAX | PAGE | CSR | HALF | DATA

Syntax Description:
number
Identifies the number of lines or columns to move.
MAX
Jumps to the first line in the data set or first field in the record.
PAGE
Scrolls back one screen-length.
CSR
If the cursor is on a data line, attempts to make the line containing the cursor the
last line displayed on the screen.
HALF
Scrolls backward half of the screen length.
DATA
Scrolls backward so that the first visible line becomes the last visible line.

V
Sets the length of a record found at the top of the screen. This command is only
available for records with a variable record length.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 93

Primary Commands

Rules for Finding Packed Strings on the FIND Command

Type a packed string in one of the following formats on the FIND command:
F P'v' [cc]
'v'
Specifies a value of 1 to 31 numeric digits (for example, 0-9).
cc
Specifies a starting column location to be searched for the packed string.
When you do not specify a '+' or '-' before a value, the search is done for a packed
string that contains the specified numeric digits and a sign of 'F', 'A', 'C', 'E', 'B', or
'D'. When you specify a '+' before a value, the search is done for a packed string
that contains the specified numeric digits and a sign of 'F', 'A', 'C', or 'E'. When you
specify a '-' before a value, the search is done for a packed string that contains the
specified numeric digits and a sign of 'B' or 'D'. When you do not specify a starting
column, the find command will find the first occurrence of the v value in any valid
length packed decimal field in the record. A valid length is 1-16 packed bytes or
1-31 packed decimal digits.
F PLn'vvvvv'[cc]
n
Specifies an integer value representing the length of the packed field.
'vvvvv'
Specifies a value comprised of numeric digits. The number of digits in the value
must be twice the specified length minus 1, and is limited to 31 digits in length.
cc
If you do not specify cc, the search will look for the specified packed value and
length anywhere in the record.

Examples:
F P'0' 21 find packed zero of any valid length at column 21
F P'0' find packed zero of any valid length anywhere in the
record
F P'00000' find 5 packed zeros anywhere in the record.
F P'-1' 30 find packed -1 of any valid length at column 30
F PL5'0' 10 find 5 packed zeros at column 10
F PL3'0' find 3 packed zeros anywhere in the record
F PL2 10 find any valid 2-byte packed number at column 10
F PL16 find any valid 16-byte packed number anywhere in the
record

94 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

Line Commands
The line commands available during edit character and multiple record formatted
modes are listed in the following table. These line commands are not available when
viewing edited data in single record formatted mode.

Specify line commands in the six-position record sequence field, which is located on the
extreme left side of the edit screen when the data displays in character or multiple
record formatted modes. The line command can start in any position (1 through 6).

Type only one line command for a specific record sequence, but type multiple line
commands on different lines on the same screen.

Before any line commands process, they are checked for validity and if any errors are
found, an appropriate message displays.

Remove line commands by overtyping the line command characters with spaces or by
specifying the RESET primary command.

Command Description
A * Sets the target of copy or move command; lines are inserted after
the line containing the command
B * Sets the target of copy or move command; lines are inserted before
the line containing the command
BND Inserts a BNDS line
BNDS Same as BND
BOUNDS Same as BND
C * Sets the source of a copy command
CC Sets one end point of a range of lines to be copied
CHAR Switches the current line to character mode
COL Inserts a COLS line
COLS Same as COL
D * Deletes line
DD Sets one end point of a range of lines to be deleted
F * Requests that the first n lines be un-excluded on excluded line range
I * Inserts lines after the current line

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 95

Primary Commands

K * Toggle to unlock/lock (unprotect/protect) the key field for a VSAM

KSDS record, allowing the key field to be modified. Once entered, the
key field remains unlocked until it is locked or the edit session is
terminated.
KK Sets one end point of a range of lines to toggle to unlock/lock
(unprotect/protect) the key field for a VSAM KSDS record.
L * Requests that the last n lines be un-excluded on excluded line range
LC * Lowercase line
LCC Sets one endpoint of a range of lines to be lowercased
M * Sets the source of a move command
MASK Inserts a MASK line to be used for a model for all inserted lines
MF Switches the current line to multi-record format mode
MM Sets one endpoint of a range of lines to be moved
R * Repeats line
RR * Sets one end point of a range of lines to be repeated
S * Requests that the first n lines be shows/un-excluded on excluded line
range
SF Switches the current line to single record format mode
UC * Uppercase line
UCC Sets one end point of a range of lines to be uppercased
V * Sets length of line. This command is only valid for data sets with
variable length records.
VV Sets one end point of a range of lines to have their length adjusted.
This command is only valid for data sets with variable length records
X * Excludes line
XX Sets one end point of a range of lines to be excluded
) * Shift right
)) * Sets one end point of a range of lines to be shifted right
( * Shift left
(( * Sets one end point of a range of lines to be shifted left
> * Data shift right
>> * Sets one end point of a range of lines to be data shifted right
< * Data shift left
<< * Sets one end point of a range of lines to be data shifted left

96 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

An '*' in the line command means that these commands can be followed by a
number to indicate the number of lines, blocks of lines, or columns to be involved.

VSAM KSDS Keys

The CA File Master Plus Edit screen follows as it appears for a VSAM KSDS data set. In
this example, the key is in position 11 for a length of 9. The key is highlighted and is
protected. There is a blank column before and after the key to make room for the
attribute byte required to protect the key. The COLS line command has been typed.

Edit YOUR.KSDS Columns 00001 00072

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
****** ****************************** Top of Data *****************************
=COLS> ----+----1 ----+---- 2----+----3----+----4----+----5----+----6----+----7
000001 AALJIM 000000001 TX1 0010000001000000010000000010000000001
000002 BALJIM 000000002 TX1 0020000002000000020000000020000000002
000003 DALJIM 000000008 TX1 0080000008000000080000000080000000008
000004 DALJIM 000000009 TX1 0090000009000000090000000090000000009
000005 DALJIM 000000010 TX1 0100000010000000100000000100000000010
000006 EALJIM 000000011 TX1 0110000011000000110000000110000000011
000007 EALJIM 000000013 TX1 0130000013000000130000000130000000013
000008 EALJIM 000000015 TX1¬ ¬ 0150000015000000150000000150000000015¬
000009 FALJIM 000000016 TX1? ? 0160000016000000160000000160000000016?
000010 GALJIM 000000022 TX1 0220000022000000220000000220000000022
000011 GALJIM 000000023 TX1 0230000023000000230000000230000000023
000012 GALJIM 000000023 TX1 0230000023000000230000000230000000023
000013 GALJIM 000000024 TX1| | 0240000024000000240000000240000000024|
000014 HALJIM 000000034 TX1| | 0340000034000000340000000340000000034|
000015 HALJIM 000000036 TX1? ? 0360000036000000360000000360000000036?
000016 IALJIM 000000037 TX1" " 0370000037000000370000000370000000037"
000017 IALJIM 000000039 TX1 0390000039000000390000000390000000039

Update VSAM Keys

You can update VSAM keys using the following four commands:
■ Repeat
■ Insert
■ Copy
■ Move

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 97

Primary Commands

Update VSAM Keys Using the Repeat Command

You are able to update VSAM keys using the repeat command.

Update VSAM keys using the repeat command

1. Select EDIT from the Main Menu.
The Edit Data Set screen opens.
2. Specify the data set you want to browse. Press Enter
The Select Member to Process screen opens.
3. Select the member you want to edit. Press Enter.
The member shows in the Edit screen.
4. Type Repeat on the command line.
Note the following:
■ The new line appears below the original line with the same key, data, and
length as the original line.
■ The key of the line created by the repeat is unprotected.
■ The line number contains the message DUP=> to indicate that the repeated line
has a duplicate key and an error message is returned.
5. Update the key value.
Note the following:
■ The record with the updated key remains where it is, even though it may now
be out of sequence.
■ If the new key value is a duplicate, DUP=> appears in the line number area.
6. Once you have typed the new key value, modify the record length if necessary by
using the V line command.

Update VSAM Keys Using the Insert Command

You are able to update VSAM keys using the insert command.

Update VSAM keys using the insert command

1. Select EDIT from the Main Menu.
The Edit Data Set screen opens.
2. Specify the data set you want to browse. Press Enter
The Select Member to Process screen opens.
3. Select the member you want to edit. Press Enter.
The member shows in the Edit screen.

98 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

4. Type Insert on the line command.

A pop-up window displays requesting the inserted record length.
5. Press Enter.
The new record appears below the original record with the record length specified
in the pop-up window. When in character display mode, a blank record is inserted.
When in multi-record format mode, a record is inserted that is pre-initialized to the
record types of the fields specified in the record layout. The key of the line created
by the insert is unprotected.
6. Once the key value has been updated, processing is the same as for the last two
steps in the Repeat line command.

Update VSAM Keys Using the Copy or Move Commands

You are able to update VSAM keys using the copy or move commands.

Update VSAM keys using the copy or move commands

1. Select EDIT from the Main Menu.
The Edit Data Set screen opens.
2. Specify the data set you want to browse. Press Enter
The Select Member to Process screen opens.
3. Select the member you want to edit. Press Enter.
The member shows in the Edit screen.
4. Type Copy or Move on the line command.
The new line appears at the location specified by the B (before) or A (after) with the
same key, data, and length as the original line.
5. The remaining processes are the same as for the last two steps in the Repeat line
command.

Modify the Key of an Existing Record

A new line command of K (for key) will unprotect or protect the key, letting you update
the key of a VSAM KSDS record.

Any lines whose keys are unprotected (because it was created by the insert, replace,
move, or copy or because the key was made available for update by the K command)
shall have the key unprotected until another K command is specified or until the edit
session is terminated.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 99

Primary Commands

Locate Records By Key

When editing a VSAM KSDS, use the LOCATE primary command to locate a record with a
key that is greater than or equal to the key value specified on the locate command.

For example:
L 00000001234 KEY

Positions the browse or edit session to the record that has a key that is equal to or
greater than '00000001234'.

Out of Sequence Keys

When a new record is inserted, repeated, copied, moved or when the key field is
modified, a '==SEQ>' may appear in the line number column. This indicates that the
record is being displayed out of sequence due to a recent edit action. When you save the
changes, the records will be sorted before being saved and written in the correct
sequence. Alternatively, you can eliminate the '==SEQ>' line command warnings by
specifying the SORT primary command, which causes all records to be displayed in their
current key sequence.

SORT KEY and SAVE Commands

When you use the SORT KEY command, all keys that are out of sequence are moved to
the appropriate location based on key.

When the SAVE command is issued, if there are no key sequence errors, the SORT KEY
command is performed before saving the file.

Change Command "From" and "To" Character Strings of Different Lengths.

CA File Master Plus allows change commands with from and to character strings of
different lengths. However, depending on the type of data set you are editing and the
PdsChg profile setting for PDS members, the change command handles the change in
one of two ways, as follows.
■ All sequential or VSAM data sets, or PDS members with PdsChg profile option set to
DATA
When the to character string is shorter than the from character string, columns to
the right of the from string will be shifted left, and fill characters will be added at
the end, within the bounded CHANGE area. A pop-up window displays that explains
how the change command works and lets you specify a different fill character and
proceed with the change, or cancel the change command.

100 ISPF User Guide

Primary Commands

When the to character string is longer than the from character string, columns to
the right of the to string are shifted right, and excess characters at the end are
truncated, within the bounded CHANGE area. A pop-up window displays that
explains how the change command works and lets you proceed with or cancel the
change command.
■ PDS members with PdsChg profile parameter set to ISPF
When the to character string is shorter than the from character string, all
subsequent bytes until the next two consecutive blanks are encountered are moved
to the left a number of bytes equal to the difference in lengths.
When the to character string is longer than the from character string, multiple
consecutive blanks are eliminated until the number of blanks eliminated equals the
difference in lengths.

Modify and Control Record Length of New Records

When editing a file with variable length records, you will encounter situations that will
require a record length to be changed or assigned. The situations include the following:
■ Increasing or decreasing the record length of an existing record
■ Assigning the record length of a repeated, moved, copied record
■ Assigning the record length of an inserted record

Increase or Decrease Record Length of an Existing Record

If you need to change the record length of an existing record, use the V command.
When you repeat, move, or copy a record using the R/M/C line commands, the record
length of the repeated, moved, or copied record is used.

To increase or decrease record lengths of existing records

1. Use the Edit Data Set and Select Data Set to Process screens to select the record
you want to change.
2. Type V (for variable length) on the command line.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 101

Primary Commands

The Edit Length Modification screen opens where you can specify the desired
record length and the desired pad character.

----------------- EDIT LENGTH Modification ----------------

| COMMAND ===> |
| |
| Record length below may be increased or decreased. |
| |
| Record Length ===> 80 |
| Pad Character ===> X'40' |
| |
| ENTER to perform Record Length update. |
| END or EXIT to cancel Record Length update request. |
-----------------------------------------------------------

When a record is repeated, moved, or copied using the R/M/C line commands, the
record length of the repeated, moved, or copied record is used. Use the V line command
to modify the length of the repeated, moved, or copied record as described in the
previous section.

102 ISPF User Guide

Edit VSAM Paths

Edit VSAM Paths

When editing a VSAM path, the associated VSAM base cluster is processed for editing in
place of the path.

To edit VSAM paths

1. Using the Edit Dataset screen, select a VSAM path to edit.
2. Before the data displays, a pop-up screen displays asking if you want the initial edit
to display the base cluster records in alternate key (or path key) sequence or in
base cluster key sequence.

CA File Master Plus --------------------------- Edit of VSAM Path

COMMAND ===>

The data set specified to be edited is a VSAM PATH associated with the following
ase cluster:

Path Name: ===> VSAM.TEST.PATH

Base Cluster Name: ===> VSAM.TEST.KSDS

Please specify either 1 or 2 in the Edit Option field below to indicate how you
ould like to edit the base cluster:

Edit Option: ===> 1 1 Edit in alternate key sequence

2 Edit in base cluster key sequence

Cancel or End to return without editing

Enter to edit with key sequence controlled by Edit Option

3. Type 1 to edit in alternate key sequence, or 2 for base cluster key sequence. You
can also optionally cancel the edit session from this screen.

Edit a VSAM Base Cluster in Alternate Key Sequence

When you chose to edit a VSAM base cluster in alternate key sequence, the records are
initially displayed in alternate key sequence for the specified PATH. During the edit
session, duplicate key handling, inserting, copying, and repeating of records are handled
the same as when editing a base cluster. However, base cluster key sequence checking
will be suspended.

If you execute a SORT KEY command, the base cluster records are redisplayed in base
cluster key sequence. You can resequence the file in alternate key sequence by
specifying the "SORT fcol tcol" command and specifying the from/to column of the
alternate key.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 103

Edit a Data Set or PDS Member

Edit a Data Set or PDS Member

The following sections discuss how to edit a data set or PDS member using the options
on the main edit panel. You are able to edit in two ways:
■ Single record formatted mode
■ Multi-record formatted mode

Edit in Single Record Formatted Mode

When you chose to edit a data set or PDS member, one of the options on the main edit
panel is to edit the data in single record formatted mode using a record layout. Record
layouts can be stand-alone COBOL or PL/I copybooks or custom record layouts defined
to CA File Master Plus. Custom record layouts can consist of multiple record layouts that
will be displayed depending on record field values.

When you edit a data set in single record formatted mode, a screen like the example
shown following displays.

Edit TEST.CUSTREC COLUMN 1 OF 300

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
Record Number: 1 Record Length: 300 Record Layout: CUSTREC
Field Pos Format Value
01 CUST-RECORD 1 300
05 CUST-CUSTOMER-NUM 1 N 9 123456789
05 CUST-CUSTOMER-TYPE-CODE 10 C 2 AA
05 CUST-ACCT-OPENED-DATE 12 N 6 10101
05 CUST-DOB 18 N 6 70450
05 CUST-1ST-TRANSACTION-DATE 24 6
10 CUST-1ST-TRANSACTION-MM 24 N 2 08
10 CUST-1ST-TRANSACTION-DD 26 N 2 31
10 CUST-1ST-TRANSACTION-YY 28 N 2 1
05 CUST-CURRENT-BAL 30 P 9.2 100000.00
05 CUST-ORIG-BAL 36 P 9.2 90000.00
05 CUST-PAYMENT-AMT 42 P 9.2 0.00
05 CUST-PAYMENT-PERIOD 48 N 2 30
05 CUST-NAME 50 C 25 JANE SMITH
05 CUST-ADDR-1 75 C 30 55 MAIN STREET
05 CUST-ADDR-2 105 C 30
05 CUST-CITY 135 C 20 SPRINGFIELD
05 CUST-STATE 155 C 2 MA
05 CUST-ZIP-CODE 157 C 10 02345-6789
05 CUST-COUNTY-CODE 167 N 3 1
05 CUST-DELIQENCY-CODE 170 C 1 A
05 CUST-AGENT-ID 171 N 5 12345
05 CUST-PAID-TO-DATE 176 N 9.2 10000.00
While in this display mode, you can display or modify the data in the value column.
Record data that is not in the proper format as defined by the record layout is
displayed in X'xxxx' format in the value column. While in this display mode, line
commands are not available.

104 ISPF User Guide

Edit a Data Set or PDS Member

When modifying data in the value column, use field-level editing rules based on the field
format. Invalid data is not allowed unless you type it in X'xxxx' format.

When in single record formatted mode, the UP and DOWN commands scroll through the
fields within a single record. The LEFT and RIGHT commands scroll through the previous
and next records. The TOP and BOTTOM commands display the first and last data
records.

You can insert, delete, and repeat records when in single record formatted mode by
using the INSERT, DELETE, and REPEAT primary commands.

You can switch into this display mode from character or multi-record formatted modes
by specifying the SF primary command or the SF line command on the line you wish to
display in single record display mode.

You can also switch back to character or multi-record formatted modes by specifying
the CHAR or MF primary command.

Edit in Multi-Record Formatted Mode

When you chose to edit a data set or PDS member, one of the options on the main edit
panel is to edit the data in multi-record formatted mode using a record layout. Record
layouts can be stand-alone COBOL or PL/I copybooks or custom record layouts defined
to CA File Master Plus. Custom record layouts consist of multiple record layouts that will
be displayed depending record field values. When editing a data set in multi-record
format with custom record layouts, an automatic screen break occurs whenever a
record layout change occurs for a record that is to be displayed on the screen. When
this occurs, the PF8 key would be used to display the records with the different record
layouts.

When you edit a data set in multi-record formatted mode, a screen like the example
shown following is displayed. While in this display mode, you can display or modify the
data in the field-name columns. Field data that is not in the proper format as defined by
the record layout is displayed in X'xxxx' format in the field column.

When modifying data in the field columns, use field level editing rules based on the field
format, and invalid data is not allowed unless you type it in X'xxxx' format.

When in multi-record formatted mode, the UP and DOWN commands scroll through the
file displaying previous or next records just like character and hex modes. The LEFT and
RIGHT commands scroll through the field names for the records on the current screen.
The TOP and BOTTOM commands display the first and last data records.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 105

Edit a Data Set or PDS Member

Multi-Record Formatted Mode Example:

The following screen shows a multi-record formatted mode example:

Edit TEST.CUSTREC COLUMN 1 OF 300

COMMAND ===>
CUST CUST CUSTOMER CUST ACCT CUST CUST 1ST
CUSTOMER NUM TYPE CODE OPENED DATE DOB TRANSACTION MM
N 9 C 2 N 6 N 6 N 2
1----------- 10----------- 12--------- 18---- 24------------
****** ****************************** Top of Data *****************
000001 2000 AA 10101 70450 8
000002 20002 BB 20189 20467 3
000003 20003 CC 40102 70778 4
000004 20010 AB 40101 10166 7
000005 20029 XX 50102 120166 2
000006 20049 YY 60602 70450 1
000007 40000 ZZ 83001 71983 3
000008 40000 BX 110199 72816 9
000007 40000 ZZ 083001 071983 3
000008 40000 BX 110199 072816 9

The field names that appear in the column headings (such as CUST-CUSTOMER-NUM)
are centered and dashes are removed to make it easier to read the field (column)
headings. Under the field names appears the field format and length (such as N 9), and
under the format is the offset of the field from the beginning of the record (such as 1).

Numeric data is right justified in the field column and character data is left justified in
the field column.

When modifying data in the field column, use field level editing rules based on the field
format. Invalid data is not allowed unless you type it in X'xxxx' format. If there is not
enough room in the column to type data in X'xxxx' format, you can easily switch into
character or single record formatted mode by specifying the CHAR or SF primary or line
commands.

When in multi-record formatted mode, the UP and DOWN commands scroll through the
records in the file, and the LEFT and RIGHT commands scroll through the formatted
fields within the records displayed on the screen.

While in multi-record mode you can also use the INSERT, DELETE, and REPEAT primary
commands or line commands to insert, delete, and repeat records.

106 ISPF User Guide

Edit a Data Set or PDS Member

Locate Fields when Editing in Formatted Mode

When you chose to edit a data set or PDS member in either single or multi- record
formatting mode you can reposition the display of the current record to a specific field
by using the F xxxxx FIELD command. For example:
F 'DOB' FIELD

This command positions the current record to the next field whose field name contains
the characters DOB.

Chapter 6: Editing Data Sets 107

Chapter 7: Utility Functions
The CA File Master Plus Utilities support an extensive range of functions related to the
creation and management of various types of data sets. Select option 1 through 12 from
this menu to perform the desired function.

--------------- CA File Master Plus -- Utilities Menu --------------

OPTION ===>

1 LIBRARY Display, browse, edit, delete, rename PDS members

2 DATASET Display, allocate, rename, delete, catalog, uncatalog
free space for datasets
3 COPY Copy datasets and select members
4 CATALOG List cataloged datasets and perform product functions
5 VTOC List datasets by Volume/Unit and perform product functions
6 PDS Compress, locate/restore members, alter PDS allocation
7 VSAM Define, modify, rename, display VSAM dataset information
8 SEARCH Search datasets and PDS members
9 UPDATE Update datasets and PDS members
10 COMPARE Compare files
11 REFORMAT Convert file from one record layout to another
12 ENVIRONMENT Display ISPF, system, and hardware/software information

The categories of functions and their corresponding options are as follows:

1. Library Utilities — Browse, edit, delete, rename, and print PDS members.
2. Data Set Utilities — Display data set information. Allocate sequential files, PDSs,
SMS-controlled data sets, BDAM, and GDGs. Rename, delete, catalog, uncatalog,
and free space for data sets.
3. Copy Utilities — Copy data sets online or in batch. Selection of data to be copied
can be according to a filter (selection criteria) or can be for selected members of a
PDS.
4. Catalog Utilities — Request a directory of data sets on the catalog that match a
specified wildcarded DSN. For any of the data sets in the Catalog utility directory,
you can browse, edit, display data set information, or perform any of the functions
of the Data Set utilities, Library utilities, VSAM utilities, PDS utilities, Search utility,
and the Update utility.
5. VTOC Utilities — Display summary information about all DASD volumes that match
a selection criteria based on Unit Name or wildcarded volume name. Request a
directory of data sets based on a wildcarded DSN, Unit Name or wildcarded volume
name. For any of the data sets in the VTOC Utility directory, you can browse, edit,
display data set information, or perform any of the functions of the Data Set
utilities, Library utilities, VSAM utilities, PDS utilities, Search utility, and the Update
utility.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 109

Edit a Data Set or PDS Member

6. PDS Utilities — Using the PDS utilities, you can perform any of the following
functions:
■ Locate PDSs that contain a specified member
■ Compress PDSs
■ Update PDS allocation parameters to expand directory blocks or space
available
■ Recover overlaid or deleted members
7. VSAM Utilities — Display data set information for VSAM files and perform VSAM
utility functions as follows:
■ Delete or define VSAM clusters
■ Alternate index files and VSAM paths
■ Build alternate index VSAM files from the base cluster
■ Alter existing VSAM files by changing component DSNs, allocation parameters,
and allocated volumes
VSAM utility functions can be performed either online or in batch.
8. Search Utility — View records that match a specified search criteria. For PDSs,
changes can be made to selected members or to all members.
9. Update Utility — Update records that match a specified search criteria. For PDSs,
you can make changes to selected members or to all members. Preview the
updates before they are made.
10. Compare Utilities — Online or batch compare of files of various data set
organizations. Comparisons can be performed on data records filtered according to
selection criteria. Individual members, selected members, or entire PDSs can also
be compared.
11. Reformat Utility — Reformat all data records in a file from one format to another
according to old and new record layouts and matching of the fields to be converted.
12. Environment Utilities — Display and manipulate current TSO/ISPF data set
allocation-ENQ's-loaded modules, information about the system's hardware and
software environment, and volume summary information by DASD unit type.

110 ISPF User Guide

Library Utility

This section contains the following topics:

Library Utility (see page 111)
Data Set Utility (see page 117)
Copy Utility (see page 127)
Catalog Utility (see page 134)
VTOC Utility (see page 138)
PDS Utilities Sub-Menu (see page 144)
VSAM Utility (see page 153)
Search Utility (see page 203)
Update Utility (see page 207)
Data Set Compare Utility (see page 220)
Data Set Reformat (see page 236)
Environment Utilities Sub-Menu (see page 241)

Library Utility
The Library Utility screen lets you browse, edit, delete, rename, and print members of a
library. You can perform these functions either on the main Library Utility screen by
specifying a function code and a member name or from a member directory screen by
typing a function code to the left of a member name.

------------- CA File Master Plus -- Library Utility --------------

OPTION ===>

BLANK - Display member list R - Rename member

B – ISPF Browse member D - Delete member
E – ISPF Edit member P - Print member
1 - Browse member
2 - Edit member

Data set name ===> 'TEST.USERID.JCL'

Member name ===>

New member name ===>

Volume serial ===> CAI003 (If data set not cataloged)

When the function code at the top of the screen is blank, a member directory appears.
A member directory appears when the Member Name field is blank or contains a
wildcarded member name.

When a request is made to delete a member, a delete confirmation screen appears if

the Processing Defaults indicate that member deletes are to be confirmed before they
are performed. Control the member delete confirmation by going to the Processing
Defaults screen (Option 0.1) and setting the Confirm Member Deletes? field.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 111

Library Utility

When a request is made to print members, these print requests are queued. All queued
print requests are performed together when the user exits the Library Utility screen. If
the Processing Defaults indicate that print destination is to be confirmed before printing
occurs, a screen appears that lets you update the print destination control parameters.
Control print destination confirmation by going to the Processing Defaults screen
(Option 0.1) and setting the Confirm Print Class & Destination? field.

The DSN of the data set to be processed by the Library Utility, the Data Set Name field
has support for wildcarded DSN and DSN Lists. You can use any of the following syntaxes
to request a list of DSNs from which the desired DSN can be selected.
■ Wildcarded DSN containing an asterisk (*) or a percent sign (%) for unknown
characters of the DSN
■ D to request a directory of DSN Lists
■ D dddddd where 'dddddd' is the name of a DSN list

Field Descriptions
Data set name
Type the DSN of the partitioned data set to be processed by the Library Utility
function.
Member name
Perform a function for a specified member within the library by typing the member
name in this field. You can leave this field blank or type a wildcarded member name
to receive a directory of the members in the data set.
If an action of S is typed to select a member from a directory, the selected member
name is copied to this field.
New member name
For option R (Rename Member), type the new member name. For example, the
member name to which the member is to be renamed.
Volume serial
If an uncataloged data set is to be processed by the Library Utility, type the volume
serial number of the volume where the data set resides.

112 ISPF User Guide

Library Utility

Library Utility Member Directory

The Library Utility Member Directory screen appears and displays a list of the members
in the library. When a wildcarded member name is present, the directory contains a list
of the members that match the member name wildcard.

Select member to process from 'TEST.USERID.JCL' ------------ Row 47 of 1158

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

B - ISPF Browse 1 - Browse member R - Rename member P - Print member

E - ISPF Edit 2 - Edit member D - Delete member

S Name Msg/Rename Size Created Changed ID

_ ACCTFILE 39 2002/02/01 2002/02/01 12:51:00 USERID
_ ACCTSET 44 1992/01/31 1994/02/01 11:34:00 USERID
_ ACCT00 99 2002/02/01 2002/02/01 11:03:00 USERID
_ ACCT01 99 2002/02/01 2002/02/01 11:13:00 USERID
_ ACCT02 99 2002/02/01 2002/02/01 11:16:00 USERID
_ ACCT03 100 2002/02/01 2002/02/01 11:07:00 USERID
_ ACCT04 100 2002/02/01 2002/02/01 11:08:00 USERID
_ ACGLOBAL 32 1992/11/09 1998/11/30 13:01:00 USERID
_ ACME1000 79 2000/07/27 2000/07/27 13:50:00 USERID
_ ACME2COB 129 2002/05/11 2002/05/11 12:18:00 USERID
_ ACME2000 131 2002/05/11 2002/05/11 11:24:00 USERID
_ ACME3000 233 1993/12/08 2002/08/04 16:41:00 USERID
_ ACME3370 200 2002/03/03 1996/09/30 17:40:00 USERID
_ ADCD311 552 2002/02/07 2002/10/25 16:37:00 USERID
_ ADCD330 527 2002/02/07 2002/02/08 14:45:00 USERID
_ ADCIN44 137 2002/02/07 2002/10/25 10:27:00 USERID
_ ADCIN52 152 2002/02/07 2002/10/25 16:38:00 USERID
_ ALTC9N6 351 2002/11/04 1994/11/04 14:01:00 USERID

To perform an action for one of the members in the directory, type an action code to
the left of the member name. The action codes displayed at the top of the screen are:
■ B – ISPF Browse
■ E – ISPF Edit
■ 1 – Browse member
■ 2– Edit member
■ R – Rename member
■ D – Delete member
■ P – Print member

Perform an action for all of the members in the directory that match a wildcard using
the syntax:
S www c

where 'www' is the wildcard and 'c' is the command (B E R D or P).

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 113

Library Utility

Example

S A* D deletes all members that begin with A. Use the SORT and LOCATE commands to
assist in the location of the desired member. You can sort the directory by any of the
columns by typing SORT XXX or SORT XXX Y where 'XXX' is one of the column literals and
'Y' is 'A' for ascending or 'D' for descending. For example, SORT CREATED sorts the
directory in descending order of Created Date and SORT ID A sorts the directory in
ascending order of User ID. The command L or LOC followed by a value will position to
the first member directory entry whose sort sequence field is greater than or equal to
the specified value.

Field Descriptions
Line Item Action Ind
Specify an action to be performed for the member represented by the line item, by
typing one of the following commands:
■ B – ISPF Browse member
■ E – ISPF Edit member
■ 1 – Browse member
■ 2 – Edit member
■ R – Rename member. When renaming a member, type the new member
name in the MSG/RENAME column.
■ D – Delete member. If the user Processing Defaults indicate that member
deletes are to be confirmed, a delete confirmation screen is presented.
■ P – Print member. Print requests are queued and performed together
when the user changes data sets or exits the Library Utility function.
Msg/Rename
Type the new member name in this column when you need to rename a member.

114 ISPF User Guide

Library Utility

Load Library Utility Member Directory

The Load Library Utility Member Directory screen appears and shows a list of the
members in the load library. When a wildcarded member name is present, the directory
contains a list of the members that match the member name wildcard. To perform an
action for one of the members in the directory, type an action code to the left of the
member name.

Select member to process from 'USER1.LOADLIB'--------------- Row 1 to 11 of 11

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

B - ISPF Browse 1 - Browse member R - Rename member

D - Delete member

S NAME MSG/Rename Alias-of Size TTR A/RMODE Link-Date Link-Time

_ CAWAABT 000A88 001003 31 ANY 2008/10/07 11:23:02
_ CAWAALCN 000608 007015 31 ANY 2012/05/04 13:25:14
_ CAWAALCP 0003F8 00701C 31 ANY 2012/05/04 13:25:18
_ CAWAALC2 0003E0 007023 31 ANY 2012/05/04 13:25:20
_ CAWABATC 002500 018D0D 31 ANY 2012/07/23 09:41:29
_ CAWABAT2 004070 018D22 31 24 2012/07/23 10:21:03
_ CAWABGDG 001908 00100C 31 ANY 2008/10/07 11:23:19
_ CAWABINL 000120 00702A 31 ANY 2012/05/04 13:25:23
_ CAWABLCB 001D00 01361D 31 24 2012/07/08 08:51:33
_ CAWABLCS 001DD0 013703 31 24 2012/07/08 08:51:38
_ CAWABLCV 000468 006617 31 ANY 2012/05/04 12:57:56
****************************** End of Member List *****************************

The action codes displayed at the top of the screen are:

■ B – ISPF Browse
■ 1 – Browse member
■ R – Rename member
■ D – Delete member

Perform an action for all of the members in the directory that match a wildcard using
the following syntax:

S www c

where 'www' is the wildcard and 'c' is the command (B E R D or P).

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 115

Library Utility

Example

S A* D deletes all members that begin with A.

Use the SORT and LOCATE commands to assist in the location of the desired member.
You can sort the directory by any of the columns by typing SORT XXX or SORT XXX Y
where 'XXX' is one of the column literals and 'Y' is 'A' for ascending or 'D' for descending.
For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory in descending order of Created Date
and SORT ID A sorts the directory in ascending order of User ID. The command L or LOC
followed by a value will position to the first member directory entry whose sort
sequence field is greater than or equal to the specified value.

Field Descriptions
Line Item Action Indicator
Specify an action to be performed for the member represented by the line item, by
typing one of the following commands:
■ B – Browse the member
■ 1 – ISPF Browse
■ R – Rename member. When renaming a member, type the new member name
in the MSG/RENAME column.
■ D – Delete member. If the user Processing Defaults indicate that member
deletes are to be confirmed, a delete confirmation screen appears.
Msg/Rename
When renaming a member, type the new member name in this column.

116 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Utility

Data Set Utility

The Data Set Utility screen lets you perform various functions related to the allocation
and maintenance of files.

------------------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Utility ------------------

COMMAND ===>

BLANK - Display dataset information F - Free unused space

A - Allocate dataset G - Define GDG
C - Catalog dataset R - Rename dataset
D - Delete dataset U - Uncatalog dataset

Dataset to be Processed:
Dataset name ===> 'TEST.WORKPDS2'
Volume serial ===> (If dataset not cataloged)

Model dataset for allocations (optional):

Dataset name ===> 'TECH.TEST.SQL'

For the data set information display, the screens displayed are specialized according to
the file type or VSAM access method.

When a request is made to delete a data set, a delete confirmation screen appears if the
Processing Defaults indicate that data set deletes are to be confirmed before they are
performed. Control data set delete confirmation by going to the Processing Defaults
Screen (Option 0.1) and setting the Confirm Data Set Deletes? field.

To assist in the specification of the DSN of the data set to be processed by the Data Set
Utility, the Data set name field and the Model data set field have support for wildcarded
DSNs and DSN Lists. You can use any of the following syntaxes to request a list of DSNs
from which the desired DSN may be selected.
■ Wildcarded DSN containing an asterisk (*) or a percent sign (%) for unknown
characters of the DSN
■ D to request a directory of DSN Lists
■ D dddddd where 'dddddd' is the name of a DSN list

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 117

Data Set Utility

Field Descriptions
Data set to be Processed:
Data set name
Type the DSN of the data set to be processed by the Data Set Utility function.
Volume serial
If the data set to be processed by the Data Set Utility is uncataloged, type the
volume serial number of the volume on which the data set resides.
Note: Volume Serial is a required field when performing the Catalog function.
Model data set for allocations:
Data set name
When allocating a data set using option A, specify a model data set to have the
various allocation parameters default to match the model data set. To use a model
data set, type a DSN in this field.

Data Set Information - PDS

The PDS Data Set Information – PDS screen displays information relating to the
following:
■ PDS allocation parameters
■ Use of space, extents, and directory blocks
■ SMS Class information
■ Activity dates

-------------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Information - PDS -------------

COMMAND ===>

Dataset Name: TECH.WORKPDS

Dataset Organization: Partitioned Dataset

Dataset Definition: Allocated & Used:

Volume serial CAI003 Number of members 487
Unit device type 3390 Allocated cyls 95
Record format FB Used cyls 63
Record length 80 Allocated extents 16
Block size 3120 Used extents 10
Allocation unit CYLINDERS Max directory blocks 80
First extent cyls 20 Used directory blocks 80
Secondary extent cyls 5
Dataset type PDS
SMS Information: Activity Dates:
Storage class SMSPOOL Creation date 2006/09/29
Data class DCWRKD Last Referenced date 2012/08/31
Management class DEFAULT Expiration date

118 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Utility

Data Set Information - Sequential File

The Data Set Information - Sequential File screen displays information relating to the
following:
■ File allocation parameters
■ Use of space and extents
■ SMS Class information
■ Activity dates

-------------------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Info --------------------

COMMAND ===>

Dataset Name: ABC.TEST33.SEQFB80

Dataset Organization: Sequential

Dataset Definition: Allocated & Used:

Volume serial OSI002 Allocated cyls 1
Unit device type 3390 Used cyls 1
Record format FB Allocated extents 1
Record length 80 Used extents 1
Block size 3120
Allocation unit CYLINDERS
First extent cyls 1
Secondary extent cyls 0
Dataset type SEQ
SMS Information: Activity Dates:
Storage class SMSPOOL Creation date 2006/09/29
Data class DCWRKD Last Referenced date 2012/08/31
Management class DEFAULT Expiration date

Data Set Information – VSAM File

The Data Set Information – VSAM File screen displays information relating to the
following:

Page 1:
■ File associations
■ Data set definitions
■ Activity dates
■ File statistics
■ Allocation parameters

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 119

Data Set Utility

----------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Information - VSAM KSDS ----------

COMMAND ===>

Dataset Organization: VSAM KSDS (Key Sequence Dataset)

Cluster Name: TECH.KSDS.CL Volume
Data: TECH.KSDS.DATA CAI001
Index: TECH.KSDS.INDEX CAI001

Dataset Definition: Component Allocation: Data Index

Key Position 1 CISIZE 3584 3584
Key Length 3 Allocation Unit CYLS TRKS
Average record size 110 Primary 1 5
Maximum record size 110 Secondary 5 1
Share options 2,4 Extents used 1 1
Buffer space 10752 Allocation Parameters:
SMS Information: Load restartable NO
Storage class Write check NO
Data class Erase on delete NO
Management class Replicated index NO
Activity Dates: Reuse option NO
Creation date 2012/07/30 Spanned records NO
Expiration date

End to exit ENTER for more information about KSDS file

Page 2:
■ Data and index component information

---------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Info - VSAM KSDS - Page 2 ---------
COMMAND ===>
AD1DEV.MOORO10.KSDS.NEW

Component Statistics: Data Index Record Statistics:

CIs per CA 195 13 Total 24
Control Interval Splits 0 0 Deleted 4
Control Area Splits 0 0 Inserted 2
Freespace Percent - CI 0 0 Updated 98
Freespace Percent - CA 0 0 Retrieved 2,694
Total Freespace 695296 229376
High Allocated RBA 698880 232960
High Used RBA 698880 3584
Percent Free 99.5 98.5
Physical Record Size 3584 3584
Physical Record / Track 13 13
Tracks / Control Area 15 1

End to exit ENTER to return to previous screen

120 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Utility

Allocate New Sequential File or PDS

The Data Set Utility screen invokes the Allocate New Sequential File or PDS screen to let
you specify the allocation parameters for a sequential file or a PDS to be allocated.

--------- CA File Master Plus -- Allocate New Sequential File or PDS --------
COMMAND ===>

New Dataset Name ===> TECH.WORKPDS9

Information for Non-SMS Datasets:

Volume serial ===> PK0004 or Generic unit name ===> 3390
Information for SMS Datasets:
Management Class ===>
Storage Class ===>
Data Class ===>
Dataset Allocation:
Space allocation unit ===> CYLS 'T' Tracks 'C' Cylinders 'B' Blocks
Primary allocation ===> 1
Secondary allocation ===> 0
Directory blocks ===> When allocating a PDS
Record format ===> FB
Record length ===> 80
Block size ===> 3120
Expiration date ===> optional (YYYY/MM/DD format)
Dataset type ===> optional (SEQ, PDS, PDSE, LARGE)
Specify multi-volume? ===> N 'Y' to specify multiple volume

The file allocated is a PDS if a non-zero value is typed into the Directory blocks field;
otherwise, a sequential file is allocated.

Type either a Volume Serial Number or a Generic Unit Name to control the DASD
volumes on which the file is allocated.

When multiple volumes are to be allocated to the file, set the Specify Multivolume?
field to Y.

Field Descriptions
Information for Non-SMS Data Sets
Volume serial or Generic unit name
Update either the Volume serial field or the Generic unit name field to define the
volumes for the data set being allocated.
Type the Volume serial to specify the volume where the data set will reside. If
multiple volumes are required, set the Specify multivolume? field to Y.
Allocate a data set to any volume within a unit type by typing the Unit Name. See
the DASD Unit Configuration function (CA File Master Plus Option 3.9.3) for a list of
the Unit Names available on your system and summary information about each
volume within each unit type. If multiple volumes are required, set the Specify
multivolume? field to Y.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 121

Data Set Utility

Information for SMS Data Sets

Management Class
To alter the sequential file or PDS to use the specified management class, update
the one- to eight-position name of the SMS Management Class. You can use the
SMS Management Class to control data set characteristics related to the backup,
migration, and retention of the data set.
Storage Class
To alter the sequential file or PDS to use the specified storage class, update the
one- to eight-position name of the SMS Storage Class. You can use the storage class
to control the storage hardware used for the data set.
Data Class
Type the one- to eight-position name of the SMS Data Class to be used when
allocating the sequential file or PDS. You can use the SMS Data Class to control the
attributes of the data set being allocated.
Data Set Allocation
Space allocation unit
Specify the Space allocation unit for the sequential file or PDS being allocated. The
primary and secondary allocations are in the specified units.
If you type the first position of one of the valid values, the rest of the Space
allocation unit appears in the field. Space can be allocated as one of the following:
■ T – Tracks
■ C – Cylinders
■ B – Blocks
Primary allocation
Type the Primary allocation amount for the sequential file or PDS. The amount of
space allocated in the primary allocation is the specified number of tracks,
cylinders, or blocks depending on the allocation unit.
Secondary allocation
Type the secondary allocation amount for the sequential file or PDS. The amount of
space allocated in each secondary allocation is the specified number of tracks,
cylinders, or blocks depending on the allocation unit.
Directory blocks
Type the desired number of directory blocks when defining a partitioned data set. If
defining a sequential file, this field should contain no value or a value of zero.

122 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Utility

Record format
Type the record format for the sequential file or PDS being defined. Record format
is a concatenation of up to 3 one-byte codes that have the following meaning:
■ F – Fixed-length records
■ V – Variable-length records
■ U – Undefined-length records
■ B – Records are blocked
■ A – Records contain ASCII printer control characters
■ M – Records contain machine code control characters
■ S – For variable-length records, records may span blocks
■ D – Variable-length ASCII record
■ T – Records may be written into overflow tracks
For example, 'FB' would be fixed blocked, 'U' would be undefined length, and 'VBA'
would be variable blocked with ASCII print control characters.
Record length
Type the Logical Record Length for the records to be written to the sequential file
or PDS being allocated.
Block size
Type the Block size for the sequential file or PDS being allocated.
For variable blocked or fixed blocked files, the Block size field can be empty or
contain zero to let the system to calculate the optimum Block size.
Expiration date
If the sequential file or PDS can be deleted after a certain date, type an Expiration
Date in CCYYMMDD format.
Dataset type
You can use this optional field to specify whether the data set being allocated is a
sequential file, a PDS, a PDS/E, or a large format data set. If this field is blank, the
data set is allocated as a PDS if directory blocks are specified; otherwise, the data
set is allocated as a sequential file. This field is required only when allocating a
PDS/E. Valid values are:
SEQ – Sequential file
PDS – PDS
PDSE – PDS/E
LARGE – large format data set

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 123

Data Set Utility

Specify multivolume?
If the sequential file will be allocated with multiple volumes, set the Specify
multivolume? field to Y.
At the top of the screen, you have the option of defining the volumes to be used by
Volume serial or by Generic unit name. If a Volume serial is specified, a screen
appears and lets you define the rest of the Volume serials for this data set. If a
Generic unit name is specified, a screen appears that lets you define the number of
volumes of that unit type to be allocated.

Sequential File/Multiple Volumes

The Sequential File Multiple Volumes screen lets you define the volumes to be allocated
to a multi-volume sequential file. This screen is invoked when the Specify Multi Volume?
field of the Allocate New Sequential File or PDS screen is set to Y.

CA File Master Plus -- Seq Mult Vols

COMMAND ===>

Enter volumes for data set:

PK0004 ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______

Update the screen by typing the volume serials of the volumes to be allocated to the
sequential file. You can type up to fifty volumes.

124 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Utility

Sequential File Number of Volumes

The Sequential Number of Volumes screen is used to define the number of volumes that
will be allocated to a multivolume sequential file. This screen is invoked when the
Specify multi volume? field of the Allocate New Sequential File or PDS screen is set to Y
and a Generic Unit Name.

CA File Master Plus -- Seq Number of Volumes

COMMAND ===>

Number of 3390 Volumes ===> 3

Update the screen by typing a number from 1 to 255 to specify the number of volumes
to be allocated to the sequential file.

Define GDG (Generation Data Group)

The Define GDG (Generation Data Group) screen is invoked by the Data Set Utility
screen to let you specify the allocation parameters for a GDG.

----- CA File Master Plus -- Define GDG (Generation Data Group) -----
COMMAND ===>

GDG base Data Set Name ===> TECH.WORKPDS9

Generations in GDG ===> 10 (1 - 255)

Expiration ===> Optional - Expiration date (YYYY/MM/DD)

or Number of days to expiration
Uncatalog all? ===> N

Scratch over limit? ===> Y

Owner ID ===> TECH1

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 125

Data Set Utility

Update the fields on this screen to specify the following:

■ Number of generations for the GDG
■ Expiration period
■ Options related to the handling of generation data sets as the maximum number of
generations is exceeded
■ Owner ID of GDG

Press Enter to invoke IDCAMS to define the GDG.

Field Descriptions
Generations in GDG
Type the maximum number of generation data sets to be associated with the
Generation Data Group being defined.
The value of this field must be in the range of 1 to 255.
Expiration
The value typed into this optional field can be in one of two formats:
■ Expiration Date is a date in CCYY/MM/DD format on which the GDG base may
be deleted.
■ Retention Number of Days is a number of days from 0 to 9998 that tells how
many days the GDG must be retained before it is deleted.
If you do not type an Expiration Date or Retention Number of Days, the GDG base
may be deleted at any time.
If you type a value of 9999, the GDG is retained indefinitely.
Uncatalog all?
Type Y or N to indicate whether to uncatalog all generations when the maximum
number of generations in the GDG is exceeded.
■ N – Uncatalog only the oldest generation when the maximum number of
generations is exceeded. This is the option that is applicable to most GDG
situations.
■ Y – Uncatalog all generations of the GDG when the maximum number of
generations is exceeded.

126 ISPF User Guide

Copy Utility

Scratch over limit?

Type Y or N to indicate whether data sets are to be scratched when generations are
uncataloged as the maximum number of generations is exceeded. For example,
deleted from the VTOC and the space reused.
■ Y – Delete each data set when it is uncataloged. For example, when the
maximum number of generations is exceeded.
■ N – Leave data sets on the volume when they are uncataloged as the maximum
number of generations is exceeded.
Owner ID
You can use this optional field to specify an owner associated with the GDG that is
being defined.
If the Owner ID is not specified, the TSO User ID is defined as the owner.

Copy Utility
The Copy Utility screen lets you copy data sets and members of various file formats. The
FROM and TO data sets for the copy function can be a sequential file, a PDS, or a VSAM
file.

-------------------- CA File Master Plus -- Copy Utility --------------------

COMMAND ===>

Copy "FROM" Dataset:

Dataset name ===> TECH.INPUT'
Member name ===> ('*' = all members, blank/wildcard = mem list)
Volume serial ===> (If dataset not cataloged)
Copy "TO" Dataset:
Dataset name ===> TECH.OUT'
Volume serial ===> (If dataset not cataloged)
Disposition ===> NEW (NEW or SHR or OLD or MOD)
Replace Mems ===> N ('Y' to replace like-named members)
Replace Keys ===> N ('Y' to replace duplicate keys in KSDS)
Execution mode ===> O ( O = ONLINE S = Submit JCL E = Edit JCL)

Record Layout:
Layout dataset ===>
Layout member ===>

Selection Criteria below or Selection Criteria Member ===>

===>
===>
===>

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 127

Copy Utility

Field Descriptions
Copy "FROM" Data Set
Data set name
Type the DSN of the input file for the copy function. This file can be a sequential file,
PDS, or VSAM file.
Member name
If the data set being copied is a PDS, specify the Member name of the member to
be copied.
You can leave this field blank to receive a directory of the members in the data set
or type a wildcarded member name to receive a directory of members that match
that wildcard. From a member directory, select the members to be copied.
Volume serial
If input data set to the copy function is uncataloged, type the volume serial of the
volume on which the data set resides.
Copy "TO" Data Set
Data set name
Type the DSN of the output file for the copy function. This file can be a sequential
file, PDS, PDS member, or VSAM file.
Volume serial
If output data set to the copy function is uncataloged, type the volume serial of the
volume where the data set resides.
Disposition
Specify the disposition of the output of the copy function as SHR, OLD, NEW, or
MOD. Only the first position of the disposition field is required.
■ SHR – Output data set already exists, can be shared while copying into it
■ OLD – Output data set already exists, cannot be shared while copying into it
■ NEW – Output data set does not currently exist and will be allocated
■ MOD – Output data set already exists and records will be copied and appended
to the existing data set or library members
Replace Mems
When copying PDS members, use this field to chose whether to replace members
that already exist on the 'TO' PDS with the member from the 'FROM' PDS.

128 ISPF User Guide

Copy Utility

Replace Keys
When copying records to a VSAM KSDS, use this field to chose whether to replace
duplicate keys in the TO data set. When this option is set to N and the TO VSAM
KSDS data set was defined with the REUSE option, the 'TO' data set is opened in
load mode. When this option is set to Y and the 'TO' VSAM KSDS was defined with
the REUSE option, the 'TO' data set is opened in update/extend mode.
Execution Mode
The choices for execution mode are:
■ O – Perform the function online.
■ S – Generate and submit JCL to perform the function.
■ E – Generate JCL to perform the function and initiate an edit session on the JCL.
Alter the JCL as needed and submit the JCL or save it to another location.
Record Layout
Layout dataset
Type the DSN of the Record Description Copy Library member that describes the
input file. You can also type a wildcarded DSN to request a list of data sets from
which you can select the desired data set. This field is required when using the
LAYOUT primary command.
Layout member
Type the Member Name of the Record Description Copy Member that describes the
input file.
Leave this field blank to receive a directory of the members in the Layout data set.
You can also type a wildcarded member name to receive a directory of members
that match that wildcard.
Specify the LAYOUT command on this panel when you specify a Layout data set and
member and you also want to dynamically build the dynamic selection by field
names defined in the record layout.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 129

Copy Utility

Selection criteria below or Selection criteria member

Specifies selection criteria if the records or members of the input file will be filtered
according to selection criteria. Use selection criteria to specify a filter based on the
following types of parameters:
■ Condition that evaluates data values in each record
■ Presence of a character string within a record or specified columns or field
name from a record layout
■ Specification of the first record to be selected based on relative record number,
VSAM key, or VSAM RBA
■ Limit to the number of records to be selected
Use a cataloged selection criteria parameter member that has been defined using
CA File Master Plus Option 0.3.
Use the primary command LAYOUT.
For sample Selection Criteria specifications, see the following table. For a complete
explanation of the syntaxes, request field-level help.

Selection Criteria Description

101 = C'NY' Position 101 for a length of 2 equals 'NY'
1(3) = C'001 & 101 = C'NY' Compound condition
C'TEXAS' Character string 'TEXAS' anywhere in the record
'TEXAS' Text 'TEXAS' (any case) anywhere in the record. If
the character string contains imbedded blanks or an
imbedded operand, the character string must be
within quotes.
10(4) EQP Position 10 for a length of 4 is any valid packed value
80 = C'NY'C'NJ'C'MA' Position 80 for a length of 2 equals 'NY' or 'NY' or
'MA' (case sensitive)
80 = C'NY,NJ,MA' Position 80 for a length of 2 equals 'NY' or 'NY' or
'MA' (case sensitive)
100(2) = P'0,1,999' Position 100 contains a two-byte packed value of 0
or 1 or 999
82(2) > 84 Position 82-83 is greater than positions 84-85
101(20) CO C'NEW YORK' Positions 101-120 contain 'NEW YORK'. (case
sensitive and can appear anywhere within positions
101-120)
STARTREC=1001 Select records beginning with record number 1001

130 ISPF User Guide

Copy Utility

Selection Criteria Description

STARTKEY='56789' Select keyed VSAM records beginning with key
56789
STARTRBA=X'1FD8' Select records starting with the record with RBA
x'1FD8'
INLIM=5000 Stop reading/selecting after reading 5000 records.
SELLIM=1000 Only select 1000 records based on selection criteria
STATE-CODE NE 'NY' Field STATE-CODE not equal 'NY' (requires LAYOUT
information)
80 = C'NY' C'TX' AND Position 80 for a length of 2 equals 'NY' or 'TX', AND
100 = C'000' position 100 for a length of 3 equals '000'

TRAN-DD GT '01' AND TRAN-DD Field TRAN-DD is '02' '03' '04', or '05'
LT '06'
MEMBER criteria Specifies that 'criteria' (specified after the MEMBER
command) applies to PDS member selection only.
This parameter and subsequent selection criteria is
ignored if specified for non-PDS data sets.
Examples:
MEMBER 'texas'
MEMBER 101 EQ 'NY'
MEMBER is the default for selection criteria
specified for PDS or PDSE data sets when no
member or a generic member name is specified.
RECORD criteria Specifies that 'criteria' (specified after the RECORD
command) applies to record selection only. When a
data set or member(s) are selected for browse or
edit, only selected records will be displayed.
Examples:
MEMBER 'texas'
MEMBER 101 EQ 'NY'
RECORD is the default for VSAM and sequential files
or for fully qualified PDS-member names.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 131

Copy Utility

Copy Utility Member Directory

The Copy Utility Member Directory screen presents a list of the members in the Copy
FROM Data Set library. When a wildcarded member name is typed, the directory
contains a list of the members that match the member name wildcard. Additionally, if
selection criteria were specified to further filter the members to be copied, the list of
members contains only those members matching the wildcard specification and the
selection criteria.

CA File Master Plus -------------- Copy 'ABC.TEST33. ---- Row 1 of 290

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S Name Rename/Msg Size Created Changed ID

_ ACCTFILE 39 2002/02/01 2012/02/01 12:51:00 USERID
_ ACCTSET 44 1992/01/31 1994/02/01 11:34:00 USERID
_ ACCT00 99 2002/02/01 2008/02/01 11:03:00 USERID
_ ACCT01 99 2002/02/01 2012/02/01 11:13:00 USERID
_ ACCT02 99 2002/02/01 2012/02/01 11:16:00 USERID
_ ACCT03 100 2002/02/01 2012/02/01 11:07:00 USERID
_ ACCT04 100 2002/02/01 2012/02/01 11:08:00 USERID
_ ACGLOBAL 32 1992/11/09 1998/11/30 13:01:00 USERID
_ ACME1000 79 2000/07/27 2004/07/27 13:50:00 USERID
_ ACME2COB 129 2002/05/11 2002/05/11 12:18:00 USERID
_ ACME2000 131 2002/05/11 2002/05/11 11:24:00 USERID
_ ACME3000 233 1993/12/08 2003/08/04 16:41:00 USERID
_ ACME3370 200 2002/03/03 1996/09/30 17:40:00 USERID
_ ADCD311 552 2002/02/07 2001/10/25 16:37:00 USERID
_ ADCD330 527 2002/02/07 2002/02/08 14:45:00 USERID
_ ADCIN44 137 2002/02/07 2002/10/25 10:27:00 USERID
_ ADCIN52 152 2002/02/07 2002/10/25 16:38:00 USERID
_ ALTC9N6 351 2002/11/04 1994/11/04 14:01:00 USERID

Primary commands supported by the Copy Utility Member Directory are as follows:
CANCEL or CAN
Used to cancel the copy operation. The LOCATE, MEMBER, and SORT commands
assist in the location of the desired members.
L or LOCATE
This command, followed by a value, positions to the first member directory entry
whose sort sequence field is greater than or equal to the specified value. For
example, when the directory list is sorted by the Name column, the L ABC positions
the member list to the first member in the list whose member name is greater than
or equal to the name ABC.

132 ISPF User Guide

Copy Utility

MEMBER
This command, followed by valid selection criteria, can be used to specify additional
member selection criteria. Using this command format reduces the current member
list to only those members that contain records that match the specified selection
criteria. Successive MEMBER commands can be used to continually reduce the
current member list. For example, MEMBER 'ABC' reduces the member list to only
those members that contain the characters ABC in one of their records. A
subsequent MEMBER 'XYZ' command reduces the member list to only those
members that contain the characters ABC and XYZ.
SORT
Sorts the directory by any of the columns in the directory after you type SORT XXX
or SORT XXX Y where 'XXX' is one of the column literals and 'Y' is 'A' for ascending or
'D' for descending. For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory in descending
order of Created Date and SORT ID A sorts the directory in ascending order of User
ID.
S member
Selects a member from the data set for processing. The member does not have to
be in the current member list to be selected. The member can be a generic
member name such as 'A*' which will select all members who's name starts with
the letter 'A', or '*' which will select all members from the directory.

Field Descriptions
Line Item Action Indicator
Specify an action to be performed for the member represented by the line item, by
typing one of the following commands:
■ S – Select member to be copied
■ B – Browse member with ISPF browse
■ E – Edit member with ISPF edit.
■ 1 – Browse the member with CA File Master Plus
■ 2 – Edit the member with CA File Master Plus
Rename/MSG
When a member is to be renamed as it is copied, type the new member name in
the column named Rename.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 133

Catalog Utility

Catalog Utility
The Catalog Utility screen lets you request a list of data sets that match a specified
wildcarded DSN. If you type a volume, only data sets on that volume are included in the
list. For any data set in the list, you can access various CA File Master Plus functions.

-------------- CA File Master Plus -- Catalog Utility --------------

OPTION ===>

Search data set name ===> CAI.TEST33

Volume ===>

Extended data set info ===> N

The data set list is in regular or extended format depending on the value of the
Extended data set info field. The regular format of the Catalog Data Set List requires
fewer resources to display and contains the following fields from the catalog:
■ DSN
■ Volume Serial
■ File Type

The extended format of the Catalog Data Set List presents the following information
about each data set:
■ Data Set Organization (such as PS for seq, PO for PDS, and VS for VSAM)
■ Number of Tracks Allocated
■ Percent of Tracks Used
■ Volume Serial Number

Page right to view the following fields relating to each data set:
■ Record Format (such as 'FB', 'VBA', 'U', and so forth)
■ Logical Record Length
■ Block Size
■ Number of Extents Allocated
■ Created Date
■ Last Referenced Date

From the Catalog Utility Data Set List, you can access the following facilities:
1 – Browse E – ISPF Edit U – Uncatalog

134 ISPF User Guide

Catalog Utility

2 – Edit F – Free Space V – VSAM Utility

A – Update PDS M – Library Member Utility X – Search Utility
Allocations
B – ISPF Browse P – Print Y – Update Utility
C – Catalog R – Rename Z – Compress PDS
D – Delete S – Data Set Information

Print the list of data sets and all of the fields on each line item with a primary command
of 'P' from the Catalog Utility Data Set List.

Field Descriptions
Search data set name
Type the wildcarded DSN for the data sets that are to be displayed. When typing a
wildcarded DSN, you can type an asterisk (*) to represent any number of characters
with any value, and you can type a percent sign (%) to represent one character of
any value. The Catalog Utility Data Set List screen has a line item for all data sets
that match the wildcarded DSN.
Volume
To limit data sets displayed on the Catalog Utility Data Set List screen to data sets
on a particular volume, type the Volume serial.
Extended data set info
Type Y or N to indicate whether to display the expanded version of the Catalog
Utility Data Set List screen. The request of expanded information increases the
response time of the request.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 135

Catalog Utility

Catalog Utility Data Set List

The Catalog Utility Data Set List screen is presented when you type a request into the
Catalog Utility screen. The user identifies the data sets to be processed by specifying a
wildcarded DSN. If only the data sets within a single volume are to be processed
(whether cataloged or uncataloged), a Volume serial is also specified. The Catalog Utility
Data Set List screen contains a line item for each data set selected for processing.

CA File Master Plus -- Catalog Utility Data Set List ---- Row 1 of 13
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

1 - Browse E - ISPF Edit U - Uncatalog

2 - Edit F - Free Space V - VSAM Utility
A - Update PDS Allocations M - Library Member Utility X - Search Utility
B - ISPF Browse P - Print Y - Update Utility
C - Catalog R - Rename Z - Compress PDS
D - Delete S - Dataset Information

A DSN Msg Org Trks %Use Volume

_ ABC.TEST33.LOADLIB PO 144 100 CAI003
_ ABC.TEST33.LOADLIB2 PO 11 100 CAI003
_ ABC.TEST33.LOADLIB3 PO 8 100 CAI003
_ ABC.TEST33.PDS PO 2501 15 CAI009
_ ABC.TEST33.PDS.COPY PO 333 100 CAI008
_ ABC.TEST33.PDS2 PO 7 100 CAI004
_ ABC.TEST33.PDS25 PO 2501 1 CAI009
_ ABC.TEST33.PDS3 PO 339 100 CAI004
_ ABC.TEST33.SEQFB80 PS 15 100 CAI009
_ ABC.TEST33.SEQU PS 7 100 CAI009
_ ABC.TEST33.SEQU84 PS 1 100 CAI009
_ ABC.TEST33.SEQVB400 PS 1 100 CAI009
_ ABC.TEST33.SEQVB84 PS 1 100 CAI009
************************** END OF LIST OF DATA SETS **************************

You may perform various CA File Master Plus functions for any of the listed data sets by
typing an action code to the left of the DSN.

The SORT primary command can be used to sort the line items by any of the column
titles. The syntax of the SORT command is:
SORT ccc a

where 'ccc' is two or more positions of the column title and 'a' is 'A' (ascending) or 'D'
(descending).

When the second positional parameter (A or D) is omitted, a descending sort is done for
the Trks column and an ascending sort is done for all other columns. If the first
positional parameter (column name) is omitted, the line items are sorted ascending by
DSN.

136 ISPF User Guide

Catalog Utility

You can use the FIND primary command to locate line items whose DSN contains
specified character strings.

The list of data sets and all of the fields on each line item can be printed with a primary
command of P.

The MEMBER primary command can be used to search catalogued partitioned data sets
for members by name. The syntax of the MEMBER command is:
MEMBER member-name

where 'member-name' is an optional 1-8 character member name or wildcarded

member name representing the search argument.

The MEMBER command displays the Locate PDSs With Specified Member screen from
the PDS Utility and populates the Wildcarded DSN for PDSs field with the Search Dataset
Name used to create your catalogued data set list. If a member name is specified, it is
used to populate the Member Name field for the search. The MEMBER command can
only be used to search catalogued partitioned data sets.

Each line item contains the following fields for each data set.
■ Data Set Organization (such as 'PS' for seq, 'PO' for PDS, 'VS' for VSAM, and 'PSL' for
large format data set)
■ Number of Tracks Allocated
■ Percent of Tracks Used
■ Volume Serial Number

Page RIGHT to view the following fields relating to each data set.
■ Record Format (such as FB, VBA, U, and so forth.)
■ Logical Record Length
■ Block Size
■ Number of Extents Allocated

To perform various CA File Master Plus functions, you can type any of the following line
item action codes.
1 – Browse E – ISPF Edit U – Uncatalog
2 – Edit F – Free Space V – VSAM Utility
A – Update PDS M – Library Member Utility X – Search Utility
Allocations
B – ISPF Browse P – Print Y – Update Utility
C – Catalog R – Rename Z – Compress PDS
D – Delete S – Data Set Information

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 137

VTOC Utility

VTOC Utility
The VTOC Utility screen performs one of the following two functions for a set of
selected DASD volumes.

---------------- CA File Master Plus -- VTOC Utility ---------------

OPTION ===>

I - List volume information

E - List VTOC entries in data set name sequence

Volume Selection Information:

Volume serial ===> CAI*
Unit name ===>

Generic Search Function:

Search data set name ===> TECH.*

The function performed is based on the Option Code specified.

■ I – List volume information is displayed for each of the selected volumes.
■ E – A list of DSNs within the selected volumes that match the specified wildcarded
DSN appears. For any data set in the list, you can access various CA File Master Plus
functions.

You can use the Volume Selection Information section of the screen to specify the
volumes to be involved in the processing based on a list of Volume serials or wildcarded
Volume serials and a list of Unit names or wildcarded Unit names. Any volume that
matches the specification in either the Volume serial list or the Unit name list is selected
for processing.

When the option is 'I', List volume information, a screen appears which has the
following information for each selected volume:
■ Volume Serial Number
■ Volume Device Type (such as 3380, 3390, and so forth)
■ Percent of Volume Used
■ Mount Status (STG=storage volume, PUB=public volume, PRV=private volume)
■ Total Free Cylinders
■ Max Free Cylinders - largest available contiguous free cylinders
■ Total Free Tracks
■ Max Free Tracks - largest available contiguous free tracks
■ Num Extents – number of free extents

138 ISPF User Guide

VTOC Utility

■ SMS – indicates if the volume is SMS managed. 'SMS' indicates that the volume is
SMS managed.
■ EAV – indicates if the volume is an Extended Address Volume, 'EAV' indicates that
the volume is an Extended Address Volume.

The displayed information is helpful to summarize the status and free space for each
volume within the selected group of volumes. You can select a volume to receive a
VTOC Utility Data Set List that displays all of the data sets within that volume, from the
Volume Summary screen.

When the option is E to request the VTOC Utility Data Set List, a screen appears that has
a line item for each of the data sets within the selected volumes that match the
wildcarded DSN (if specified). Each line item presents the following information about
each data set:
■ Data Set Organization (such as PS for seq, PO for PDS, and VS for VSAM)
■ Number of Tracks Allocated
■ Percent of Tracks Used
■ Volume Serial Number

Page RIGHT to view the following fields relating to each data set:
■ Record Format (such as FB, VBA, U, and so forth)
■ Logical Record Length
■ Block Size
■ Number of Extents Allocated
■ Created Date
■ Last Referenced Date

From the VTOC Utility Data Set List that was accessed using an option of E, you can
access the following facilities:
1 - Browse E - ISPF Edit S – Data Set Information
2 - Edit F - Free Space U - Uncatalog
B - ISPF Browse M - Library Member V - VSAM Utility
Utility
C - Catalog P – Print X – Search Utility
D - Delete R - Rename Y – Update Utility

From the VTOC Utility Data Set List, you can print the list of data sets and all of the fields
on each line item with a primary command of P.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 139

VTOC Utility

VTOC Utility Data Set List

The VTOC Utility Data Set List screen appears when an option of blank is selected from
the VTOC Utility Screen.

CA File Master Plus -- VTOC Utility Dataset List ------ Row 1 of 1278
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

1 - Browse E - ISPF Edit S - Dataset Information

2 - Edit F - Free Space U - Uncatalog
B - ISPF Browse M - Library Member Utility V - VSAM Utility
C - Catalog P - Print X - Search Utility
D - Delete R - Rename Y - Update Utility

A DSN Msg Org Trks %Use Volume

_ TECH.A PS 1 100 CAI004
_ TECH.AC PS 1 100 CAI004
_ TECH.ASM.D10819 PO 100 20 CAI003
_ TECH.ASM.TXT.D10819 PS 13 100 CAI002
_ TECH.ASM2COB.PDS PO 20 10 CAI003
_ TECH.AUTHLIB.BIN PS 134 100 CAI003
_ TECH.B PS 1 100 CAI004
_ TECH.BACKUP.D00501 PO 424 100 CAI005
_ TECH.BACKUP.D00605 PO 615 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D00705 PO 617 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D00805 PO 498 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D00906 PO 535 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D01001 PO 657 100 CAI005
_ TECH.BACKUP.D01101 PO 653 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D01201 PO 562 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D10101 PO 575 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D10201 PO 598 100 CAI005
_ TECH.BACKUP.D10301 PO 742 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D10401 PO 752 100 CAI005
_ TECH.BACKUP.D10501 PO 769 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D10601 PO 666 100 CAI007
_ TECH.BACKUP.D10621 PO 778 100 CAI007

Using the VTOC Utility screen, you can identify the volumes to be involved in the
processing according to a list of Volume serials or wildcarded Volume serials and a list of
Unit names or wildcarded Unit names. The VTOC Utility Data Set List screen contains a
line item for each data set that matches the wildcarded DSN, if specified, within any of
the selected volumes.

To perform various CA File Master Plus functions for any of the listed data sets, type an
action code to the left of the DSN.

The SORT primary command can be used to sort the line items by any of the column
titles. The syntax of the SORT command is:
SORT ccc a

where 'ccc' is three or more positions of the column title and a is 'A' (ascending) or 'D'
(descending).

140 ISPF User Guide

VTOC Utility

When the second positional parameter (A or D) is omitted, a descending sort is done for
the Trks,Created, and 'referenced' columns and an ascending sort is done for all other
columns. If the first positional parameter (column name) is omitted, the line items are
sorted ascending by DSN.

To locate line items whose DSN contain specified character strings, you can use the FIND
primary command.

The list of data sets and all of the fields on each line item can be printed with a primary
command of P

Each line item contains the following fields for each data set.
■ Data Set Organization (such as PS for seq, PO for PDS, and VS for VSAM)
■ Number of Tracks Allocated
■ Percent of Tracks Used
■ Volume Serial Number

Page RIGHT to view the following fields relating to each data set:
■ Record Format (such as FB, VBA, U, and so forth)
■ Logical Record Length
■ Block Size
■ Number of Extents Allocated
■ Created Date
■ Last Referenced Date

To perform various CA File Master Plus functions, you can type the following line item
action codes:
1 - Browse E - ISPF Edit S – Data Set Information
2 - Edit F - Free Space U - Uncatalog
B - ISPF Browse M - Library Member V - VSAM Utility
Utility
C - Catalog P – Print X – Search Utility
D - Delete R - Rename Y – Update Utility

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 141

VTOC Utility

Field Descriptions
Volume Selection Information:
Volume Selection Information: Volume Serial
Used to identify volume(s) that are to be processed by the VTOC utility. Type a list
of 1 to 10 volumes or wildcarded volume specifications with either commas or
spaces separating items in the list..
When typing a wildcarded Volume Serial, you can type an asterisk (*) to represent
any number of characters with any value, and you can type a percent sign (%) to
represent one character of any value.

Example:
CONV01 means volume 'CONV01'
CONV*,VOL001 means all volumes whose name begins with 'CONV' plus
volume 'VOL001'
Either the Volume serial field or the Unit name field must be typed to identify the
volumes to be processed. If both are typed, volumes that match either the Volume
serial list or the Unit name list are processed.
Volume Selection: Unit Name
Used to identify Unit names that are to be processed by the VTOC utility. Type a list
of 1 to 10 Unit Names or wildcarded Unit name specifications with either commas
or spaces separating items in the list.
When typing a wildcarded Unit Name, you can type an asterisk (*) to represent any
number of characters with any value, and you can type a percent sign (%) to
represent one character of any value.

Example:
3380 means all volumes matching a Unit Name of '3380'
SYS*, 3390 means all volumes matching a Unit Name beginning with
'SYS' or with a Unit Name of '3390'
Either the Volume serial field or the Unit name field must be typed to identify the
volumes to be processed. If both are typed, volumes that match either the Volume
serial list or the Unit name list are processed.
Generic Search Function:
Search data set name
To limit data sets to be displayed to those data sets that match a wildcarded DSN
specification, type the wildcarded DSN in this field. When typing a wildcarded DSN,
you can type an asterisk (*) to represent any number of characters with any value,
and you can type a percent sign (%) to represent one character of any value.

142 ISPF User Guide

VTOC Utility

The VTOC Utility Data Set List screen has a line item for all data sets that match the
wildcarded DSN that resides on the volumes selected according to the specified
Volume Serial and Unit Name information.

Volume Summary
The Volume Summary screen is presented when an option of 'I' is selected from the
VTOC Utility screen. Use the VTOC Utility screen to identify the volumes involved in the
processing according to a list of Volume Serials or wildcarded Volume serials and a list of
Unit names or wildcarded Unit names.

------------- CA File Master Plus ------------- Volume Sum Row 1 to 11 of 11

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
------------- FREE SPACE -------------
------- VOLUME ------- Free Max Free Max Num
S VOLSER Type %used stat CYLs CYLs Tracks Tracks Extents SMS EAV
_ CAI001 3390 62 STG 1121 126 19009 1896
_ CAI002 3390 91 STG 272 19 4734 298
_ CAI003 3390 87 STG 398 31 6676 477
_ CAI004 3390 88 STG 317 18 6146 286
_ CAI005 3390 36 STG 2118 1813 31915 27195
_ CAI006 3390 88 STG 348 55 5835 843
_ CAI007 3390 84 STG 487 99 7860 1500
_ CAI008 3390 75 STG 825 179 12594 2700 SMS
_ CAI009 3390 72 STG 917 760 14120 11400
_ CAI010 3390 40 STG 2017 2013 30268 30195 EAV
_ CAI011 3390 50 STG 1667 1667 25017 25015 SMS EAV
***************************** END OF VOLUME NAMES *****************************

For each volume selected for processing, a line item containing the following
information appears:
■ Volume Serial Number (VOLSER)
■ Volume Device Type (such as 3380, 3390, and so forth)
■ Percent of Volume Used
■ Mount Status (STG=storage volume, PUB=public volume, PRV=private volume)
■ Total Free Cylinders
■ Max Free Cylinders - largest available contiguous free cylinders
■ Total Free Tracks
■ Max Free Tracks - largest available contiguous free tracks
■ Num Extents – number of free extents

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 143

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

■ SMS – indicates if the volume is SMS managed. 'SMS' indicates that the volume is
SMS managed.
■ EAV – indicates if the volume is an Extended Address Volume, 'EAV' indicates that
the volume is an Extended Address Volume.

This information is helpful to summarize the status and free space for each volume
within the selected group of volumes.

Field Descriptions
S (Select to Process Volume)
Type S to request the VTOC Utility Data Set List for the Volume serial of that line
item. The VTOC Utility Data Set List displays all of the data sets within that volume
and provides an opportunity to perform various CA File Master Plus functions for
any of these data sets.

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

The PDS Utilities Sub-Menu provides a list of the PDS Utility functions that you can
perform. Type an Option value of 1 thru 4 to select the desired PDS Utilities option. Only
the first option can be performed for a PDS/E.

-------- CA File Master Plus -- PDS Utilities Sub-Menu ----------

OPTION ===>

1 Locate PDSs with specified member (PDS or PDSE)

2 Compress a PDS (PDS only)

3 Update PDS allocation parameters (PDS only)

4 Recover overlaid or deleted members (PDS only)

The functions performed by the four options are:

Locate PDSs with Specified Member – Lets you locate PDSs that contain a specified
member. The PDSs that will be searched for the member are indicated either by
specifying a wildcarded DSN or by specifying a data set that contains a list of PDSs
to be searched.
Compress a PDS – Compresses a PDS. If requested, a backup copy of the PDS is
made before initiating the compress.

144 ISPF User Guide

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

Update PDS allocation parameters – Lets you increase the number of directory
blocks or the primary space allocation for a PDS.
Recover overlaid or deleted members – Creates a new PDS that contains the
overlaid and deleted members from a specified PDS. Member recovery can be
limited to members with a specified character string.

Locate PDSs with Specified Member

The Locate PDSs with Specified Member screen is used to build a directory of PDSs that
contain a specified member. You can browse or edit members in the various PDSs from
the directory.

------ CA File Master Plus -- Locate PDSs with Specified Member -----
COMMAND ===>

Specify member to be located

Member name ===> ZZDSND

Specify PDSs to be searched

Wildcarded DSN for PDSs ===> FM3.INST.*

or
File with list of PDSs ===>
_______________________________________________

Specify Search Options:

Exclude Archived Datasets ===> Y (Y/N)

You can specify the PDSs to be searched in either of the following two ways:
■ By a wildcarded DSN to search all PDSs whose DSN matches the wildcard
■ By specifying a file that contains a list of the DSNs of the PDSs to be searched

Field Descriptions
Specify member to be located:
Member name
Type a member name that is to be located within PDSs. The PDSs to be searched
are defined in the Specify PDSs to be searched section of the screen.
Note: This process returns a directory of all of the PDSs within the bounds of the
search that contain the specified member.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 145

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

Specify PDSs to be searched

Wildcarded DSN for PDSs
You can identify the list of PDSs to be searched either by a wildcarded DSN or by the
DSN of a data set that contains a list of PDS DSNs. For a wildcard DSN search, type
the wildcarded DSN in this field.
Note: Quotes are not allowed in this field and the absence of quotes does not imply
a DSN prefixed by the TSO User ID.
File with list of PDS's
You can identify the list of PDSs to be searched either by a wildcarded DSN or by the
DSN of a data set that contains a list of PDS DSNs. For a file search, type the DSN of
a file that contains a DSN to be searched in each record. The file may be a
sequential file or a PDS member of any record format and the DSN must be the first
non-blank character in each record.
Specify Search Options
Exclude Archived Datasets (Y/N)
Type Y to exclude archived data sets from the member search, or N to include
archived data sets. Specify Y to prevent archived data sets from being recalled
during the member search. The member search utility cannot search an archived
data set for members without first restoring the data set to disk.

Directory of PDS Containing Member

The Directory of PDS Containing Member screen contains a directory of all of the PDSs
within the bounds of the search that contain the specified member.

Datasets containing the member 'ZZDSND' -------------------------- Row 1 of 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
B - ISPF Browse 1 - Browse
E - ISPF Edit 2 - Edit

S DSN CHANGED SIZE ID

_ FM3.INST.ISPEXEC 02/01/24 22:26 114 TECH2
_ FM3.INST.ISPLLIBC
_ FM3.INST.SYSCEXEC
******************************** END OF DSN LIST ******************************

146 ISPF User Guide

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

Field Descriptions
Line Item Action
To specify an action to be performed for the DSN and member represented by the
line item, type one of the following commands:
■ B – Browse the member within the DSN of this line item
■ E – Edit the member within the DSN of this line item
■ 1 – Browse the member within the DSN of this line item using the Browse
function of CA File Master Plus
■ 2 – Edit the member within the DSN of this line item using the Edit function of
CA File Master Plus

Directory of PDS Containing Wildcarded Members

The Directory of PDS Containing Wildcarded Members screen contains a directory of all
of the PDSs within the bounds of the search that contain a wildcarded member.

Datasets with members matching 'PAYR*' wildcard ----------------- Row 1 of 11

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> PAGE
B - ISPF Browse 1 - Browse
E - ISPF Edit 2 - Edit

S DSN Member Changed Size ID

_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.JCL PAYRD223 02/05/10 09:51 75 PROGR01
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.JCL PAYRI223 02/05/10 09:51 76 PROGR01
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.LISTING PAYRD223
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.LISTING PAYRI223
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.LOAD PAYRD223
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.LOAD PAYRI223
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.SOURCE PAYRCBLK 02/05/10 16:32 844 PROGR01
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.SOURCE PAYRC223 02/05/14 17:59 1100 PROGR01
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.SOURCE PAYRD223 02/05/09 16:26 21 PROGR01
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.SOURCE PAYRI223 02/05/14 16:24 4587 PROGR01
_ PROGR01.PAYROLL.SOURCE PAYRMSG 02/05/08 14:40 141 PROGR01

Field Descriptions
Line Item Action
To specify an action to be performed for the DSN and member represented by the
line item, type one of the following commands:
■ B – Browse the member within the DSN of this line item
■ E – Edit the member within the DSN of this line item
■ 1 – Browse the member within the DSN of this line item using the Browse
function of CA File Master Plus
■ 2 – Edit the member within the DSN of this line item using the Edit function of
CA File Master Plus

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 147

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

Compress PDS
The Compress PDS screen lets you request a compress of a PDS. If requested, a backup
of the PDS is made prior to the compress. The DSN of the backup PDS can be specified
or generated for you.

---------------- CA File Master Plus -- Compress PDS ---------------

COMMAND ===>

Specify PDS to be compressed

Data set name ===> 'TECH1.FM3.INST.ISPPLIB.BACKUP'

Optional - create a backup file before compressing

When New PDS DSN is blank, a DSN for the backup will be generated

Create backup? ===> N

New PDS DSN ===> ______________________________________________

Field Descriptions - Compress PDS

Specify PDS to be compressed
Data set name
Type the DSN of the PDS that is to be compressed.
To facilitate selection of the desired DSN, you can use any of the following syntaxes:
■ Wildcarded DSN containing an asterisk (*) or a percent sign (%) for unknown
characters of the DSN
■ D to request a directory of DSN Lists
■ D dddddd where 'dddddd' is the name of a DSN list
Optional – create a backup file before compressing
Create backup?
Type Y or N to indicate whether a copy of the PDS is to be created prior to the start
of the compress.
New PDS DSN
To specify the DSN for the backup copy of the PDS being compressed, type the DSN
in this field. The DSN specified must not already be on the catalog because the
compress process creates a new backup PDS.
Tip: It is usually simpler to leave this field blank and let the DSN of the Backup PDS
be calculated for you.

148 ISPF User Guide

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

The calculated DSN contains the DSN of the PDS being compressed. According to
your user profile, your user ID may be appended to the front of the calculated DSN.
This option in the user profile is set with the Userid Prefix for Backup PDSs? field of
the Processing Defaults and Job Statement Screen (CA File Master Plus Option 0.1).
A qualifier is added to the end of the calculated DSN to indicate that it is a backup
PDS and this qualifier may contain a sequence number if the calculated DSN has
already been used. The part of the calculated DSN that contains the DSN of the PDS
being compressed can be truncated to make room for the prefix or suffix.
Note: Since any DSN typed must be for a data set that does not currently exist,
wildcard and DSN List support is not available for this field.

Update PDS Allocation

The Update PDS Allocation screen lets you increase or decrease the number of directory
blocks or the primary allocation of a PDS.

------------ CA File Master Plus -- Update PDS Allocation ----------

COMMAND ===>

Specify PDS to be Updated

Data set name ===> 'TECH1.JCL.CNTL'

Allocation
Allocated Used New
Directory blocks 25 1 _____
Tracks 57 20 ________

PDS is renamed to backup PDS.

When Backup PDS DSN is blank, a DSN for the backup will be generated.

Backup PDS ===>

When typing an updated number of Directory Blocks or Primary Allocation, a new PDS is
allocated according to your specifications and all of the members are copied from the
original PDS to this new PDS. If the copy operation is successful, the original PDS is
renamed to a Backup PDS DSN and the new PDS is renamed to the DSN of the original
PDS.

Tip: You can type a DSN for the Backup PDS, but it is usually more convenient to let the
process calculate this DSN for you.

This function only works with a PDS and is not necessary for a PDS/E.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 149

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

Field Descriptions
Specify PDS to be Updated
Data set name
Type the DSN of the PDS whose allocation parameters are to be updated. This PDS
is reallocated with parameters that you specify. The current version of the PDS is
renamed to the DSN in the Backup PDS field.
To facilitate selection of the desired DSN, you can type any of the following syntax:
■ Wildcarded DSN containing an asterisk (*) or a percent sign (%) for unknown
characters of the DSN
■ D to request a directory of DSN Lists
■ D dddddd where 'dddddd' is the name of a DSN list
Allocation
Directory blocks
To increase or decrease the number of directory blocks allocated to the PDS, type
the desired number of directory blocks.
Tracks
To increase or decrease the primary space allocation of the PDS, type the desired
primary allocation amount.
Note: At least one of the parameters in the Allocation section must be updated to
request the reallocation of the PDS.
Backup PDS
As the PDS is being reallocated, the current version of the PDS is renamed. If you
want to specify the DSN to which the PDS is renamed, type the DSN in this field. The
DSN specified must not already be on the catalog because the Backup PDS is
created new by PDS reallocation process.
Tip: It is normally more convenient to leave this field blank and let the DSN for the
Backup PDS be calculated for you. Field-level help contains information about the
DSN that is automatically calculated when you leave this field blank.
Since any DSN typed must be for a data set that does not currently exist, wildcard
and DSN List support is not available for this field.
The Backup PDS is created to preserve the original PDS, but may be deleted once it
is no longer needed.

150 ISPF User Guide

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

Recover Overlaid or Deleted Members

The Recover Overlaid or Deleted Members screen lets you recover members that have
been deleted or overlaid by updating a new PDS with the recovered versions of the
members.

---- CA File Master Plus -- Recover Overlaid or Deleted Members ----

COMMAND ===>

Specify PDS with members to be recovered

Data set name ===> 'ABC.TEST33.PDS'

Limit recovery to members with following character string (optional)

Char string ===> ____________________

Specify DSN for a new PDS that will contain the recovered members.
When New PDS DSN is blank, a DSN for the recovery PDS will be generated.

New PDS DSN ===> ______________________________________________

This function is helpful by recovering members that were erroneously deleted or

updated and by letting you browse or edit previous versions of a member.

The Recover Overlaid or Deleted Members function only works with a PDS and does not
work with a PDS/E. Recovery is possible only while the overlaid or deleted members are
in the PDS. For example, compressing a PDS makes the members no longer available for
recovery.

Type the DSN of the PDS from which members are to be recovered. All recovered
members are named #nnnnn where 'nnnnn' is a five digit number starting with '00001'.

Tip: You can also type the DSN of the PDS to which the members are to be recovered,
but it is usually more convenient to let the process calculate this DSN for you.

Optionally, you can type a character string to limit recovery to members that contain
that character string.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 151

PDS Utilities Sub-Menu

Field Descriptions - Recover Overlaid or Deleted Members

Specify PDS with members to be recovered
Data set name
Type the DSN of the PDS that contains members that need to be recovered. You can
recover members, which have been either deleted or overlaid with a new version.
The recovered members are written to a PDS that is allocated by the recovery
process and the PDS with Members to be Recovered will not be updated.
Note: You must have update authority for this PDS.
To facilitate selection of the desired DSN, you can type any of the following
syntaxes.
■ Wildcarded DSN containing an asterisk (*) or a percent sign (%) for unknown
characters of the DSN
■ D to request a directory of DSN Lists
■ D dddddd where 'dddddd' is the name of a DSN list
Limit recovery to members with following character string
Char string
Most of the time when recovering overlaid or deleted members, you are looking for
one particular member to recover. To make it easier to locate the desired member,
it is helpful to only recover members that have a chance of being the member for
which you are looking. When this field contains a non-blank character string, only
members that contain the character string are restored. When this field is blank, all
overlaid and deleted members are restored.
For example, if you are looking for a program source member and the program
name is in the source, you can limit the restored members by typing the program
name in this field.
Specify DSN for a new PDS
New PDS DSN
If the deleted and overlaid members need to be recovered to a specified DSN, type
the DSN in this field. The DSN specified must not already be on the catalog because
the member recovery process creates the New PDS for Recovered members.
Tip: It is usually simpler to leave this field blank and let the DSN of the New PDS for
Recovered Members be calculated for you.
The calculated DSN contains the DSN of the original PDS. According to your user
profile, your user ID can be appended to the front of the calculated DSN. This
option in the user profile is set with the Userid Prefix for Backup PDSs? field of the
Processing Defaults and Job Statement Screen (CA File Master Plus Option 0.1).

152 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

A qualifier is added to the end of the calculated DSN to indicate that it is a

recovered PDS and this qualifier may contain a sequence number if the calculated
DSN has already been used. The part of the calculated DSN that contains the
original PDS DSN may be truncated to make room for the prefix or suffix being
added.
Note: Since any DSN typed must be for a data set that does not currently exist,
wildcard and DSN List support is not available for this field.

VSAM Utility
The VSAM Utility performs many commonly needed functions related to the definition,
management, and use of VSAM files. Each of the functions, except display of data set
information, is performed either online or batch depending on the Execution Mode.

---------------- CA File Master Plus -- VSAM Utility --------------

COMMAND ===>

BLANK - Display Data Set Information I - Define Alternate Index

V - Define VSAM File B - Build Alternate Index
K - Delete VSAM File P - Define Path
D - Delete/Define VSAM File R - Rename Component
M - Modify VSAM File

Data set to be processed

Data set name ===> 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01'

Model VSAM data set for allocations (optional)

Data set name ===> 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01'

Saved IDCAMS control statements (optional)

Data set name ===> 'TECH.WORKPDS'
Member name ===>

Execution mode ===> O O = Online

S = Submit JCL
E = Edit JCL

For the functions of defining a VSAM cluster or defining an alternate index file, specify a
model data set to request that the various allocation parameters default to match the
allocation of the model data set.

All of the functions, except Display of Data Set Information, are performed by building
IDCAMS control statements and then executing IDCAMS. The generated control
statements are copied to a PDS member specified in the Saved IDCAMS control
statements section of the screen.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 153

VSAM Utility

Select one of the following options:

■ BLANK – Displays information related to the VSAM definition, allocation parameters
and options, and record-level activity statistics. The display of information about
the VSAM file is formatted according to VSAM access method.
■ V – Define VSAM file
■ K – Delete VSAM file
■ D – Delete/Define VSAM file
■ I – Define Alternate Index
■ B – Build Alternate Index
■ P – Define a path to be used to access a VSAM cluster (through an AIX or as an alias)
■ R – Alter a VSAM file definition to rename components of a cluster, alternate index,
or path
■ M – Alter a VSAM file to modify allocation parameters, allocated volumes, or SMS
class

To assist in the specification of DSNs, each of the DSN fields on this screen has support
for wildcarded DSN and DSN Lists. Any of the following syntaxes can be used to request
a list of DSNs from which the desired DSN may be selected
■ Wildcarded DSN containing an asterisk (*) or a percent sign (%) for unknown
characters of the DSN
■ D to request a directory of DSN Lists
■ D dddddd where 'dddddd' is the name of a DSN list

Note: A wildcarded member name can be specified in the Saved IDCAMS control
statements member to request a directory of members that match the wildcard.

Field Descriptions
Data set to be processed - Data set name
Type the DSN of the VSAM component to receive the processing associated with
the specified command.
Model VSAM data set for allocations (Optional) – Data set name
When the processing command is V (Define VSAM File), D (Delete/Define VSAM
File), or I (Define Alternate Index), a Model VSAM Data Set can be specified. When
the Model VSAM Data Set is specified, the various allocation parameters are
defaulted to match the allocation of the model data set.

154 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Saved IDCAMS Control Statements – Data set name

The processing of each of the commands, except Display Data Set Information, is
performed by generating IDCAMS control statements to perform the function and
then executing IDCAMS with these control statements either online or in batch.
When a PDS and member name are specified within the Saved IDCAMS control
statements area, these control statements are copied to the specified member.
Saved IDCAMS Control Statements – Member name
Member name into which generated IDCAMS control statements are saved.
Execution mode
The choices for Execution mode are:
■ O – Perform the function online
■ S – Generate and submit JCL to perform the function
■ E – Generate JCL to perform thefunction and initiate an edit session on the JCL.
Alter the JCL as needed and submit the JCL or save it to another location.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 155

VSAM Utility

Define VSAM Files

The Define VSAM File screen lets you create a VSAM file in response to a command of V
(Define VSAM File) or D (Delete/Define VSAM File) from the VSAM Utility screen. Use
this screen to specify the DSNs for the components of the VSAM file, the VSAM file type,
allocation parameters for the data and if applicable, index component, various VSAM
file definition parameters, VSAM processing options, and if applicable, SMS Class
information.

--------- CA File Master Plus ------- Define VSAM File --------

COMMAND ===>

Component DSNs:
Cluster 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS99'
Data ===> 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS99.DATA'
Index ===> 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS99.INDEX'
VSAM file type ===> KSDS K=KSDS E=ESDS R=RRDS L=Linear
Allocation: Data Index
Volume ===> CAI002 CAI002 Options
CI size ===> 16384 2048 Multiple volumes? ===> N
Unit ===> CYLS CYLS Load Restartable? ===> Y
Primary ===> 1 1 Erase on delete? ===> N
Secondary ===> 10 1 Write check? ===> N
Key position ===> 1 Replicate index? ===> N
Key length ===> 6 Spanned records? ===> N
Avg record size ===> 80
Max record size ===> 80
Expiration date ===> SMS Class
Owner ID ===> Storage ===> SMS1
% Free CI & CA ===> 30 10 Data ===>
Share options ===> 2 3 Management ===>
Buffer space ===> 34816

The DSN for the data and index component defaults to the DSN for the cluster being
defined with '.DATA' and '.INDEX' appended, but you can update these names. If the
VSAM file being defined does not have an index component, the DSN of the index
component is ignored. Only KSDS files and variable-length RRDS files have index
components.

IDCAMS control cards are generated according to the parameters typed and then one of
the following actions are performed depending on the Execution Mode field in the main
VSAM Utility screen.
■ Invoke IDCAMS online to define the VSAM file
■ Generate and submit JCLto define the VSAM file in batch
■ Initiate an edit session with the generated JCL

156 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Field Descriptions
Component DSNs:
Data
Updates the DSN of the data component of the VSAM file being defined. The DSN
defaults to the cluster name with '.DATA' appended.
Index
Updates the DSN of the index component of the VSAM file being defined. The DSN
defaults to the cluster name with '.INDEX' appended.
VSAM file type
Type one of the following values to indicate the VSAM file type. If the first letter of
one of the valid values is typed, the rest of the VSAM File Type appears in the field.
K–KSDS
Key Sequence Data Set
E–ESDS
Entry Sequence Data Set
R–RRDS
Relative Record Data Set
L–Linear
Linear Data Set
Allocation:
Volume
Type the volume serial number of the volume that contains the data and index
components of the VSAM file being defined.
If either the data or index component requires multiple volumes, type the first
volume in this field and set the Multiple Volumes? option field to Y.
This requests a screen where the remaining volumes can be typed.
CI size
Type a control interval size for the data component and, if applicable, for the index
component.
Unit
Specify the space allocation unit for the VSAM file component. The primary and
secondary allocations are in the specified units.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 157

VSAM Utility

Type the first position of one of the following valid values. The rest of the Allocation
Unit appears in the field.
T–TRKS
Tracks
C–CYLS
Cylinders
R–RECS
Records
K–K
KB (Kilobytes)
M–M
MB (Megabytes)
Primary
Type the primary allocation amount for the VSAM file component. The amount of
space allocated in the primary allocation is the specified number of tracks,
cylinders, records, KB, or MB depending on the allocation unit.
Secondary
Type the secondary allocation amount for the VSAM file component. The amount of
space allocated in each secondary allocation is the specified number of tracks,
cylinders, records, KB, or MB depending on the allocation unit.
Key position
If the VSAM file being defined is a KSDS file, type the position of the key. The Key
position value is specified as a position and not as a displacement. For example, if
the key begins in the first position of the record, type a value of 1.
Key length
If the VSAM file being defined is a KSDS file, type the key length.
Avg record size
Type average length of records in the data component.
Max record size
Type length of records of the largest record that may be in the data component. For
RRDS data sets, if the Maximum Record Size is equal to the Average Record Size, the
VSAM file is allocated as an RRDS file without an index component; otherwise, the
VSAM file is allocated as a variable RRDS file, which has an index component.
Expiration Date
If the VSAM cluster may be deleted after a certain date, type an Expiration Date in
CCYYMMDD format.

158 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Owner ID
This optional field can be used to specify an owner that is to be associated with the
VSAM file being allocated. If the Owner ID is not specified, the TSO User ID is
defined as the owner
Percent Free – CI & CA
CI – Type the amount of empty space to be left in each Control Interval when the
file is initially loaded. The freespace lets records be inserted or expanded within a
Control Interval before requiring a Control Interval split.
CA – Type the percentage of Control Intervals to be left unused in each Control Area
as the file is initially loaded. The use of Control Area freespace lets some Control
Interval splits occur before requiring a Control Area split.
Share options
Cross Region
Type a value of one- to –four to indicate how the file can be shared among regions
within the same system or within multiple systems using GRS (Global Resource
Serialization). The meaning of each value is as follows
1
The data set can be opened for read processing by an unlimited number of
users, but the data set can be accessed by only one user when that user is
doing read and write processing.
2
The data set can be opened by only one user at a time for read and write
processing, but any number of users can also be accessing for read processing.
3
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
4
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
Cross-System
Type a value of 3 or 4 to indicate how the file can be shared among systems.This is
the second of the two numbers displayed. The meaning of each value is:
3
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.

The data set can be fully shared by any number of user s. VSAM imme diately updates t he data set for PUTs a nd refr eshe s all input buffers for GETs.
4

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 159

VSAM Utility

Buffer space
Optional field used to specify the minimum buffer space to be allocated when this
VSAM file is accessed.
If you do not specify this parameter, VSAM uses the default of two times the data
CISIZE plus the index CISIZE if the file is indexed.
Options:
Multiple volumes?
When the data or index component of the VSAM file requires multiple volumes, set
the Multiple Volumes? Field to Y to request a screen into which you can type the
volume serial for additional volumes.
Load Restartable?
Type Y for the Load Restartable? option to request that the VSAM component
definition use the RECOVERY parameter causing the data component to be
preformatted previous to the initial load. Using this option causes the initial load to
take longer, but loads that do not complete successfully can be restarted.
Type N for the Load Restartable? option to request that the VSAM component
definition use the SPEED parameter causing the data component to not be
preformatted previous to the initial load.
Erase on delete?
Type Y for the Erase on Delete? option to request that the VSAM component
definition use the ERASE parameter causing all components of the file to be
overwritten with binary zeros when the VSAM file is deleted from the catalog. Type
N to define the VSAM component with the NOERASE parameter
Write check?
Type Y for the Write check? option to request that the VSAM component definition
use the WRITECHECK parameter requesting each write to the VSAM file to be
validated by a read without data transfer. Type N to define the VSAM component
with the NOWRITECHECK parameter.
Replicate index?
Type Y for the Replicate Index? option to request that the VSAM component
definition use the REPLICATE parameter requesting that the index records are
replicated on a track as many times as it will fit. Type N to define the VSAM
component with the NOREPLICATE parameter. Use of the REPLICATE parameter
improves the time required to access index records, but usually causes the index to
require more space.

160 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Spanned records?
Type Y for the Spanned records? option to request the VSAM file to be allocated
with the SPANNED parameter indicating that data records larger than a control
interval are allowed to span multiple control intervals. Type N to request the VSAM
file to be allocated with the NONSPANNED parameter. If you allocate your data set
with the NONSPANNED parameter and the specified Maximum Record Size is
greater than the Data Control Interval Size, VSAM automatically adjusts the Data
Control Interval Size to be greater than or equal to the Maximum Record Size.
SMS Class:
Storage
Type the one-to-eight-position name of the SMS Storage Class to be used when
allocating the VSAM file. The storage class can be used to control the storage
hardware used for the data set.
Data
Type the one-to-eight-position name of the SMS Data Class to be used when
allocating the VSAM file. The SMS data class can be used to control the attributes of
the data set being allocated
Management
Type the one-to-eight-position name of the SMS Management Class to be used
when allocating the VSAM file. The SMS Management Class can be used to control
data set characteristics related to the backup, migration, and retention of the data
set.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 161

VSAM Utility

Define Alternate Index File

The Define Alternate Index File screen lets you create an alternate index VSAM file in
response to a command of 'I' from the VSAM Utility screen. Use this screen to specify
the DSNs for the data and index components of the VSAM file, the base cluster related
to the alternate index, allocation parameters for the data and index components,
various VSAM file definition parameters, VSAM processing options, and if applicable,
SMS Class information.

------- CA File Master Plus --- Define Alternate Index File -------
COMMAND ===>

Component DSNs:
AIX cluster ===>'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS99'
AIX data ===>'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS99.DATA'
AIX index ===>'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS99.INDEX'
Base cluster ===> ______________________________________________

AIX Allocation: Data Index Options

Volume ===> CAI002 CAI002 Multiple volumes? ===> N
CI size (opt) ===> 16384 2048 AIX in sync with base? ===> Y
Unit ===> CYLS CYLS Unique key in base? ===> N
Primary ===> 1 1 Load Restartable? ===> Y
Secondary ===> 10 1 Erase on delete? ===> N
AIX key pos ===> 1 Write check? ===> N
AIX key len ===> 6 Replicate index? ===> N
Avg AIX rec size ===> 80
Max AIX rec size ===> 80
Expiration date ===>
OWNER ID ===> SMS
% Free CI & CA ===> 30 10 Data Class ===>
Share options ===> 2 3
Buffer space ===> 34816

The DSN for the data and index component defaults to the DSN for the cluster being
defined with '.DATA' and '.INDEX' appended, but the names can be updated.

IDCAMs control cards are generated according to the parameters you type, and then
one of the following actions is performed depending on the Execution Mode field in the
main VSAM Utility screen:
■ Invoke IDCAMS online to define the alternate index VSAM file
■ Generate and submit JCL to define the alternate index VSAM file in batch
■ Initiate an edit session with the generated JCL

162 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Field Descriptions
Component DSNs:
AIX data
Update the DSN of the data component of the Alternate Index file being defined.
The DSN defaults to the cluster name of the Alternate Index with '.DATA' appended.
AIX index
Update the DSN of the index component of the Alternate Index file being defined.
The DSN defaults to the cluster name of the Alternate Index with '.INDEX'
appended.
Base cluster
Type the DSN of the base cluster to which this Alternate Index file is related. The
base cluster must be a KSDS or ESDS VSAM file.
AIX Allocation:
Volume
Type the Volume serial of the volumes that contain the data and index components
of the Alternate Index file being defined.
If either the data or index components require multiple volumes, type the first
volume in this field and set the Multiple Volumes? option field to Y. This selection
requests a screen where you can type the remaining volumes.
CI size (opt)
Type a control interval size for the data component and for the index component of
the Alternate Index. If left blank, VSAM calculates the optimum control interval size.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 163

VSAM Utility

Unit
Specify the space allocation unit for the VSAM file component. The primary and
secondary allocations will be in the specified units.
Type the first position of one of the valid values. The rest of the Allocation Unit
appears in the field.
T–TRKS
Tracks
C–CYLS
Cylinders
R–RECS
Records
K–K
KB (Kilobytes)
M–M
MB (Megabytes)
Primary
Type the primary allocation amount for the VSAM file component. The amount of
space allocated in the primary allocation is the specified number of tracks,
cylinders, records, KB, or MB depending on the allocation unit
Secondary
Type the secondary allocation amount for the VSAM file component. The amount of
space allocated in each secondary allocation is the specified number of tracks,
cylinders, records, KB, or MB depending on the allocation unit.
AIX key pos
Type the position of the alternate key field within the base cluster. The Alternate
Key Position value is specified as a position and not as a displacement. For example,
if the alternate key field begins in the first position of the base cluster's data
component, type a value of 1.
AIX key len
Type the length of the alternate key field within the base cluster.
Avg AIX rec size
Type the average record sizes for the alternate index record or erase the field to
receive the VSAM default value of 4086.
Max AIX rec size
Type the maximum record size for the alternate index records erase the field to
receive the VSAM default value of 32600.

164 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Each alternate index record contains 5 bytes of VSAM control information followed
by the alternate key value, and by a table of pointers to the records in the base
cluster that contain that alternate key value. Therefore, the length of each alternate
record can be calculated as:
5 + AIXKL + (n * BASEKL)

where:
■ AIXKL is the alternate index key length, 'n' is the number of base cluster records
containing the alternate key value
■ BASEKL is the key length of the base cluster (or 4 for ESDS base clusters)
Expiration Date
To allow the Alternate Index VSAM file to be deleted after a certain date, type an
Expiration Date in CCYYMMDD format.
Owner ID
This optional field can be used to specify an owner to associated with the VSAM file
that is being allocated. If the Owner ID is not specified, the TSO User ID is defined as
the owner.
Percent Free CI & CA
CI – Type the amount of empty space to allocate in each Control Interval when the
file is initially loaded. The free space lets records be inserted or expanded within a
Control Interval before requiring a Control Interval split.
CA – Type the percentage of control intervals to be left unused in each Control Area
as the file is initially loaded. The use of Control Area free space lets some Control
Interval splits occur before requiring a Control Area split.
Share options
Cross-Region – Type a value from 1 to 4 to indicate how the file can be shared
among regions within the same system or within multiple systems using GRS
(Global Resource Serialization). The meaning of each value is as follows:
1. The data set can be opened for read processing by an unlimited number of
users, but only one user can access the data set when that user is doing read
and write processing.
2. Only one user at a time can open the data set for read and write processing,
but any number of users can also be accessing for read processing.
3. Any number of users can fully share the data set.
4. Any number of users can fully share the data set. For each PUT request, VSAM
immediately updates the data set. For each GET request, all input buffers are
refreshed.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 165

VSAM Utility

Cross System – Type a value of 3 or 4 to indicate how the file can be shared among
systems. The meaning of each value is as follows:
Any number of users can fully share the data set.
Any number of users can fully share the data set. For each PUT request, VSAM
immediately updates the data set. For each GET request, all input buffers are
refreshed.
Buffer space
Optional field used to specify the minimum buffer space allocation when this VSAM
Alternate Index file is accessed.
If this parameter is not specified, VSAM uses the default of two times the data
CISIZE plus the index CISIZE (if file is indexed).
Options:
Multiple volumes?
When the data or index component of the VSAM file requires multiple volumes, set
the Multiple Volumes? field to Y to request a screen where you can type the
volume serial for additional volumes.
AIX in sync with base?
Type Y for Yes or N for No to designate whether the alternate index is created with
the UPGRADE parameter indicating that the alternate index be kept in sync with the
base cluster. With the UPGRADE parameter, the alternate index is updated to
reflect changes as they occur to the base cluster.
Unique key in base?
Type Y for Yes or N for No to indicate whether the alternate index is created with
the UNIQUEKEY parameter indicating that each alternate index record points to
only one data record in the base cluster.
Load Restartable?
Type Y for the Load Restartable? option to request that the VSAM component
definition use the RECOVERY parameter causing the data component to be
preformatted previous to the initial load. Using this option causes the initial load to
take longer, but loads that do not complete successfully can be restarted.
Type N for the Load Restartable? option to request that the VSAM component
definition use the SPEED parameter causing the data component to not be
preformatted previous to the initial load.
Erase on delete?
Type Y for the Erase on Delete? option to request that the VSAM component
definition use the ERASE parameter to overwrite all components of the file with
binary zeros when the VSAM file is deleted from the catalog.
Type N to define the VSAM component with the NOERASE parameter.

166 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Write check?
Type Y for the Write check? option to request that the VSAM component definition
use the WRITECHECK parameter requesting validation of each write to the VSAM
file by a read without data transfer.
Type N to define the VSAM component with the NOWRITECHECK parameter.
Replicate index?
Type Y for the Replicate Index? option to request that the VSAM component
definition use the REPLICATE parameter requesting that the index records be
replicated on a track as many times as will fit.
Type N to define the VSAM component using the NOREPLICATE parameter. Use of
the REPLICATE parameter improves the time required to access index records, but
usually causes the index to require more space.
SMS – Data Class
Type the one-to-eight position name of the SMS Data Class to use when allocating
the Alternate Index VSAM file. The SMS Data Class can be used to control the
attributes of the data set being allocated.

VSAM Utility Build Alternate Index

The Build Alternate Index screen is used to build an alternate index file from the related
cluster.

--------- CA File Master Plus ----- Build Alternate Index ---------

COMMAND ===>

Component DSNs:
AIX cluster 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01'
Base cluster ===> ______________________________________________

To perform the Build Alternate Index function, the parameters required are the DSN of
the alternate index file, typed on the main VSAM Utility screen, and the DSN of the
cluster whose data is extracted to create the alternate index file typed on this screen.

IDCAMS control cards are generated according to the parameters you typed, and then
one of the following actions executes depending on the Execution Mode field in the
main VSAM Utility screen:
■ Invoke IDCAMS online to build the alternate index VSAM file
■ Generate and submit JCL to build the alternate index VSAM file in batch
■ Initiate an edit session using the generated JCL

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 167

VSAM Utility

Field Descriptions
Base Cluster
Type the DSN of the base cluster to which this Alternate Index file is related. To
facilitate selection of the desired DSN you can type any of the following syntaxes:
■ Wildcarded DSN containing an asterisk (*) or a percent sign (%) for unknown
characters of the DSN
■ D to request a directory of DSN Lists
■ D dddddd where 'dddddd' is the name of a DSN list

Rename Component
The Rename Component screen lets you rename VSAM as a specified component name
or all components in a cluster.

--------- CA File Master Plus ------- Rename Component ----------

COMMAND ===>

Current Component:
Access method KSDS
Component type CLUSTER
Cluster name 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01'
Data name 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01.DATA'
Index Name 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01.INDEX'

Updated Names:
Cluster ===> 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01'

Same update to data & index? ===> Y

There are three variations of the VSAM Rename Component screen depending on the
type of component being renamed and whether all DSNs of a cluster are to be renamed
in sync.
■ If the component being renamed is a cluster and the DSNs of the data and index
components are to be updated in sync with the cluster, then a screen opens that
lets you update the cluster name.
■ If the component being renamed is a cluster and the DSNs of the data and index
components are not to be updated in sync with the cluster, then a screen opens
that lets you update the cluster name, the data component name, and if applicable,
the index component name.
■ If the component being renamed is not a cluster, a screen appears that lets the one
component name be updated.

168 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

IDCAMS control cards are generated according to the parameters you typed, and then
one of the following actions executes depending on the Execution Mode field in the
main VSAM Utility screen:
■ Invoke IDCAMS online to change the component names
■ Generate and submit JCL to change the component names in batch
■ Initiate an edit session using the generated JCL

Field Descriptions
Current Component (Cluster Name Update that Applies to All Components)
When the component to be updated is a cluster and the DSNs of the data and index
component are equal to the cluster name with a qualifying node, the assumption is
made that you want to change the cluster name and have the data component and
if applicable, the index component change in sync with the cluster name. If that
assumption is correct, update the cluster, press Enter, and the cluster name is
updated and the data and index components receive the corresponding update to
the part of the DSN before the appended qualifying node. To separately specify the
updates to the component names, change the Same update to data & index? field
to N.
Updated Names (Update VSAM File Component Names Individually)
The DSNs of cluster, data, and index are to be updated independently when either
the DSNs of the data and index component are not equal to the cluster name with
an appended qualifying node or the user has updated the Same update to data &
index? field to N. In this case, a screen is presented that lets you update the DSNs of
the individual components.
Update Single Component Name — When the component to be updated is not a
cluster, a screen appears that lets you update that one component.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 169

VSAM Utility

Modify VSAM File

The Modify VSAM File screen is used to modify the allocation of a VSAM file by altering
VSAM allocation parameters related to free space, share options, buffer space,
processing options, expiration date, SMS class, and allocated volumes.

--------- CA File Master Plus ------- Modify VSAM File -----------

COMMAND ===>

Component DSNs:
Cluster 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01'
Data 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01.DATA'
Index 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01.INDEX'
Access method VSAM

Update Allocation Parameters: Update Allocated Volumes:

% Free CI & CA ===> 30 10 Data CAI002 ______ ______ ______
Share options ===> 2 3 Index CAI002 ______ ______ ______
Buffer space ===> 34816
Erase on delete? ===> N
Write check? ===> N
Inhibit update? ===> N
Expiration date ===>

SMS Class
Storage ===>
Management ===>

IDCAMS control cards are generated according to the parameters you typed, and then
one of the following actions executes depending on the Execution Mode field in the
main VSAM Utility screen:
■ Invoke IDCAMS online to modify the VSAM file
■ Generate and submit JCL to modify the VSAM file in batch
■ Initiate an edit session using the generated JCL

Field Descriptions
Update Allocation Parameters:
% Free CI & CA
CI – Type the amount of empty space to be left in each Control Interval when the
file is initially loaded. The free space lets records be inserted or expanded within a
Control Interval before requiring a Control Interval split.
CA – Type the percentage of Control Intervals to be left unused in each Control Area
as the file is initially loaded. The use of control area freespace lets some Control
Interval splits occur before requiring a Control Area split.

170 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Share options
Cross-region – Type a value of one-through-four to indicate how the file can be
shared among regions within the same system or within multiple systems using
GRS. The meaning of each value is as follows:
1. The data set can be opened for read processing by an unlimited number of
users, but the data set may be accessed by only one user when that user is
doing read and write processing.
2. The data set can be opened by only one user at a time for read and write
processing, but any number of users can also be accessing for read processing.
3. The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
4. The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. For each PUT request,
VSAM immediately updates the data set. For each GET request, all input
buffers are refreshed.
Cross-system – Type a value of 3 or 4 to indicate how the file can be shared among
systems. The meaning of each value is as follows:
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. For each PUT request,
VSAM immediately updates the data set. For each GET request, all input buffers are
refreshed.
Buffer space
This field is used to specify the minimum buffer space allocated when this VSAM file
is accessed.
Erase on delete?
Type Y for the Erase on Delete? option to request that the VSAM component
definition use the ERASE parameter causing all components of the file to be
overwritten with binary zeros when the VSAM file is deleted from the catalog. Type
N to have the VSAM component use the NOERASE parameter.
Write check?
Type Y for the Write check? option to request that the VSAM component definition
use the WRITECHECK parameter requesting each write to the VSAM file to be
validated by a read without data transfer. Type N to have the VSAM component use
the NOWRITECHECK parameter.
Inhibit update?
Type Y for the Inhibit Update? option to request that the VSAM component be
altered using the INHIBIT parameter causing the VSAM file to be accessible only for
read operations.
Changing the value of this field from 'Y' to 'N' causes the file to be altered using the
UNINHIBIT parameter which removes the restriction placed by a previous INHIBIT
parameter.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 171

VSAM Utility

Expiration date
If the VSAM cluster may be deleted after a certain date, type an Expiration Date in
CCYYMMDD format.
SMS Class
Storage
Update the one-to eight-position name of the SMS Storage Class to alter the VSAM
file to use the specified storage class. The storage class can be used to control the
storage hardware used for the data set.
Management
Update the one-to-eight-position name of the SMS Management Class to alter the
VSAM file to use the specified management class. You can use the SMS
Management Class to control data set characteristics related to the backup,
migration, and retention of the data set.
Update Allocated Volumes:
Data and Index
The Update Allocated Volumes section presents a list of the volumes allocated to
the data component and if applicable, the index component. To add more volumes
to the data or index component, type volume serials in the blank fields at the end of
the volume list. To delete or change volume serials allocated to a component, erase
or over-key the volume serial in the list. The volume serial of volumes that contains
records is protected and cannot be updated.

VSAM Utility – Define Path

The Define Path screen lets you define a VSAM path and use it to access a VSAM file
through an alternate index or to access a VSAM file using an alias.

---------------- CA File Master Plus – Define Path ---------------

COMMAND ===>

Path Name 'ABC.CIRCLE.KSDS01.PATH'

Alternate Index (or Cluster) Accessed via Path:

Name ===> ______________________________________________

Processing Option
Update AIXs ===> N

172 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

To access a VSAM KSDS or VSAM ESDS file through an alternate index, a path must be
defined. The DD statement used to access the VSAM file through an alternate index
refers to this path name as the DSN. A path must be defined for each alternate index
through which the base cluster is to be accessed.

When a program opens a path for processing, both the base cluster and the alternate
index are opened.

IDCAMS control cards are generated according to the parameters you typed, and then
one of the following actions executes depending on the Execution Mode field in the
main VSAM Utility screen:
■ Invoke IDCAMS online to define the VSAM path
■ Generate and submit JCL to define the VSAM path in batch
■ Initiate an edit session using the generated JCL

Field Descriptions

Alternate Index (or Cluster) Accessed via Path

Type the DSN of either an alternate index through which this path accesses a cluster
or the cluster for which this path is an alias.
Processing Opti–n - Update AIXs
Type Y for Yes or N for No to indicate whether the alternate index files for the
cluster being accessed through this path are to be allocated when the path is
opened for processing and updated to reflect changes in the data of the base
cluster. This parameter determines whether the path is defined using the UPDATE
parameter or the NOUPDATE parameter.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 173

VSAM Utility

Define VSAM File - Multiple Volumes

The Define VSAM File - Multiple Volumes screen is invoked when you type Y in the
Multiple Volumes? field while defining a VSAM file or an alternate index file. This screen
provides the opportunity to define the volumes to use for multivolume VSAM
components. If the volumes are SMS-controlled, type the number of volumes to be
allocated; otherwise, specify the volume serial of each volume to be allocated.

----- CA File Master Plus -- Define VSAM File - Multiple Volumes ----
COMMAND ===>

For SMS-Controlled Volume Allocation:

Number of data volumes ===> __

Number of index volumes ===> __

To Allocate to Specified Volumes:

Data volumes CAI002 ______ ______ ______ ______

______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______
______ ______ ______ ______ ______

______ ______ ______ ______ ______

Index volumes CAI002 ______ ______ ______ ______

There are two different versions of this screen. Both versions contain an area named
"To Allocate to Specified Volumes" in which you can list the volume serials for the
volumes to be allocated to the data and index components. If SMS class has been
defined for the definition of the VSAM file or alternate index file, the For
SMS-Controlled Volume Allocation screen section displays at the top of the screen to let
entries of a number of data volumes be allocated.

174 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Field Descriptions

For SMS-Controlled Volume Allocation:

When allocating volumes for VSAM components using SMS, the option of specifying
the number of volumes and letting SMS manage the selection of volume serials is
presented.
Number of data volumes – If SMS-Controlled Volume Allocation is needed, type the
number of data volumes.
Number of index volumes – If SMS-Controlled Volume Allocation is needed, type
the number of index volumes.
To Allocate to Specified Volumes:
Type the volume serial for each of the volumes to be allocated to the data and
index components of the VSAM file.
Data volumes – Type up to 50 volume serials for the data component
Index volumes – Type up to 5 volume serials for the index component

Data Set Information - VSAM KSDS

The Data Set Information – VSAM KSDS screen displays two pages of information about
the VSAM file definition, allocation parameters, record activity counts, activity dates,
and statistics about the definition and use of the data and index components of the file.

----------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Information - VSAM KSDS ----------

COMMAND ===>

Dataset Organization: VSAM KSDS (Key Sequence Dataset)

Cluster Name: USER.KSDS Volume
Data: USER.KSDS.DATA CAI001
Index: USER.KSDS.INDEX CAI001

Dataset Definition: Component Allocation: Data Index

Key Position 1 CISIZE 3584 3584
Key Length 3 Allocation Unit CYLS TRKS
Average record size 110 Primary 1 5
Maximum record size 110 Secondary 5 1
Share options 2,4 Extents used 1 1
Buffer space 10752 Allocation Parameters:
SMS Information: Load restartable NO
Storage class Write check NO
Data class Erase on delete NO
Management class Replicated index NO
Activity Dates: Reuse option NO
Creation date 2012/07/30 Spanned records NO
Expiration date

End to exit ENTER for more information about KSDS file

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 175

VSAM Utility

The first page of the display has the following six sections:
■ VSAM component DSNS and volumes
■ Data set definition parameters
■ SMS information
■ Activity dates
■ Data and index component allocation summary
■ Allocation parameters and options

The second page of the display contains the following types of information for the data
and index components of the VSAM KSDS file:
■ Component statistics
■ Record statistics

Data Set Organization: The top section of the Data Set Information – VSAM KSDS screen
contains the DSN of the cluster, data, and index components of the KSDS VSAM file. To
the right of the DSN of the data and index components is the volume serial of the first
volume for each of the components. If the component has multiple volumes defined,
the volume serial is followed by a plus sign (+). If the VSAM KSDS file is an alternate
index file, it is indicated by a message below the component DSNs.

Field Descriptions
Dataset Definition:
Key position
For KSDS VSAM files which are not alternate index files, Key Position contains the
position of the prime key within the base cluster. For alternate index files, Key
Position contains the position of the alternate key within the base cluster. The Key
Position field is displayed as a position and not as a displacement. For example, if
the key begins in the first position of the record, the value of Key Position is 1 not 0.
Key length
For KSDS VSAM files which are not alternate index files, Key Length contains the
length of the prime key within the base cluster. For alternate index files, Key Length
contains the length of the alternate key within the base cluster.
Average record size
The average length of data records.
Maximum record size
The maximum length for data records.

176 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Share options
Cross-Region – Type a value of one-through-four to indicate how the file can be
shared among regions within the same system or within multiple systems using GRS
(Global Resource Serialization). The meaning of each value is as follows:
1. The data set can be opened for read processing by an unlimited number of
users, but the data set may be accessed by only one user when that user is
doing read and write processing
2. The data set can be opened by only one user at a time for read and write
processing, but any number of users can also be accessing the data set for read
processing
3. The data set can be fully shared by any number of user
4. The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.

Cross-System – The second of the two numbers indicates how the file can be shared
among systems. The meaning of each value i
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
Buffer space
Contains the minimum buffer space to be allocated when this VSAM file is accessed.
SMS Information:
Storage Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Storage Class.
Data Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Data Class.
Management Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Management Class.
Activity Dates:
Creation date
Date in CCYY/MM/DD format when the VSAM file was allocated.
Expiration date
If an expiration date was specified to the VSAM allocation, this is the date in
CCYY/MM/DD after which the VSAM cluster may be deleted.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 177

VSAM Utility

Data & Index (component allocation summary)

CISIZE
The size of the Control Interval.
Allocaltion Unit
TRKS or CYLS to indicate whether the primary and secondary allocations are
allocated in tracks or cylinders.
Primary
The number of tracks or cylinders depending on the allocation units in the primary
allocation of each volume.
Secondary
Number of tracks or cylinders depending on the allocation units in each secondary
allocation of each volume.
Extents Used
Total number of extents used for VSAM file component.
Allocation Parameters:
Specifies whether the VSAM file was allocated with various parameters that effect
the functioning of the VSAM file.
Load restartable
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the RECOVERY parameter,
causing the data component to be preformatted previous to the initial load or the
SPEED parameter that does not. The use of the RECOVERY parameter causes the
initial load to take longer, but loads that do not complete successfully can be
restarted.
Write check
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the WRITECHECK parameter
requesting each write to the VSAM file to be validated by a read without data
transfer.
Erase on delete
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the ERASE parameter, causing
all components of the file to be overwritten with binary zeros, when the VSAM file
is deleted from the catalog.
Replicated index
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the REPLICATE parameter
requesting that the index records are replicated on a track as many times as it will
fit.

178 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Reuse option
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the REUSE parameter specifying
that the cluster can be opened again and again as a reusable cluster.
Spanned records
Indicates whether VSAM file was allocated with the SPANNED parameter indicating
that data records larger than a control interval will be allowed to span multiple
control intervals.

Data Set Information –2 - VSAM KSDS

The second page of the Data Set Information VSAM KSDS screen contains the following
types of information for the data and index components of the VSAM KSDS file:
■ Component statistics
■ Record statistics

---------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Info - VSAM KSDS - Page 2 ---------
COMMAND ===>
USER.KSDS

Component Statistics: Data Index Record Statistics:

CIs per CA 195 13 Total 24
Control Interval Splits 0 0 Deleted 4
Control Area Splits 0 0 Inserted 2
Freespace Percent - CI 0 0 Updated 111
Freespace Percent - CA 0 0 Retrieved 3,139
Total Freespace 695296 229376
High Allocated RBA 698880 232960
High Used RBA 698880 3584
Percent Free 99.5 98.5
Physical Record Size 3584 3584
Physical Record / Track 13 13
Tracks / Control Area 15 1

End to exit ENTER to return to previous screen

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 179

VSAM Utility

Field Descriptions
Component Statistics
CIs per CA
A Control Area is a contiguous area of DASD that ranges in size from one track to
one cylinder. Shows the number of Control Intervals in each Control Area.
Control Interval Splits
Total number of control interval splits occurring when a data record insert occurs
and there is not enough space in the control interval for the inserted record.
Control Area Splits
Total number of control interval splits occurring when a control interval split occurs
and there is not space for another control interval in the control area.
Freespace Percent CI
Control Interval free space is the percentage of empty space to be left in each
control interval when the file is initially loaded.
The free space lets records be inserted or expanded within a control interval before
requiring a control interval split.
Freespace Percent CA
Control Area free space is the percentage of control intervals to be left unused in
each control area as the file is initially loaded. The use of control area free space
lets some control interval splits occur before requiring a control area split.
Total Freespace
Amount of space allocated to the VSAM file that does not contain a control interval.
High Allocated RBA
The number of bytes of space being managed by the VSAM file.
High Used RBA
The highest byte number within a used control interval.
Percent Free
Free space as a percentage of the high used RBA.
Physical Record Size
The minimum amount of data that is transferred together which is at least one
control interval.
Physical Record / Track
Number of physical records in each DASD track.

180 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Tracks / Control Area

Number of tracks in each control area.
Record Statistics:
This section contains counts of the number of data records and the number of
times data records have been inserted, deleted, updated, and retrieved since the
initial load of the VSAM file. The following counts are displayed:
Total
The total number of records actually in the data or index component. This statistic
is not maintained when the data set is processed in control interval mode.
Deleted
The number of records that have been deleted from the data or index component.
Inserted
For a key-sequenced data set, the number of records that have been inserted into
the data component before the last record; records originally loaded and records
added to the end are not included in this statistic. For relative record data sets, it is
the number of records inserted into available slots; the number of records originally
loaded are included in this statistic.
Updated
The number of records that have been retrieved for update and rewritten. This
value does not reflect those records that were deleted, but a record that is updated
and deleted is counted in the update statistics.
Retrieved
The number of records that have been retrieved from the data or index component,
whether for update or not for update.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 181

VSAM Utility

Data Set Information - VSAM ESDS

The VSAM ESDS Data Set Information screen displays two pages of information about
the VSAM file definition, allocation parameters, record activity counts, activity dates,
and statistics about the definition and use of the data component of the file.

------ CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Information - VSAM ESDS ----

COMMAND ===>

Dataset Organization: VSAM ESDS (Entry Sequence Dataset)

Cluster Name: ABC.CIRCLE.ESDS01 Volume
Data: ABC.CIRCLE.ESDS01.DATA CAI001

Dataset Definition: Component Allocation:

Average record size 80 CISIZE 5632
Maximum record size 80 Allocation Unit TRKS
Share options 2,3 Primary 5
Buffer space 16384 Secondary 1
SMS Information: Extents used 1
Storage class Allocation Parameters:
Data class Load restartable NO
Management class Write check NO
Activity Dates: Erase on delete NO
Creation date 2005/09/22 Reuse option NO
Expiration date Spanned records NO

End to exit ENTER for more information about ESDS file

The top section of the Data Set Information – VSAM ESDS screen contains the DSN of
the cluster and data components of the ESDS VSAM file. To the right of the DSN of the
data component is the volume serial of the first volume. If the data component has
multiple volumes defined, the volume serial is followed by a plus sign (+).

Field Descriptions
Dataset Definition:
Average record size
The average length of data records.
Maximum record size
The maximum length for data records.

182 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Share options
Cross-Region – The first of the two numbers displayed is the Cross-Region Share
Option. The meaning of each value is:
1
The data set can be opened for read processing by an unlimited number of
users, but the data set can be accessed by only one user when that user is
doing read and write processing.
2
The data set can be opened by only one user at a time for read and write
processing, but any number of users can also be accessing for read processing.
3
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
4
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
The second of the two numbers is the Cross-System Share Option. Values are:
3
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
4
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
Buffer space
Contains the minimum buffer space to be allocated when this VSAM file is accessed.
SMS Information:
Storage Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Storage Class.
Data Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Data Class.
Management Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Management Class.
Activity Dates
Displays the following date fields related to the VSAM file.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 183

VSAM Utility

Creation date
Date in CCYY/MM/DD format when the VSAM file was allocated.
Expiration date
If an expiration date was specified to the VSAM allocation, this is the date in
CCYY/MM/DD after which the VSAM cluster may be deleted.
Component Allocation:
Control Interval size
The size of the control interval.
Allocation unit
TRKS or CYLS to indicate whether the primary and secondary allocations are
allocated in tracks or cylinders.
Primary allocation
The number of tracks or cylinders (depending on the allocation units) in the primary
allocation of each volume.
Secondary allocation
Number of tracks or cylinders (depending on the allocation units) in each secondary
allocation of each volume.
Extents Used
Total number of extents used for VSAM file component.
Allocation Parameters
This area tells whether the VSAM file was allocated with various parameters that
effect the functioning of the VSAM file.
Load restartable
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the RECOVERY parameter,
causing the data component to be preformatted previous to the initial load, or the
SPEED parameter that does not. The use of the RECOVERY parameter causes the
initial load to take longer, but loads that do not complete successfully can be
restarted.
Write check
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the WRITECHECK parameter
requesting each write to the VSAM file to be validated by a read without data
transfer.
Erase on delete
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the ERASE parameter causing
all components of the file to be overwritten with binary zeros when the VSAM file is
deleted from the catalog.

184 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Reuse option
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the REUSE parameter specifying
that the cluster can be opened again and again as a reusable cluster.
Spanned records
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the SPANNED parameter
indicating that data records larger than a control interval are allowed to span
multiple control intervals.

Data Set Information #2 - VSAM ESDS

The second page of the Data Set Information – VSAM ESDS screen contains the
following types of information for the data component of the VSAM ESDS file:
■ Component statistics
■ Record statistics

----- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Info - VSAM ESDS - Page 2 ----
COMMAND ===>
ABC.CIRCLE.ESDS01

Component Statistics: Record Statistics:

CIs per CA 9 Total 34
Total Freespace 247808 Deleted 0
High Allocated RBA 253440 Inserted 0
High Used RBA 5632 Updated 0
Percent Free 97.8 Retrieved 0
Physical Record Size 5632
Physical Record / Track 9
Tracks / Control Area 1

End to exit ENTER to return to previous screen

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 185

VSAM Utility

Field Descriptions
Component Statistics
CIs per CA
A Control Area is a contiguous area of DASD that ranges in size from one track to
one cylinder. Displays the number of Control Intervals in each Control Area.
Total Freespace
Amount of space allocated to the VSAM file that does not contain a Control
Interval.
High Allocated RBA
The number of bytes of space being managed by the VSAM file.
High Used RBA
The highest byte number within a used Control Interval.
Percent Free
Free space as a percentage of the high used RB.
Physical Record Size
The minimum amount of data that is transferred together which is at least one
Control Interval.
Physical Record / Track
Number of physical records in each DASD track.
Tracks / Control Area
Number of tracks in each Control Area.
Record Statistics:
This section contains counts of the number of data records and the number of
times data records have been inserted, deleted, updated, and retrieved since the
initial load of the VSAM file. The following counts are displayed:
Total
The total number of records actually in the data or index component. This statistic
is not maintained when the data set is processed in control interval mode.
Deleted
The number of records that have been deleted from the data or index component.
Inserted
For a key-sequenced data set, the number of records that have been inserted into
the data component before the last record; records originally loaded and records
added to the end are not included in this statistic. For relative record data sets, it is
the number of records inserted into available slots; the number of records originally
loaded are included in this statistic.

186 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Updated
The number of records that have been retrieved for update and rewritten. This
value does not reflect those records that were deleted, but a record that is updated
and deleted is counted in the update statistics.
Retrieved
The number of records that have been retrieved from the data or index component,
whether for update or not for update.

Data Set Information – VSAM RRDS

The Data Set Information – VSAM RRDS screen displays two pages of information about
the VSAM file definition, allocation parameters, record activity counts, activity dates,
and statistics about the definition and use of the data component of the file.

----------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Information - VSAM RRDS ----------

COMMAND ===>

Dataset Organization: VSAM RRDS (Relative Record Dataset)

Cluster Name: ABC.CIRCLE.RRDS01 Volume
Data: ABC.CIRCLE.RRDS01.DA CAI001

Dataset Definition: Component Allocation:

Record size 505 CISIZE 512
Share options 4,3 Allocation Unit TRKS
Buffer space 1024 Primary 1
SMS Information: Secondary 0
Storage class Extents used 1
Data class Allocation Parameters:
Management class Load restartable NO
Activity Dates: Write check NO
Creation date 2003/08/21 Erase on delete NO
Expiration date Reuse option NO

End to exit ENTER for more information about RRDS file

The top section of the Data Set Information – VSAM RRDS screen contains the DSN of
the cluster and data components of the RRDS VSAM file. To the right of the DSN of the
data component is the volume serial of the first volume. If the component has multiple
volumes defined, the volume serial is followed by a plus sign (+).

Field Descriptions
Data Set Definition
Record size
The length of each of the data records.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 187

VSAM Utility

Share options
Cross-Region – Type a value of one-through-four to indicate how the file can be
shared among regions within the same system or within multiple systems using GRS
(Global Resource Serialization). The meaning of each value is as follows:
1
The data set can be opened for read processing by an unlimited number of
users, but the data set can be accessed by only one user when that user is
doing read and write processing.
2
The data set can be opened by only one user at a time for read and write
processing, but any number of users can also be accessing for read processing.
3
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
4
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
Cross-System – The second of the two numbers displayed. The meaning of each
value is:
3
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
4
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
Buffer space
Contains the minimum buffer space to be allocated when this VSAM file is accessed.
SMS Information:
Storage Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Storage Class.
Data Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Data Class.
Management Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Management Class.

188 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Activity Dates:
Creation date
Date in CCYY/MM/DD format when the VSAM file was allocated.
Expiration date
If an expiration date was specified to the VSAM allocation, this is the date in
CCYY/MM/DD after which the VSAM cluster can be deleted.
Control Interval Size
The size of the Control Interval.
Allocation Unit
TRKS or CYLS indicating whether the primary and secondary allocations are
allocated in tracks or cylinders.
Primary Allocation
The number of tracks or cylinders, depending on the allocation units, in the primary
allocation of each volume.
Secondary Allocation
Number of tracks or cylinders, depending on the allocation units, in each secondary
allocation of each volume.
Extents Used
Total number of extents used for the VSAM file component.
Allocation Parameters:
Specifies whether the VSAM file was allocated with various parameters that effect
the functioning of the VSAM file.
Load restartable
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the RECOVERY parameter,
causing the data component to be preformatted previous to the initial load, or the
SPEED parameter which does not. The use of the RECOVERY parameter causes the
initial load to take longer, but loads that do not complete successfully can be
restarted.
Write check
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the WRITECHECK parameter
requesting each write to the VSAM file to be validated by a read without data
transfer.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 189

VSAM Utility

Erase on delete
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the ERASE parameter, causing
all components of the file to be overwritten with binary zeros, when the VSAM file
is deleted from the catalog.
Reuse option
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the REUSE parameter specifying
that the cluster can be opened again and again as a reusable cluster.

Data Set Information #2 - VSAM RRDS

The second page of the Data Set Information – VSAM RRDS screen contains the
following types of information for the data component of the VSAM RRDS file:
■ Component statistics
■ Record statistics

---------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Info - VSAM RRDS - Page 2 ---------
COMMAND ===>
AD1DEV.MOORO10.RRDS

Component Statistics: Record Statistics:

CIs per CA 49 Total 0
Total Freespace 25088 Actual 0
High Allocated RBA 25088 Deleted 0
High Used RBA 0 Inserted 0
Percent Free 100.0 Updated 0
Physical Record Size 512 Retrieved 0
Physical Record / Track 49
Tracks / Control Area 1

End to exit ENTER to return to previous screen

190 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Field Description
Component Statistics
CIs per CA
A control area is a contiguous area of DASD that ranges in size from one track to
one cylinder. This display tells the number of Control Intervals in each Control Area.
Total Freespace
Amount of space allocated to the VSAM file that does not contain a Control
Intervals.
High Allocated RBA
The number of bytes of space being managed by the VSAM file.
High Used RBA
The highest byte number within a used control interval.
Percent Free
Free space as a percentage of the high used RBA.
Physical Record Size
The minimum amount of data that is transferred together which is at least one
Control Interval.
Physical Record / Track
Number of physical records in each DASD track.
Tracks / Control Area
Number of tracks in each Control Area.
Record Statistics:
This section contains counts of the number of data records and the number of
times data records have been inserted, deleted, updated, and retrieved since the
initial load of the VSAM file. The following counts are displayed:
Total
The total number of records actually in the data component. This statistic is not
maintained when the data set is processed in control interval mode. For RRDS files,
this is the count of slots in the data set.
Actual
The actual count of records in the data set.
Deleted
The number of records that have been deleted from the data component.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 191

VSAM Utility

Inserted
For a key-sequenced data set, the number of records that have been inserted into
the data component before the last record; records originally loaded and records
added to the end are not included in this statistic. For relative record data sets, it is
the number of records inserted into available slots; the number of records originally
loaded are included in this statistic.
Updated
The number of records that have been retrieved for update and rewritten. This
value does not reflect those records that were deleted, but a record that is updated
and deleted is counted in the update statistics.
Retrieved
The number of records that have been retrieved from the data component,
whether for update or not for update.

Data Set Information - VSAM Variable-Length RRDS

The Data Set Information – VSAM VRRDS (Variable-Length RRDS) screen displays two
pages of information about the VSAM file definition, allocation parameters, record
activity counts, activity dates, and statistics about the definition and use of the data and
index components of the file.

---------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Information - VSAM VRRDS ----------

COMMAND ===>

Dataset Organization: VSAM VRRDS (Variable-Length Relative Record Dataset)

Cluster Name: ABC.TEST.VRRDS03 Volume
Data: ABC.TEST.VRRDS03.DATA CAI001
Index: ABC.TEST.VRRDS03.INDEX CAI001

Dataset Definition: Component Allocation: Data Index

Average record size 58 CISIZE 2048 3072
Maximum record size 108 Allocation Unit CYLS TRKS
Share options 2,3 Primary 1 1
Buffer space 7168 Secondary 1 1
SMS Information: Extents used 1 1
Storage class Allocation Parameters:
Data class Load restartable NO
Management class Write check NO
Activity Dates: Erase on delete NO
Creation date 2012/05/21 Replicated index NO
Expiration date Reuse option NO
Spanned records NO

End to exit ENTER for more information about RRDS file

192 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

The top section of the VSAM Variable-Length RRDS Data Set Information Screen
contains the DSN of the cluster, data, and index components of the Variable-Length
RRDS VSAM file. To the right of the DSN of the data and index components is the
volume serial of the first volume for each of the components. If the component has
multiple volumes defined, the volume serial is followed by a plus sign (+).

Field Descriptions
Data Set Definition:
Average record size
The average length of data records.
Maximum record size
The maximum length for data records.
Share options
Cross-Region – The first of the two numbers displayed that indicates how the file
can be shared among regions within the same system or within multiple systems
using GRS. The meaning of each value is:
1. The data set can be opened for read processing by an unlimited number of
users, but the data set can be accessed by only one user when that user is
doing read and write processing.
2. The data set can be opened by only one user at a time for read and write
processing, but any number of users can also be accessing for read processing.
3. The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
4. The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
Cross-System – The second of the two numbers that indicates how the file can be
shared among systems. The meaning of each value is:
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
Buffer space
Contains the minimum buffer space to be allocated when this VSAM file is accessed.
SMS Information:
Storage Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Storage Class.
Data Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Data Class.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 193

VSAM Utility

Management Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Management Class.
Activity Dates:
Creation date
Date in CCYY/MM/DD format when the VSAM file was allocated.
Expiration date
If an expiration date was specified to the VSAM allocation, this is the date in
CCYY/MM/DD after which the VSAM cluster may be deleted.
Data & Index (Component Allocation Summary):
CISIZE
The size of the control interval.
Unit
TRKS or CYLS to indicate whether the primary and secondary allocations are
allocated in tracks or cylinders.
Prim
The number of tracks or cylinders, depending on the allocation units, in the primary
allocation of each volume.
Sec
Number of tracks or cylinders, depending on the allocation units, in each secondary
allocation of each volume.
Extents Used
Total number of extents used for VSAM file component.
Allocation Parameters:
Specifies whether the VSAM file was allocated with various parameters that effect
the functioning of the VSAM file.
Load restartable
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the RECOVERY parameter
causing the data component to be preformatted previous to the initial load or the
SPEED parameter that does not. The use of the RECOVERY parameter causes the
initial load to take longer, but loads that do not complete successfully can be
restarted.
Write check
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the WRITECHECK parameter
that requests each write to the VSAM file to be validated by a read without data
transfer.

194 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Erase on delete
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the ERASE parameter which
causes all components of the file to be overwritten with binary zeros when the
VSAM file is deleted from the catalog
Replicated index
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the REPLICATE parameter which
requests that the index records are replicated on a track as many times as it will fit.
Reuse option
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the REUSE parameter specifying
that the cluster can be opened again and again as a reusable cluster.
Spanned records
Indicates whether VSAM file was allocated with the SPANNED parameter indicating
that data records larger than a control interval are allowed to span multiple Control
Intervals.

Data Set Information #2 - VSAM Variable-Length RRDS

The second page of the Data Set Information – VSAM VRRDS (Variable-Length RRDS)
screen contains the following types of information for the data and index components
of the VSAM VRRDS file:
■ Component statistics
■ Record statistics

--------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Info - VSAM VRRDS - Page 2 ---------
COMMAND ===>
ABC.TEST.VRRDS03

Component Statistics: Data Index Record Statistics:

CIs per CA 315 15 Total 40
Control Interval Splits 0 0 Deleted 0
Control Area Splits 0 0 Inserted 0
Freespace Percent - CI 0 0 Updated 0
Freespace Percent - CA 0 0 Retrieved 0
Total Freespace 641024 43008
High Allocated RBA 645120 46080
High Used RBA 645120 3072
Percent Free 99.4 93.3
Physical Record Size 2048 3072
Physical Record / Track 21 15
Tracks / Control Area 15 1

End to exit ENTER to return to previous screen

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 195

VSAM Utility

Field Descriptions
Component Statistics
CIs per CA
A control area is a contiguous area of DASD that ranges in size from one track to
one cylinder. This display tells the number of Control Intervals in each Control Area.
Control Interval Splits
Total number of control interval splits that occurs when a data record insert occurs
and there is not enough space in the control interval for the inserted record.
Control Area Splits
Total number of Control Area splits that occur when a Control Interval split occurs
and there is not space for another Control Interval in the Control Area.
Freespace Percent – CI
Control Interval free space is the percentage of empty space to be left in each
Control Interval when the file is initially loaded.
The free space lets records be inserted or expanded within a Control Interval before
requiring a Control Interval split.
Freespace Percent – CA
Control Area free space is the percentage of Control Intervals to be left unused in
each Control Area as the file is initially loaded. The use of Control Area free space
lets some Control Interval splits occur before requiring a Control Area split.
Total Freespace
Amount of space allocated to the VSAM file that does not contain a Control
Interval.
High Allocated RBA
The number of bytes of space being managed by the VSAM file.
High Used RBA
The highest byte number within a used Control Interval.
Percent Free
Freespace as a percentage of the high used RBA.
Physical Record Size
The minimum amount of data that is transferred together (which is at least one
Control Interval).
Physical Record / Track
Number of physical records in each DASD track.

196 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Tracks / Control Area

Number of tracks in each Control Area.
Record Statistics
This section contains counts of the number of data records and the number of
times data records have been inserted, deleted, updated, and retrieved since the
initial load of the VSAM file. The following counts are displayed:
Total
The total number of records actually in the data or index component. This statistic
is not maintained when the data set is processed in control interval mode.
Deleted
The number of records that have been deleted from the data or index component.
Inserted
For a key-sequenced data set, the number of records that have been inserted into
the data component before the last record; records originally loaded and records
added to the end are not included in this statistic. For relative record data sets, it is
the number of records inserted into available slots; the number of records originally
loaded are included in this statistic.
Updated
The number of records that have been retrieved for update and rewritten. This
value does not reflect those records that were deleted, but a record that is updated
and deleted is counted in the update statistics.
Retrieved
The number of records that have been retrieved from the data or index component,
whether for update or not for update.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 197

VSAM Utility

Data Set Information – VSAM Linear Data Set

The Data Set Information – VSAM LDS (Linear Data Set) screen displays information
about the VSAM file definition, allocation parameters, record activity counts, activity
dates, and statistics about the definition and use of the data component of the file.

----------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Information - VSAM LDS -----------

COMMAND ===>

Dataset Organization: VSAM LDS (Linear Dataset)

Cluster Name: ABC.TEST.LINEAR Volume
Data: ABC.TEST.LINEAR.DATA CAI001+

Dataset Definition: Component Allocation:

Share options 2,3 CISIZE 4096
Buffer space 8192 Allocation Unit TRKS
SMS Information: Primary 5
Storage class Secondary 10
Data class Extents used 1
Management class Allocation Parameters:
Activity Dates: Load restartable NO
Creation date 2012/05/22 Write check NO
Expiration date Erase on delete NO
Reuse option NO

End to exit ENTER for more information about LDS file

The top section of the Data Set Information – VSAM LDS screen contains the DSN of the
cluster and data components of the Linear Data Set VSAM file. To the right of the DSN of
the data component is the volume serial of the first volume. If the component has
multiple volumes defined, the volume serial will be followed by a plus sign (+).

Field Descriptions
Data Set Definition:
Share options
Cross-Region – The first of the two numbers displayed that indicates how the file
can be shared among regions within the same system or within multiple systems
using GRS. The meaning of each value is:
1. The data set can be opened for read processing by an unlimited number of
users, but the data set can be accessed by only one user when that user is
doing read and write processing.
2. The data set can be opened by only one user at a time for read and write
processing, but any number of users can also be accessing for read processing.

198 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

3. The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.

4. The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
Cross-System – The second of the two numbers that indicates how the file can be
shared among systems. The meaning of each value is:
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users.
The data set can be fully shared by any number of users. VSAM immediately
updates the data set for PUTs and refreshes all input buffers for GETs.
Buffer space
Contains the minimum buffer space to be allocated when this VSAM file is accessed.
SMS Information:
Storage Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Storage Class.
Data Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Data Class.
Management Class
When the VSAM file is SMS managed this field displays its SMS Management Class.
Activity Dates:
Creation date
Date in CCYY/MM/DD format when the VSAM file was allocated.
Expiration date
If an expiration date was specified to the VSAM allocation, this is the date in
CCYY/MM/DD after which the VSAM cluster can be deleted.
Component Allocation:
Control Interval size
The size of the control interval.
Allocation unit
'TRKS' or 'CYLS' to indicate whether the primary and secondary allocations are
allocated in tracks or cylinders.
Primary allocation
The number of tracks or cylinders, depending on the allocation units, in the primary
allocation of each volume.
Secondary allocation
The number of tracks or cylinders, depending on the allocation units, in each
secondary allocation of each volume.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 199

VSAM Utility

Extents Used
Total number of extents used for VSAM file component.
Allocation Parameters:
Specifies whether the VSAM file was allocated with various parameters that effect
the functioning of the VSAM file.
Load restartable
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the RECOVERY parameter
causing the data component to be preformatted previous to the initial load, or the
SPEED parameter which does not. The use of the RECOVERY parameter causes the
initial load to take longer, but loads that do not complete successfully can be
restarted.
Write check
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the WRITECHECK parameter
which requests each write to the VSAM file to be validated by a read without data
transfer.
Erase on delete
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the ERASE parameter which
causes all components of the file to be overwritten with binary zeros when the
VSAM file is deleted from the catalog.
Reuse option
Indicates whether the VSAM file was allocated with the REUSE parameter that
specifies the cluster can be opened again and again as a reusable cluster.

200 ISPF User Guide

VSAM Utility

Data Set Information –2 - VSAM Linear Data Set

The second page of the Data Set Information – VSAM LDS (Linear Data Set) screen
contains the following types of information for the data component of the Linear Data
Set VSAM file:
■ Component statistics
■ Record statistics

---- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Info - VSAM LDS - Page 2 ----
COMMAND ===>
ABC.TEST.LINEAR

Component Statistics: Record Statistics:

CIs per CA 60 Total 0
Total Freespace 0 Deleted 0
High Allocated RBA 245760 Inserted 0
High Used RBA 0 Updated 0
Percent Free 100.0 Retrieved 0
Physical Record Size 4096
Physical Record / Track 12
Tracks / Control Area 5

End to exit ENTER to return to previous screen

Field Descriptions
Component Statistics
CIs per CA
A control area is a contiguous area of DASD that ranges in size from one track to
one cylinder. Displays the number of Control Intervals in each Control Area.
Total Freespace
Amount of space allocated to the VSAM file which does not contain a control
interval.
High Allocated RBA
The number of bytes of space being managed by the VSAM file.
High Used RBA
The highest byte number within a used control interval.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 201

VSAM Utility

Percent Free
Freespace as a percentage of the high used RBA.
Physical Record Size
The minimum amount of data that is transferred together which is at least one
control interval.
Physical Record / Track
Number of physical records in each DASD track.
Tracks / Control Area
Number of tracks in each control area.
Record Statistics
This section contains counts of the number of data records and the number of
times data records have been inserted, deleted, updated, and retrieved since the
initial load of the VSAM file. The following counts are displayed:
Total
The total number of records actually in the data component. This statistic is not
maintained when the data set is processed in control interval mode.
Deleted
The number of records that have been deleted from the data component.
Inserted
For a key-sequenced data set, the number of records that have been inserted into
the data component before the last record; records originally loaded and records
added to the end are not included in this statistic. For relative record data sets, it is
the number of records inserted into available slots; the number of records originally
loaded are included in this statistic.
Updated
The number of records that have been retrieved for update and rewritten. This
value does not reflect those records that were deleted, but a record that is updated
and deleted is counted in the update statistics.
Retrieved
The number of records that have been retrieved from the data component,
whether for update or not for update.

202 ISPF User Guide

Search Utility

Search Utility
The Search utility screen is used to locate records within a data set that match specified
selection criteria.

------------------------ CA File Master Plus -- Search -----------------------

COMMAND ===>

Specify Dataset to Search:

Dataset name ===>
Member name ===> ('*' = all members, blank/wildcard = mem list)
Volume serial ===> (If dataset not cataloged)

Record Layout:
Layout dataset ===>
Layout member ===>

Search / Preview Dataset (optional)

Dataset name ===>

Selection Criteria below or Selection Criteria Member ===>

===>
===>
===>

The Search utility is used to search supported data sets for specified selection criteria.
The Search utility supports VSAM, sequential, PDS and PDSE data sets. The online search
and display of records from multiple PDS members makes the functions particularly
helpful for searching partitioned data sets.

Search File/Members
The Search function performs the search online and writes the results to a temporary
sequential file or to a sequential file specified in the Search/Preview data set name field.
When the search is complete, a CA File Master Plus Browse session displays all records
that matched the selection criteria. Records found in each member will be preceded by
a member name heading if multiple members of a PDS are searched. The Search
function cannot be executed in batch mode.

Field Descriptions
Dataset to Search
Data set name
Type the data set name of the file to be searched. This file can be a sequential file,
partitioned data set, or VSAM file.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 203

Search Utility

Member name
When the input file is partitioned, one may leave the member name blank or type a
wildcarded specification to get a list of all members that match the wildcard
member name plus any additional MEMBER selection criteria that was specified.
Once the member list is displayed, one or more members can be selected for
processing or additional MEMBER selection criteria can be specified.
If an '*' is specified, the member list is not displayed and all members in the data
set or members that match any additional MEMBER selection criteria are
immediately searched.
Volume serial
If the input data set to the search function is uncataloged, you must type the
volume serial of the volume on which the data set resides.
Record Layout
Layout dataset
Type the data set name of the Record Description Copy Library member that
describes the file to be searched. You can also type a wildcarded DSN to request a
list of data sets from which you can select the desired data set. This field is required
when using the LAYOUT primary command.
Layout member
Type the Member Name of the Record Description Copy Member that describes the
input file.
Leave this field blank to receive a directory of the members in the Layout data set.
You can also type a wildcarded member name to receive a directory of members
that match that wildcard.
Specify the LAYOUT command on this panel when you specify a layout data set and
member and you also want to dynamically build the selection criteria by
Field-Names defined in the record layout.
Dataset name
The Search Preview data set name is optional and when specified is used as an
output data set by the search function.
With Search, this data set will contain all records that matched the specified search
criteria.
If a DSN is specified, it will be deleted and re-allocated with the appropriate
characteristics required to hold the records from the "Search data set." Upon
completion of the function, a File Master Plus Browse screen is displayed showing
the records that matched the search criteria.
If a DSN is not specified, a temporary data set will be allocated.

204 ISPF User Guide

Search Utility

Selection criteria below or Selection criteria member

Selection criteria are used to restrict your view to certain members or records
based on the following types of parameters:
■ A condition that evaluates data values in each record or member
■ Presence of a character string within a library member, record, or specified
columns
■ Specification of the first record displayed based on relative record number,
VSAM key, or VSAM RBA
■ Limit to the number of records displayed
For a complete explanation of selection criteria and examples of valid syntax,
see the chapter "Filters."
Use a cataloged selection criteria parameter member that has been defined using
CA File Master Plus Option 0.3.
Use the primary command LAYOUT.

Search Utility Member Directory

When a blank member name or a wildcarded member name is specified in the Search
utility sub-menu, a partitioned data set member list displays in response to a
wildcarded or blank member name field. If the member selection criteria were specified
in the Selection Criteria, the list of members reflects only those members that matched
any wildcard in the member name field and contained records that matched the
specified selection criteria

CA File Master Plus -- SEARCH 'ABC.WORKPDS3' ---------- ----- Row 1 of 15

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S Member Msg Size Created Changed ID

_ ABCD 3 2012/01/29 2012/05/04 15:38:09 TECH
_ ABNAMRO 55 2003/09/17 2008/05/19 13:54:38 TECH
_ ABSTRACT 19 2000/07/05 2004/07/27 17:01:00 TECH
_ ACCQMOD 19 2005/10/26 2005/10/26 14:26:59 TECH
_ ACCQTHST 24 2005/10/26 2005/10/26 13:03:09 TECH
_ ACCQTOTS 63 2001/12/19 2005/11/11 14:54:41 TECH
_ ACCUM2 91 2002/07/22 2002/07/22 13:41:20 TECH
_ AIX 29 2003/04/15 2003/04/15 12:02:16 TECH
_ ALDP0SFB
_ ALLOCATE 39 2001/10/26 2008/05/19 13:55:18 TECH
_ APFFM 9 2003/06/03 2004/06/10 16:41:53 TECH
_ APFTP 5 2003/05/01 2003/06/02 08:36:35 TECH
_ ART3 16 2004/07/27 2012/07/30 15:07:10 TECH
_ ASM 32 2002/03/04 2002/08/19 10:27:44 TECH
_ AXYZ 3 2004/02/19 2012/07/30 15:07:10 TECH
***************************** End of Member List ******************************

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 205

Search Utility

Each line item contains the following fields for each data set.
■ Msg – informative message reflecting the action taken on the member
■ Size – number of records within the member
■ Created – the date the member was created
■ Changed – the date and time of the last update to the member
■ ID – the userid associated with the last update or creation of the member

Primary commands supported by the Search Utility Member Directory are as follows:
LOCATE | L
This command, followed by a value, positions to the first member directory entry
whose sort sequence field is greater than or equal to the specified value. For
example, when the directory list is sorted by the Name column, the L ABC positions
the member list to the first member in the list whose member name is greater than
or equal to the name ABC.
MEMBER
This command followed by valid selection criteria can be used to specify additional
member selection criteria. Using this command format reduces the current member
list to only those members that contain records that match the specified selection
criteria. Successive MEMBER commands can be used to continually reduce the
current member list. For example, MEMBER 'ABC' reduces the member list to only
those members that contain the characters ABC in one of their records. A
subsequent MEMBER 'XYZ' command reduces the member list to only those
members that contain the characters ABC and XYZ.
SORT
Sorts the directory by any of the columns in the directory when you type SORT XXX
or SORT XXX Y where 'XXX' is one of the column literals and 'Y' is 'A' for ascending or
'D' for descending. For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory in descending
order of Created Date and SORT ID A sorts the directory in ascending order of User
ID.
S member
Selects a member from the data set for processing. The member does not have to
be in the current member list to be selected. The member can be a generic
member name such as 'A*' which will select all members whose name starts with
the letter 'A', or '*' which will select all members from the directory.

Field Descriptions
Line Item Action Ind
The valid value for the Line Item Action Indicator is 'S' to select the member to be
processed.

206 ISPF User Guide

Update Utility

Update Utility
Use the Update Utility screen to locate and change records within a data set that match
specified selection criteria.

----------------------- CA File Master Plus -- Update -----------------------

COMMAND ===>

Specify Dataset to Update:

Dataset name ===>
Member name ===> ('*' = all members, blank/wildcard = mem list)
Volume serial ===> (If dataset not cataloged)

Update / Preview Dataset (optional):

Dataset name ===>

Update Parameters:
Preview before update? ===> N Y= Preview updates (Online only)
Input Format JCL ===> N Y= Maintain JCL Syntax for updates
Execution mode ===> E O=Online S=Submit JCL E=Edit JCL

Record Layout:
Layout dataset ===>
Layout member ===>

Selection Criteria below or Selection Criteria Member ===>

===>
===>
===>

Use the Update utility to update supported data sets for specified selection criteria. The
Update utility supports VSAM, sequential, PDS and PDSE data sets. The online update
and display of records from multiple PDS members makes the functions particularly
helpful updating partitioned data sets.

Update File/Members
The Update function performs the update online or in batch. It displays a pop-up panel
where you can specify from 1 to 4 from and to character strings for the update function.
The Update function provides the Preview Before Update parameter that displays the
update results without actually making the changes to the Update data set, and the
Input Format JCL parameter maintains JCL syntax integrity when updating partitioned
data sets that contain JCL.

You can also specify the updates by field-name. In this case, after pressing Enter, the
Update Fields panel is displays. You may type your from and to data directly from this
panel.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 207

Update Utility

All updates are made directly to the Update data set unless Preview Before Update is
set to Y. Record lengths are not modified nor is data shifted left or right if the from and
to strings are unequal in length, unless the Input Format L option is set to Y. In this case,
data may be shifted left or right and if necessary moved to a new (continued) JCL
statement.

Field Descriptions
Update Dataset
Dataset name
Type the DSN of the file to be updated. This file can be a sequential file, partitioned
data set, or VSAM file.
Member name
When the input file is partitioned, you may leave the member name blank or type a
wildcarded specification to get a list of all members that match the wildcard
member name plus any additional MEMBER selection criteria that was specified.
Once the member list is displayed, you can select one or more members for
processing or specify additional MEMBER selection criteria.
If you specify an *, the member list does not display and all members in the data set
or members that match any additional MEMBER selection criteria will be
immediately searched or updated.
Volume serial
If the input data set to the updated is uncataloged, you must type the volume serial
of the volume on which the data set resides.
Update / Preview Data Set
Data set name
The Update Preview data set name is optional and when specified is used as an
output data set by the update function when Preview for Update is specified.
When you request an update function and the Preview for Update option is also
specified, this data set will contain the updated records.
If you specify a DSN, it will be deleted and re-allocated with the appropriate
characteristics required to hold the records from the Update data set. Upon
completion of the function, a Browse screen displays showing the records that
matched the search or update criteria.
If you do not specify a DSN, a temporary data set will be allocated.

208 ISPF User Guide

Update Utility

Update Parameters
Preview Before Update
If you specify Preview Before Update, all updated records are written to the
Update/Preview data set instead of the Update data set. No modifications are
made to the Update data set. If Preview Before Update is performed for multiple
members of a partitioned data set, the updated records will be preceded by a
display of the member name. Preview Before Update can only be executed in online
mode.
If Preview Before Update is not specified, updates are made directly to the Update
data set.
Input Format JCL
This parameter is only valid for partitioned, fixed block, 80 byte records data sets.
When you specify Y, the update function will maintain JCL formatting when making
changes to a JCL record. JCL formatting is maintained by applying appropriate rules
when updating from and to strings of unequal lengths so the updates do not cause
JCL errors.
If the to character string is shorter than the from character string, data is shifted to
the left until two consecutive spaces/blanks are found, then padded with
spaces/blanks. If the to character string is longer than the from string and there are
not enough consecutive blanks to accommodate the difference, a new (continued)
JCL record will be inserted with one or more JCL parameters from updated JCL
statement.
Execution Mode
The execution mode field is for the Update function and indicates whether to
perform one of the following:
O—perform the update function online
S—create and submit JCL to perform the update function in batch
E—create and edit JCL to perform the update function in batch.
If you specify Preview before Update, execution mode must be O.
Record Layout
Layout data set
Type the DSN of the Record Description Copy Library member that describes the file
to be searched. You can also type a wildcarded DSN to request a list of data sets
from which you can select the desired data set. This field is required when using the
LAYOUT primary command.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 209

Update Utility

Layout member
Type the Member Name of the Record Description Copy Member that describes the
input file.
Leave this field blank to receive a directory of the members in the Layout data set.
You can also type a wildcarded member name to receive a directory of members
that match that wildcard.
Specify the LAYOUT command on this panel when you specify a layout data set and
member and you also want to dynamically build the selection criteria by
Field-Names defined in the record layout.
Selection Criteria
Selection criteria below or Selection criteria member
Specifies selection criteria if the records or members of the input file will be filtered
according to selection criteria.
Use selection criteria to specify a filter based on the following types of parameters
■ Condition that evaluates data values in each record
■ Presence of a character string within a record or specified columns or field
name from a record layout
■ Specification of the first record to be selected based on relative record number,
VSAM key, or VSAM RBA
■ Limit to the number of records selected
Use a cataloged selection criteria parameter member that has been defined using
CA File Master Plus Option 0.
Use the primary command LAYOUT.

For sample selection criteria specifications, see the following table. For a complete
explanation of the syntaxes, request field-level help.

Selection Criteria Description

101 = C'NY' Position 101 for a length of 2 equals 'NY'
1(3) = C'001' & 101 = C'NY' Compound condition
C'TEXAS' Character string 'TEXAS' anywhere in the record
'TEXAS' Text 'TEXAS' (any case) anywhere in the record. If
the character string contains imbedded blanks or an
imbedded operand, the character string must be
within quotes.
10(4) EQP Position 10 for a length of 4 is any valid packed value

210 ISPF User Guide

Update Utility

Selection Criteria Description

80 = C'NY'C'NJ'C'MA' Position 80 for a length of 2 equals 'NY' or 'NY' or
'MA' (case sensitive)
80 = C'NY,NJ,MA' Position 80 for a length of 2 equals 'NY' or 'NY' or
'MA' (case sensitive)
100(2) = P'0,1,999' Position 100 contains a two-byte packed value of 0
or 1 or 999
82(2) > 84 Position 82-83 is greater than positions 84-85
101(20) CO C'NEW YORK' Positions 101-120 contain 'NEW YORK'. (case
sensitive and can appear anywhere within positions
101-120)
STARTREC=1001 Select records beginning with record number 1001
STARTKEY='56789' Select keyed VSAM records beginning with key
56789
STARTRBA=X'1FD8' Select records starting with the record with RBA
x'1FD8'
INLIM=5000 Stop reading/selecting after reading 5000 records.
SELLIM=1000 Only select 1000 records based on selection criteria
STATE-CODE NE 'NY' Field STATE-CODE not equal 'NY' (requires LAYOUT
information)
80 = C'NY' C'TX' AND Position 80 for a length of 2 equals 'NY' or 'TX', AND
100 = C'000' position 100 for a length of 3 equals '000'

TRAN-DD GT '01' AND TRAN-DD Field TRAN-DD is '02' '03' '04', or '05'
LT '06'
MEMBER criteria Specifies that 'criteria' (specified after the MEMBER
command) applies to PDS member selection only.
This parameter and subsequent selection criteria is
ignored if specified for non-PDS data sets.
Examples:
MEMBER 'texas'
MEMBER 101 EQ 'NY'
MEMBER is the default for selection criteria specified
for PDS or PDSE data sets when no member or a
generic member name is specified.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 211

Update Utility

Selection Criteria Description

RECORD criteria Specifies that 'criteria' (specified after the RECORD
command) applies to record selection only. When a
data set or member(s) are selected for browse or
edit, only selected records will be displayed.
Examples:
RECORD 'texas'
RECORD 101 EQ 'NY'
RECORD is the default for VSAM and sequential files
or for fully qualified PDS-member names.

Update Utility Member Directory

When you specify a blank member name or a wildcarded member name in the Update
Utility sub-menu, a partitioned data set member list displays in response to a
wildcarded or blank member name field. If you specified the member selection criteria
in the Selection Criteria, the list of members reflects only those members that matched
any wildcard in the member name field and contained records that matched the
specified selection criteria

CA File Master Plus -- SEARCH 'ABC.WORKPDS3' ---------- ----- Row 1 of 15

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S Member Msg Size Created Changed ID

_ ABCD 3 2012/01/29 2012/08/17 13:40:46 MOORO10
_ ABNAMRO 55 2003/09/17 2008/05/19 13:54:38 MOORO10
_ ABSTRACT 19 2000/07/05 2004/07/27 17:01:00 MOORO10
_ ACCQMOD 19 2005/10/26 2005/10/26 14:26:59 MOORO10
_ ACCQTHST 24 2005/10/26 2005/10/26 13:03:09 MOORO10
_ ACCQTOTS 63 2001/12/19 2005/11/11 14:54:41 MOORO10
_ ACCUM2 91 2002/07/22 2002/07/22 13:41:20 MOORO10
_ AIX 29 2003/04/15 2003/04/15 12:02:16 MOORO10
_ ALDP0SFB
_ ALLOCATE 39 2001/10/26 2008/05/19 13:55:18 MOORO10
_ APFFM 9 2003/06/03 2004/06/10 16:41:53 MOORO10
_ APFTP 5 2003/05/01 2003/06/02 08:36:35 MOORO10
_ ART3 16 2004/07/27 2012/07/30 15:07:10 MOORO10
_ ASM 32 2002/03/04 2002/08/19 10:27:44 MOORO10
_ AXYZ 3 2004/02/19 2012/07/30 15:07:10 MOORO10
***************************** End of Member List ******************************

212 ISPF User Guide

Update Utility

Each line item contains the following fields for each data set.
■ Msg – informative message reflecting the action taken on the member
■ Size – number of records within the member
■ Created – the date the member was created
■ Changed – the date and time of the last update to the member
■ ID – the userid associated with the last update or creation of the member

Primary commands supported by the Update Utility Member Directory are as follows:
LOCATE | L value
MEMBER selection criteria
S member
SORT column-name [D | A]

The LOCATE, MEMBER, and SORTcommands assist in the location of the desired
members.

The command L or LOCATE, followed by a value, positions to the first member directory
entry whose sort sequence field is greater than or equal to the specified value. For
example, when the directory list is sorted by the Name column, the L ABC positions the
member list to the first member in the list whose member name is greater than or equal
to the name ABC.

Use the MEMBER command followed by valid selection criteria to specify additional
member selection criteria. Using this command format reduces the current member list
to only those members that contain records that match the specified selection criteria.
Use successive MEMBER commands to continually reduce the current member list. For
example, MEMBER 'ABC' reduces the member list to only those members that contain
the characters ABC in one of their records. A subsequent MEMBER 'XYZ' command
reduces the member list to only those members that contain the characters ABC and
XYZ.

The SORT command sorts the directory by any of the columns in the directory when you
type SORT XXX or SORT XXX Y, where 'XXX' is one of the column literals and 'Y' is 'A' for
ascending or 'D' for descending.

For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory in descending order of Created Date
and SORT ID A sorts the directory in ascending order of User ID.

The S member command selects a member from the data set for processing. The
member does not have to be in the current member list to be selected. The member
can be a generic member name such as 'A*' which will select all members who's name
starts with the letter 'A', or '*' which will select all members from the directory.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 213

Update Utility

Field Descriptions
Line Item Action Ind
The valid value for the Line Item Action Indicator is 'S' to select the member to be
processed.

Update Utility From and To Character Strings Sub-Menu

This menu is used by the Update function to specify the from and to character strings to
be updated on the Update data set, and is only displayed if the Layout Dataset and
Layout member fields are left blank. If record selection criteria is also specified, only
those records that match the record selection criteria will be evaluated and updated by
the From/To string changes specified on this menu.

Valid commands from this menu are CANCEL or END, which will return to the Utility
primary menu without performing the update.

CA File Master Plus --- Update From & To Character Strings -------
COMMAND ===>

Pos Len Op Value All

From ===> 1 0 EQ ______________________________________________

To ______________________________________________ N

From ===> 1 0 EQ ______________________________________________

To ______________________________________________ N

From ===> 1 0 EQ ______________________________________________

To ______________________________________________ N

From ===> 1 0 EQ ______________________________________________

To ______________________________________________ N

ENTER to proceed with update

CANCEL or END to return to Search Utility Screen

Field Descriptions
Pos
Type the position within the record where the scan is to begin. Valid values are 1
through 32760
Len
Type the length of the scan to perform. A scan-length of zero means to scan the
entire record starting at the position parameter's value. Valid values are 0 – 32760.

214 ISPF User Guide

Update Utility

Op
Type the operator value to use when scanning. Valid choices include:
EQ — Equal
NE — Not equal
GT — Greater than
GE — Greater than or equal to
LE — Less than or equal to
LT — Less than
From Value
Type the from string values for the scan to use. If the scan operation is evaluated to
be true, the data beginning at the first byte of the from string value will be
REPLACED by the to string value. From string data is replaced for the length of the
to string value with no shifting of data or alteration of the record length, unless the
Input Format JCL option is Y.
When the Input Format JCL option is Y, and the to character string is shorter than
the from character string, data is shifted to the left until two consecutive
spaces/blanks are found, then padded with spaces/blanks. If the to character string
is longer than the from string and there are not enough consecutive blanks to
accommodate the difference, a new (continued) JCL card will be inserted with one
or more JCL parameters from the updated JCL record.
Valid syntax is as follows:
'c…'
Text – matches both lower and uppercase alphabetic characters.
C'c…'
Character – matches specified case
P'n…'
Packed decimal
T'x…'
Text – matches both lower and uppercase alphabetic characters. Alphanumeric
data is permitted.
X'hh'
Hexadecimal
Apostrophes (') and quotes (") are not interchangeable.
Character data within apostrophes and quotes are always treated as text.
When the text contains an apostrophe, the text needs to be enclosed in quotes.
When the text contains a quote, the text needs to be enclosed in apostrophes.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 215

Update Utility

To Value
Type the to string value to be used as a replacement string for the from string value.
If the scan operation is evaluated to be true, the data beginning at the first byte of
the from string value will be REPLACED by the to string value.
Valid syntax is as follows:
'c…'
Text – matches both lower and uppercase alphabetic characters.
C'c…'
Character – matches specified case
P'n…'
Packed decimal
T'x…'
Text – matches both lower and uppercase alphabetic characters. Alphanumeric
data is permitted.
X'hh'
Hexadecimal
Apostrophes (') and quotes (") are not interchangeable.
Character data within apostrophes and quotes are always treated as character.
When the text contains an apostrophe, the text needs to be enclosed in quotes.
When the text contains a quote, the text needs to be enclosed in apostrophes.
All
Type a Y to replace every occurrence of the from string found in a record within the
scan-length. Type N to replace the first occurrence only of the from string found in a
record within the scan-length.

Update Utility Update Fields Sub-Menu

This menu is used by the Update function to specify the from and to character strings to
be updated on the Update data set, and is only displayed if the Layout Dataset and
Layout member fields are present. If record selection criteria is also specified, only those
records that match the record selection criteria will be evaluated and updated by the
From/To string changes specified on this menu.

216 ISPF User Guide

Update Utility

Valid commands from this menu are CANCEL or END, which will return to the Utility
primary menu without performing the update.

CAWAPPFN DSLIST er Plus -- Update Fields -------------------- Row 1 to 9 of 26

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

From
Field Name Pos Format OP To
01 FIELD-RECORD 1 C 53 __ ______________________________
______________________________
05 FIELD-ALPHABETIC 1 C 4 __ ______________________________
______________________________
05 FIELD-ALPHANUM 5 C 4 __ ______________________________
______________________________
05 FIELD-EDITTED-ALPHA 9 C 4 __ ______________________________
______________________________
05 FIELD-NUMERIC 13 N 2.2 __ ______________________________
______________________________
05 FIELD-PACKED 17 P 4.3 __ ______________________________
______________________________
05 FIELD-PACKED1 21 P 3 __ ______________________________
______________________________
05 FIELD-BINARY 23 BS 18 __ ______________________________
______________________________
05 FIELD-EDITTED-NUM 31 N 4 __ ______________________________
______________________________

Field Descriptions
Field Name
The level and name of the field as defined in the Layout data set's member
Pos
The starting position within the record of the field
Format
The data-type indicator followed by either the number of digits or characters
allowed for the field as defined by the field definition.
Valid data-type indicators are:
B – Binary C – Alphanumeric F – Floating Point
N – zoned numeric P – Packed S – Signed

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 217

Update Utility

OP
Type the operator value to be used when updating. Valid choices include:
EQ — Equal
NE — Not equal
GT — Greater than
GE — Greater than or equal to
LE — Less than or equal to
LT — Less than
CO — Contains (i.e., the specified literal is anywhere in the field)
From Value
Type the from string values to be used by the update. If the update operation is
evaluated to be true, the data beginning at the first byte of the from string value
will be REPLACED by the to string value. From string data is replaced for the length
of the to string value with no shifting of data or alteration of the record length,
unless the Input Format JCL option is Y.
When the Input Format JCL option is Y, and the to character string is shorter than
the from character string, data is shifted to the left until two consecutive
spaces/blanks are found, then padded with spaces/blanks. If the to character string
is longer than the from string and there are not enough consecutive blanks to
accommodate the difference, a new (continued) JCL card will be inserted with one
or more JCL parameters from the updated JCL record.
The typed value is examined to make sure that it adheres to the field's definition.
Valid syntax is as follows:
'c…'
Text – matches both lower and uppercase alphabetic characters.
C'c…'
Character – matches specified case
P'n…'
Packed decimal
T'x…'
Text – matches both lower and uppercase alphabetic characters. Alphanumeric
data is permitted.
X'hh'
Hexadecimal
Apostrophes (') and quotes (") are not interchangeable.
Character data within apostrophes and quotes are always treated as text.

218 ISPF User Guide

Update Utility

When the text contains a quote, the te xt needs to be e nclosed in a postrophe s.

When the text contains an apostrophe, the text needs to be enclosed in quotes.
To Value
Type the to string value to be used as a replace string for the from string value. If
the update operation is evaluated to be true, the data beginning at the first byte of
the from string value will be REPLACED by the to string value.
The typed value is examined to make sure that it adheres to the field's definition.
Valid syntax is as follows:
'c…'
Text – matches both lower and uppercase alphabetic characters.
C'c…'
Character – matches specified case
P'n…'
Packed decimal
T'x…'
Text – matches both lower and uppercase alphabetic characters. Alphanumeric
data is permitted.
X'hh'
Hexadecimal
Apostrophes (') and quotes (") are not interchangeable.
Character data within apostrophes and quotes are always treated as text.
When the text contains an apostrophe, the text needs to be enclosed in quotes.
When the text contains a quote, the text needs to be enclosed in apostrophes.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 219

Data Set Compare Utility

Data Set Compare Utility

The Data Set Compare utility is used to compare data sets and members of various file
formats. Depending on the type of file specified in the "OLD" Data set field, the Data Set
Compare or Program Compare screen is displayed.

The Data Set Compare screen compares text files. The "OLD" and "NEW" data sets for a
data set compare can be a sequential file, a PDS, or a VSAM file.

------------------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Compare ------------------

COMMAND ===>

"OLD" Dataset:
Dataset name ===>
Member name ===>
"NEW" Dataset:
Dataset name ===>
Member name ===>

Print Format ===> C C = Character H = Hex S = Single Record formatted

Record Display ===> M A = All records M = Mismatched records S = Summary
Field Display ===> M A = All Fields M = Mismatched fields
Position ===> _____ _____ _____ BUILD | (old-pos length new-pos)
Execution mode ===> E O = Online S = Submit JCL E = Edit JCL

Record Layout for Formatted Print:

Layout dataset ===>
Layout member ===>

Selection Criteria below or Selection Criteria Member ===>

===>
===>
===>

The Program Compare screen compares load modules or program objects. The "OLD"
Data set and "NEW" Data set fields on this screen must point to a loadlib library.

Note: The compare screen updates as needed in response to the file type entered in the
"OLD" Data set field. For example, entering a loadlib into this field on the Data Set
Compare screen will cause the screen to switch to the Program Compare screen.

220 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Compare Utility

------------------- CA File Master Plus -- Program Compare ------------------

COMMAND ===>

"OLD" Dataset:
Dataset name ===>
Member name ===>
"NEW" Dataset:
Dataset name ===>
Member name ===>

Print Format ===> C C = Character I = Instruction

Record Display ===> M A = All records M = Mismatched records S = Summary
Field Display ===> M A = All Fields M = Mismatched fields
Execution mode ===> E O = Online S = Submit JCL E = Edit JCL
Max mismatches ===> 0 Output page size ===> 60

Csect Compare ===> N N = By Name O = By Order

Properties ===> I I = Include E = Exclude ("S" to select options)
- Attributes _ EntryPoint _ LinkDate _ TotalSize
_ CsectName _ CsectDate _ CsectSize _ Translator
_ Content _ IDRZAP _ IDRUSER _ ESD

I/E Csect Selection (Enter I or E to Include or Exclude csects or ranges)

_ __________________________________________________________________________
_ __________________________________________________________________________
_ __________________________________________________________________________

Field Descriptions
"OLD" Data set:
Data set name
Type the data set name of the first input file to the compare function. The data set
is compared to the data set specified in the "NEW" data set section of the screen.
The Data Set Compare screen displays when you enter a sequential file, PDS, or
VSAM file. The Program Compare screen displays when you enter a loadlib or load
library member.
Member name
The "OLD" Member Name can be used when the "OLD" data set is a PDS. This field
can contain the following:
■ Member name if the "OLD" data set for the compare is a PDS member.
■ Wildcarded member name used to request a directory of the members in the
data set. From the directory, you can select the member you want compared.
"NEW" Data set:
Data set name
Type the data set name of the file you want compared to the "OLD" file. Enter a
sequential file, PDS, or VSAM file on the Data Set Compare screen. Enter a loadlib or
load library member on the Program Compare screen.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 221

Data Set Compare Utility

Member name
The "NEW" Member name can be used when the "NEW" data set is a PDS.
Print Format
Select the print format for any mismatched records that are found during the
compare. You can specify character, or hex formats for both data set and program
compares. For the Data Set Compare screen, single record format is also an option.
If you chose single record format, specify a record layout data set and member to
use for formatting the records.
Record Display
Controls which of the records are displayed. Enter one of the following values:
A
All—all records in the file are displayed, flagging mismatched data.
M
Mismatch—only mismatched records are displayed. This includes, inserted,
deleted and changed records. Mismatched data in the changed records are
flagged.
S
Summary—only a Summary report is displayed.
Field Display
If you selected Single Record Format for the Print Format option, use this option to
specify whether to print all fields in a mismatched record or only fields that have a
mismatch.
Position
To compare only a portion of each record, specify the old-position, length, and
new-position in these fields. If the new-position is not specified, it defaults to the
old-position. Enter BUILD in the old position field to execute a process that builds
POSITION and SYNCKEY keywords using record layouts.
Execution mode
Specifies how the function is executed. Specify one of the following values:
O
Perform the function online
S
Generate and submit JCL to perform the function
E
Generate JCL to perform the function and initiate an edit session on the JCL.
You can alter the JCL as needed and then submit the JCL or save it to another
location.

222 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Compare Utility

Record Layout for Formatted Print:

Layout data set
Type the DSN of the Record Description Copy Library member that describes the file
to be searched. You can also type a wildcarded DSN to request a list of data sets
from which you can select the desired data set. This field is required when using the
LAYOUT primary command.
Layout member
Type the Member Name of the Record Description Copy Member that describes the
input file.
Leave this field blank to receive a directory of the members in the Layout data set.
You can also type a wildcarded member name to receive a directory of members
that match that wildcard.
Specify the LAYOUT command on this panel when you specify a layout data set and
member and you also want to build the selection criteria dynamically by field
names defined in the record layout.
Selection criteria below or Selection criteria member
Selection criteria are used to restrict your view to certain members or records
based on the following types of parameters:
■ A condition that evaluates data values in each record or member
■ Presence of a character string within a library member, record, or specified
columns
■ Specification of the first record displayed based on relative record number,
VSAM key, or VSAM RBA
■ Limit to the number of records displayed
For a complete explanation of selection criteria and examples of valid syntax, see
the chapter "Filters."
Use a cataloged Selection Criteria parameter member that has been defined using
CA File Master Plus Option 0.3.
Use the primary command LAYOUT.
Max mismatches
Controls the maximum number of mismatches allowed before the COMPARE
command is terminated. Mismatches are defined as inserted, deleted, or changed
records.
Enter an integer value from 0 to 99999.
The default value is zero, which sets no maximum limit. However, the default may
have been changed during product installation by updating the '&BAT_COMPDIFF'
option.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 223

Data Set Compare Utility

Output page size

Controls the maximum number of lines per page for the SYSLIST output file.
Enter an integer value from 1 to 9999.
The default value is 60. However, the default may have been changed during
product installation by updating the '&BAT_LINEPAGE' option.
CSECT Compare
Controls how CSECTs are compared. Enter one of the following values:
N
Name—CSECTs with identical names are compared. CSECTs that exist only in
the old file are reported as deleted. CSECTs that exist only in the new file are
reported as inserted.
O
Order—CESCTs are compared in the order in which they appear in the program
Properties
Controls how the program properties selected in the Properties options section are
used for the comparison of programs.
I
Include—the selected program properties are included in the comparison.
E
Exclude—the selected program properties are excluded from the comparison.
Properties options
Lists the properties you can specify for a program compare. Enter an S to select an
option from the list. Enter a blank character to clear a previously selected option.
Following are possible options:
Attributes
The program link attributes: reentrant, reusable, refreshable, authorization
code, amode, rmode and SSI
Content
The actual module text
CSECTDate
The date carried in Binder IDR_B records
CSECTName
The name of the CSECTs
CSECTSize
The size of the CSECTs

224 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Compare Utility

EntryPoint
The load module entry point
ESD
External symbol information carried in Binder B_ESD records, such as external
references
IDRUSER
Information carried in Binder B_IDRU records added as a result of the Binder
IDENTIFY statement or programmatically by, for example, Endevor
IDRZAP
IDR ZAP information carried in Binder B_IDRZ records
LinkDate
The date and time the program was linked
TotalSize
The size of the load module or program object
Translator
Compiler information
CSECT Selection
Controls which CSECTs are included or excluded from the program comparison.
Specify CSECTs or the range of CSECTs for comparison on the three lines in the
CSECT Selection section of the screen. Each line is composed of two fields.
The first field controls the action that applies to the CSECTs specified in the
second field. Enter one of the following values:
I
Include—the CSECTs are included in the comparison.
E
Exclude—the CSECTs are excluded from the comparison.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 225

Data Set Compare Utility

The second field identifies the CSECTs that are included or excluded from the
comparison. Enter a list of CSECT names or range of CSECTs. The following rules
apply to the CSECTs list:
■ Separate each CSECT or range of CSECTs with a comma
■ No blank characters are allowed in the list
■ A valid CSECT name cannot exceed 63 characters
■ A CSECT name can contain wildcard characters
■ A range of CSECTs is made of two CSECT names separated by a hyphen. For
example, startcsect-endcsect. The second name must be greater than the
first name.

FMPLUS--Build Compare Position and Synckey Keywords

Enter BUILD in the OLD POSITION field to initiate the process to build Position and
Synckey keywords using record layouts. This process allows a layout file to be used for
each data set so that field names can be matched to build the keywords. The Dataset
Compare Layouts screen is used to specify the layout data set corresponding to the old
and new data set in the compare. The two layouts are initially populated with the layout
file and member that was entered on the Compare screen, if there was one.

--------------- CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Compare Layouts -----------

COMMAND ===>
"OLD" Dataset Record Layout:
Dataset name ===> ‗CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB‘
Member name ===> CUSTFLE2

"NEW" Dataset Record Layout:

Dataset name ===> ‗CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB‘
Member name ===> CUSTFLE3

ENTER or END to proceed CANCEL to return

The old and new layout files can be the same. To assist in the specification of DSNs, each
of the DSN fields on this screen has support for wildcarded DSNs and DSN Lists.

Use ENTER or END after entering the layout information to access the Generate Position
and Synckey Keywords screen.

226 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Compare Utility

CA File Master Plus - Generate Position and Synckey Keywords

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

OLD Record ------------ CUSTFLE2 of 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB' ----------------

A Num Field Name Pos Format SYNCKEY Parms Row 1 of 26
_ 1 CUSTOMER-RECORD 1 160
_ 2 CUST-REC-TYPE 1 C 1
_ 3 CUST-ID 2 C 7
_ 4 CUST-NAME 9 C 15
_ 5 CUST-STREET 24 C 18
_ 6 CUST-CITY 42 C 12
_ 7 CUST-STATE 54 C 2
_ 8 CUST-ZIP-CODE 56 C 10
NEW Record ------------ CUSTDLE3 of 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB' --------------
Num Field Name Pos Format Compare To Row 1 of 27
1 CUSTOMER-RECORD 1 160
2 CUST-REC-TYPE 1 C 1 CUST-REC-TYPE
3 CUST-ID 2 C 7 CUST-ID
4 CUST-NEW-FIELD 9 C 5
5 CUST-STREET 14 C 18 CUST-STREET
6 CUST-CITY 32 C 12 CUST-CITY
7 CUST-STATE 44 C 2 CUST-STATE
8 CUST-NAME 46 C 15 CUST-NAME

The top section of the screen presents the record layout of the OLD record. The bottom
section of the screen presents the NEW record layout. This section contains a field on
each line for entering either the Field Name or relative field number of the OLD field to
compared to the NEW record.

The fields entered in the Compare To field are used to generate a Position keyword. The
screen defaults to compare all nongroup fields that have the same Field Name in the
OLD and NEW records.

Synckey Keywords

To generate a Synckey keyword, type ‘S’ next to the field in the OLD file that you want to
synchronize on. This field must be listed in the COMPARE TO column next to the
corresponding field in the NEW file section. The Define Synckey Parameter screen is
then displayed.

------------------------- Define SYNCKEY Parameter -----------------------

COMMAND ===>

Update SYNCKEY settings by overtyping the displayed values.

Old Synckey Field: CUST-ID

New Synckey Field: CUST-ID

SYNCKEY Order ===> 1

Key ===> N (N = NOKEY | A = ASCENDING | D = DESCENDING)
Print ===> P (P = PRINT | N = NOPRINT)

ENTER or END to process CANCEL to return

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 227

Data Set Compare Utility

Field Descriptions
Old Synckey Field
This field on the old record syncs to the NEW Synckey Field.
New Synckey Field
This field on the new record syncs to the OLD Synckey Field.
Synckey Order
This field determines the order in which the Synckey keywords are processed,
starting with the number 1. The number is initialized to the next highest number.
You can change this number, but not to one that has already been entered.
Key
This field specifies the type of compare.
N
Specifies a nonkeyed compare.
A or D
Specifies that it is a keyed compare and the keys are in the order indicated by
this parameter.
Print
This field defines whether the Synckey values are printed in the compare report.
The information entered for the Synckey is displayed on the Generate Position and
Synckey Keywords screen when you return.

CA File Master Plus - Generate Position and Synckey Keywords

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

OLD Record ------------ CUSTFLE2 of 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB' ----------------

A Num Field Name Pos Format SYNCKEY Parms Row 1 of 26
_ 1 CUSTOMER-RECORD 1 160
_ 2 CUST-REC-TYPE 1 C 1
_ 3 CUST-ID 2 C 7
_ 4 CUST-NAME 9 C 15
_ 5 CUST-STREET 24 C 18
_ 6 CUST-CITY 42 C 12
_ 7 CUST-STATE 54 C 2
_ 8 CUST-ZIP-CODE 56 C 10
NEW Record ------------ CUSTDLE3 of 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB' --------------
Num Field Name Pos Format Compare To Row 1 of 27
1 CUSTOMER-RECORD 1 160
2 CUST-REC-TYPE 1 C 1 CUST-REC-TYPE
3 CUST-ID 2 C 7 CUST-ID
4 CUST-NEW-FIELD 9 C 5
5 CUST-STREET 14 C 18 CUST-STREET
6 CUST-CITY 32 C 12 CUST-CITY
7 CUST-STATE 44 C 2 CUST-STATE
8 CUST-NAME 46 C 15 CUST-NAME

228 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Compare Utility

Page the sections of the screen for the OLD and NEW records either together or
separately. To page both the top and bottom sections together, position the cursor
in the top three lines of the screen when making the forward or backward paging
request. To page the OLD or NEW section only, position the cursor anywhere within
the screen section that you want to page.
The keywords are generated when you exit the Generate Position and Synckey
Keywords screen and return to the Compare screen. A Position keyword is
generated for each field on the bottom section of the screen that has a field
entered in the Compare To field. The Synckey keywords are generated based on the
order entered in the Synckey order.

Field Descriptions
A
An action field used to generate Synckey keywords.
Following are the valid values for this field:
S
Defines or modifies a Synckey
X
Removes a Synckey that has already been defined
Num
The relative field number of the field
Field Name
The name of the field
Following are the indentation rules for the Field Name column:
■ The indention amount is 2 as long as the entire name of each field can fit within
the space provided.
■ If the condition in the first bullet is not true, and the entire name of each field
can fit within the space provided, then the indention amount is 1.
■ If the conditions in both the first and second bullets are not true, then the
indention amount is 0.
■ If the field name and table index values cannot fit in the space provided, then
the table index values overwrite the rightmost characters of the field name.
Pos
The starting position within the record of the field

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 229

Data Set Compare Utility

Format
The data type indicator followed by either the number of digits or characters
allowed for the field as defined by the field definition.
Valid data type indicators are the following:
B
Binary
C
Alphanumeric
F
Floating-point
N
Zoned numeric
P
Packed
S
Signed
Compare To
The COMPARE TO column is located in the bottom section of the screen. This
section is used to define the field names from the OLD Record that you want
compared to the NEW Record. The screen is initially displayed with field names
from the OLD layout automatically paired with fields of the same name from the
NEW layout.
Following are the valid values for this field:
The NUM of a field of the OLD record whose value you want compared.
When a relative field number is typed, the field number is translated to a Field
Name.
The Field Name of a field of the OLD record whose value you want compared.

230 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Compare Utility

Multiple Layout Support

If your data set contains multiple record layout definitions, you may want to control
building position keywords for only the records you are comparing. The files you are
comparing may have multiple record formats that require comparison of different
positions for each one. You can define a CRL position to define the conditions to use
each record layout. You can then use this position as input for the Build Keywords
process.

When CRLs are entered into the data set names on the Dataset Compare Layouts
screen, the Old and New CRL File Matching screen appears. This screen allows you to
match the old and new record layouts that you want to compare. The COBOL 01 level
names are shown for each to allow you to do the matching.

---------- CA File Master Plus - Old and New CRL File Matching -------------
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

OLD CRL File ----------- CUSTFILE of 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.OLD.LAYOUT' ------------

Num 01 Level Field Name Row 1
of 2
1 CUSTOMER-CONTROL
2 CUSTOMER-PROFILE
****************************** End of 01 Levels *******************************

NEW CRL File ----------- CUSTFILE of 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.NEW.LAYOUT' ------------

Num 01 Level Field Name Compare To Row 1 of 2
1 CUSTOMER-CONTROL CUSTOMER-CONTROL
2 CUSTOMER-PROFILE CUSTOMER-PROFILE
****************************** End of 01 Levels *******************************

Num
The relative number of the 01 level.
01 Level Field Name
The field name of the 01 level.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 231

Data Set Compare Utility

Compare To
The COMPARE TO column is used to define the 01 level from the OLD Record that
you want compared to the NEW Record. The screen is initially displayed with the
names from the OLD layout automatically paired with those with the same name
from the NEW layout.
Valid values for this field are:
The NUM of a layout from the OLD record whose value you want compared.
When a relative field number is typed, the field number is translated to a Field
Name.
The 01 Level Field Name of a layout from the OLD record whose value you want
compared.

Field Descriptions
Num
The relative number of the 01 level.
01 Level Field Name
The field name of the 01 level.
Compare To
The COMPARE TO column is used to define the 01 level from the OLD Record that
you want compared to the NEW Record. The screen is initially displayed with the
names from the OLD layout automatically paired with those with the same name
from the NEW layout.
Valid values for this field are:
The NUM of a layout from the OLD record whose value you want compared.
When a relative field number is typed, the field number is translated to a Field
Name.
The 01 Level Field Name of a layout from the OLD record whose value you want
compared.

232 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Compare Utility

When the matching is complete, press the PF3 key to pass control to the Layout
Selection screen.

CAWAPCMB --------- CA File Master Plus -- Layout Selection ------ Row 1 of 2

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

"Old" Dataset Record Layout: CUSTOMER.PROJECT.OLD.LAYOUT(CUSTFILE)

Description: this crl maps the old file
"New" Dataset Record Layout: CUSTOMER.PROJECT.NEW.LAYOUT(CUSTFILE)
Description: this crl maps the new file

S - Select Layout

A ―Old‖ 01 Level Field Name ―NEW‖ 01 Level Field Name Positions

S CUSTOMER-RECORD CUST-RECORD Y
_ CUSTOMER-CONTROL CUSTOMER-CONTROL N
****************************** End of 01 Levels *******************************

Enter an S next to the 01 level combination and press the Enter key to go to the
Generate Position and Synckey Keywords screen for those 01 levels. Press the PF3 key
to return to the Layout Selection screen. The Positions Generated column will be
updated with a ‘Y’. To complete the process of building Position keywords, repeat this
for each record layout that will be involved in the compare.

Generate the Keywords

To generate the keywords, exit the Generate Positions and Synckey Keywords screen or
the Layout Selection screen to return to the Dataset Compare screen. To view the batch
JCL including the generated keywords in EDIT mode, enter ‘E’ in the execution mode on
the Compare screen. Save the JCL to your own file or PDS if you want to reuse it.

If the BUILD function has been executed and keywords generated, a warning panel
displays when you exit the Compare screen. Press ENTER to delete the generated
keywords and return to the previous menu. When you press the END or PF3 keys, you
are returned to the Compare screen. Execute the Compare to generate the keywords.

---------------- Compare Build Warning -----------------

COMMAND ===>

You have generated keywords with the BUILD Function.

Press ENTER to delete the keywords and exit compare.

Enter END to return to the compare screen.

Select Execution mode 'E' to Edit the JCL to review
modify, and save the job to a permanent file.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 233

Data Set Compare Utility

Compare Utility Member Directory

The Compare Utility Member Directory screen displays a list of the members in the
Compare "OLD" Data set library. When you type a wildcarded member name, the
directory contains a list of the members that match the member wildcard. Additionally,
if selection criteria were specified to further filter the members to be copied, the list of
members contains only those members matching the wildcard specification and the
selection criteria.

CA File Master Plus -------Compare 'ABC.TEST33. -------------- Row 1 of 290

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S Member New Mem VV.MM Created Changed Size Init Mod ID

_ A 01.00 01/12/07 01/12/07 21:54 55 55 0 TECH
_ AIX 01.00 01/11/20 01/11/20 22:20 33 33 0 TECH
_ B
_ CBT 01.03 01/08/26 02/02/01 18:51 418 20 0 TECH
_ CBTUPD 01.01 01/08/30 01/08/30 18:26 208 212 0 TECH
_ CODDIS1 01.01 01/06/21 01/10/11 17:18 2700 2700 0 TECH2
_ CODVSM1 01.00 01/06/21 01/06/21 07:42 500 500 0 TECH
_ CODVSM12 01.00 01/06/21 01/06/21 07:42 140 140 0 TECH
_ CODVSM13 01.00 01/06/21 01/06/21 07:42 120 120 0 TECH
_ CODVSM14 01.00 01/06/21 01/06/21 07:42 100 100 0 TECH
_ CODVSM15 01.00 01/06/21 01/06/21 07:42 120 120 0 TECH
_ CODVSM2 01.00 01/06/21 01/06/21 07:42 1100 1100 0 TECH
_ CODVSM3 01.00 01/06/21 01/06/21 07:42 200 200 0 TECH
_ COUNTY 01.00 00/08/31 00/08/31 15:22 3006 3006 0 TECH
_ COUNTYSB 01.00 01/01/16 01/01/16 20:45 3006 3006 0 TECH2
_ COUNTYST 01.00 00/08/31 00/08/31 17:44 3006 3006 0 TECH
_ COUNTYS2 01.02 00/08/31 00/08/31 22:59 3141 3141 0 TECH
_ COUNTYS3 01.00 01/06/21 01/06/21 07:42 48 48 0 TECH
_ COUNTY2 01.01 00/08/31 00/08/31 15:23 3006 3006 0 TECH
_ COUNTY3 01.00 00/08/31 00/08/31 15:27 1315 1315 0 TECH
_ D 01.00 01/10/24 01/10/24 21:19 8 8 0 TECH2
_ DATEHELP 01.00 01/06/21 01/06/21 07:42 528 528 0 TECH
_ DEMO 01.00 02/01/05 02/01/05 16:14 20 20 0 TECH
_ DUP 01.00 01/07/25 01/07/25 12:25 469 469 0 TECH
_ DUP2 01.00 01/07/25 01/07/25 12:38 461 461 0 TECH
_ EX$0001$ 01.00 01/06/07 01/06/07 15:12 1 1 0 TECH
_ EX@0001@ 01.00 01/06/07 01/06/07 15:13 1 1 0 TECH
_ EXECMDEX 01.00 02/01/05 02/01/05 16:14 286 286 0 TECH

234 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Compare Utility

Primary commands supported by the Compare Utility Member Directory are as follows:
CANCEL or CAN
Cancels the copy operation. The LOCATE, MEMBER, and SORT commands assist in
the location of the desired members.
L | LOCATE
This command, followed by a value, positions to the first member directory entry
whose sort sequence field is greater than or equal to the specified value. For
example, when the directory list is sorted by the Name column, the L ABC positions
the member list to the first member in the list whose member name is greater than
or equal to the name ABC.
MEMBER
This command, followed by valid selection criteria, specifies additional member
selection criteria. Using this command format reduces the current member list to
only those members that contain records that match the specified selection criteria.
Successive MEMBER commands can be used to continually reduce the current
member list. For example, MEMBER 'ABC' reduces the member list to only those
members that contain the characters ABC in one of their records. A subsequent
MEMBER 'XYZ' command reduces the member list to only those members that
contain the characters ABC and XYZ.
SORT
Sorts the directory by any of the columns in the directory when you type SORT XXX
or SORT XXX Y where 'XXX' is one of the column literals and 'Y' is 'A' for ascending or
'D' for descending. For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory in descending
order of Created Date and SORT ID A sorts the directory in ascending order of User
ID.
S member
Selects a member from the data set for processing. The member does not have to
be in the current member list to be selected.

Field Descriptions
Line item action ind
Type one of the following commands to specify an action to be performed for the
member represented by the line item.
■ S – Select the member to be compared
■ B –Browse the member using ISPF Browse
■ E –Edit the member using ISPF Edit
■ 1 – Browse the member using CA File Master Plus
■ 2 – Edit the member using CA File Master Plus

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 235

Data Set Reformat

New Mem
Type the new member name in the New Mem column if a member name of the
"new" member is different than the member name of the "old" member.

Data Set Reformat

The Data Set Reformat screen is used to reformat a data set according to differences
between the "FROM" and "TO" record layouts and according to field-to-field
translations rules in the Reformat Control Parameter.

------------------ CA File Master Plus -- Dataset Reformat ------------------

OPTION ===>

BLANK - Update Reformat Control Parms E - Execute Reformat

Reformat "FROM":
Dataset name ===>
Member name ===>
Layout DSN ===>
Layout member ===>

Reformat "TO":
Dataset name ===>
Member name ===>
Layout DSN ===>
Layout member ===>
Replace Keys ===> N ('Y' to replace duplicate keys in KSDS)

Reformat Control Parm:

Dataset name ===>
Member name ===>

Execution mode ===> O O = Online S = Submit JCL E = Edit JCL

Using this screen, specify the following information for the "FROM" data set (reformat
input) and for the "TO" data set (reformat output).
■ DSN (sequential file, PDS, or VSAM)
■ Member Name (if library member)
■ Layout DSN (PDS)
■ Layout DSN member (PDS)

Also specify the DSN and Member name for the Reformat Control Parameters. Before
executing the reformat process (using an option of E), use an option of blank to build or
update the parameter member. Option blank presents the Define Reformat Parameter
screen which is used to specify the field-to-field translation to be performed to reformat
the "FROM" record into the "TO" record.

236 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Reformat

If the "TO" record contains redefined areas and different redefinitions are to be used
depending on fields such as a record type field within the record, define the redefinition
control information within your Redefinition Control Parameter PDS with a member
name that matches the "TO" record layout name.

To assist in the specification of DSNs, each of the DSN fields on this screen has support
for wildcarded DSNs and DSN Lists.

Each Member name field is supported by a member directory where you can select the
desired member. To request a member directory, leave the member name field blank or
type a wildcarded member name.

When you type a command line Option E (Execute Reformat), the reformat process is
performed. If the Execution mode specified at the bottom of the screen is O (Online),
the reformatting process is performed online. When the Execution mode is S (Submit) or
E (Edit), batch JCL to perform the reformat is created and then either submitted or
edited.

Field Descriptions
Reformat "FROM"
Data set name
Type the DSN of the input file to the reformat process. This file can be a sequential
file, PDS member, or VSAM file. This data set is reformatted according to the
reformat specifications in the Reformat Control Parameter member.
Member name
If the data set being reformatted is a PDS, type the member name that is to be
reformatted.
Layout DSN
Type the DSN of the Record Description Copy Member PDS that describes the input
file to the reformat process.
Layout member
Type the Member Name of the Record Description Copy Member that describes the
input file to the reformat process.
Reformat "TO"
Data set name
Type the DSN of the output file for the reformat process. This file can be a
sequential file, PDS member, or VSAM file. This data set is updated by the reformat
process according to the reformat specifications in the Reformat Control Parameter
member.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 237

Data Set Reformat

Member name
If the output data set of the reformat process is a PDS, type the member name that
is to be created or updated.
Layout DSN
Type the DSN of the Record Description Copy Member PDS that describes the
output file of the reformat process.
Layout member
Type the Member Name of the Record Description Copy Member that describes the
output file of the reformat process.
Reformat Control Parm:
Data set name
Type the DSN of the Reformat Control Parameter PDS. Each member of this
parameter PDS is used to define the field-to-field relationships between the
"FROM" record and the "TO" record for the reformat operation.
A Reformat Control Parameter member can be created or updated using the Define
Reformat Parm screen that is accessed for a command value of BLANK.
Member name
Type the member name of the Reformat Control Parameter PDS to be used for the
current reformat operation. This member defines the field-to-field relationships
between the "FROM" record and the "TO" record for the current reformat
operation.
A Reformat Control Parameter member can be created or updated using the Define
Reformat Parameter screen that is accessed for a command value of BLANK.
Execution mode
The choices for execution mode are:
O – Perform the function on-line
S – Generate and submit JCL to perform the function
E – Generate JCL to perform the function and initiate an edit session on the JCL. You
can alter the JCL as needed and submit the JCL or save it to another location.

238 ISPF User Guide

Data Set Reformat

Data Set Reformat Parm

The Reformat Parm screen is used to build and update a member in the Reformat
Control Parameter data set. Specify the field-to-field translations that are to occur in the
reformat process by defining which fields in the "FROM" record are to be copied to the
"TO" record. In the process of copying field values, reformatting occurs for fields whose
position, length, field format, or number of decimal places is different between the
"FROM" and "TO" records.

CA File Master Plus -- Reformat ---- FM3.INST.REFORMAT(CUSTVND4)

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

FROM Record ------------ CUSTVNDR of ABC.PROD.COPYLIB --------------------------

Num Field Name Pos Format Row 1 of 28
1 CV-CUSTOMER-VENDOR-RECORD 1 163
2 CV-RECORD-TYPE-CODE 1 C 1
3 CV-CUSTOMER-DATA 2 162
4 CV-CUSTOMER-NUM 2 N 9
5 CV-CUSTOMER-TYPE-CODE 11 C 2
6 CV-ACCT-OPENED-DATE 13 N 6
7 CV-DOB 19 N 6
8 CV-1ST-TRANSACTION-DATE 25 N 6
9 CV-CURRENT-BAL 31 P 9.2
10 CV-ORIG-BAL 37 P 9.2
11 CV-PAYMENT-AMT 43 P 9.2
12 CV-PAYMENT-PERIOD 49 N 2
13 CV-NAME 51 C 25
14 CV-ADDR-1 76 C 30
15 CV-ADDR-2 106 C 30
16 CV-CITY 136 C 20
17 CV-STATE 156 C 2
18 CV-ZIP-CODE 158 P 9
TO Record ------------ CUSTVND2 of ABC.PROD.COPYLIB -------------------------
Num Field Name Pos Format Reformat Row 1 of 28
1 CV-CUSTOMER-VENDOR-RECORD 1 163
2 CV-RECORD-TYPE-CODE 1 C 1 CV-RECORD-TYPE-CODE
3 CV-CUSTOMER-DATA 2 162
4 CV-CUSTOMER-NUM 2 P 11.2 CV-CUSTOMER-NUM
5 CV-CUSTOMER-TYPE-CODE 9 C 2 CV-CUSTOMER-TYPE-CODE
6 CV-ACCT-OPENED-DATE 11 N 6 CV-ACCT-OPENED-DATE
7 CV-DOB 17 N 8 CV-DOB
8 CV-1ST-TRANSACTION-DATE 25 N 6 CV-1ST-TRANSACTION-DATE
9 CV-CURRENT-BAL 31 P 9.2 CV-CURRENT-BAL
10 CV-ORIG-BAL 37 P 9.2 CV-ORIG-BAL
11 CV-PAYMENT-AMT 43 P 9.2 CV-PAYMENT-AMT
12 CV-PAYMENT-PERIOD 49 N 2 CV-PAYMENT-PERIOD
13 CV-NAME 51 C 25 CV-NAME
14 CV-ADDR-1 76 C 30 CV-ADDR-1
15 CV-ADDR-2 106 C 30 CV-ADDR-2
16 CV-CITY 136 C 20 CV-CITY
17 CV-STATE 156 C 2 CV-STATE
18 CV-ZIP-CODE 158 P 9 CV-ZIP-CODE

The DSN and member name of the parameter member being created or updated
appears in the top right corner of the screen.

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 239

Data Set Reformat

The top section of the screen, after the heading, presents the record layout of the FROM
Record. The bottom section of the screen presents the TO Record layout and contains a
field on each line for typing the Field Name of the FROM Record to be copied to the TO
Record. For new parameter members, the Reformat Control Parm defaults to copy all
non-group fields that have the same Field Name in the "FROM" and "TO" records.

For each field in the "FROM" and "TO" records, the following screen columns are
presented:

Field Descriptions
Num
The field's relative field number
Field Name
The field's name
The indentation rules for the Field Name column are:
■ The indention amount will be 2 as long as the entire name of the each field can
fit within the space provided.
■ The indention amount will be 1, if point 1 is not true, and the entire name of
each field can fit within the space provided.
■ The indention amount will be 0 if both points 1 and 2 are not true
■ Table index values will overwrite the rightmost characters of the field name if
the field name and table index values cannot fit in the space provided.
Pos
The starting position within the record of the field
Format
The data-type indicator followed by either the number of digits or characters
allowed for the field as defined by the field definition.
Valid data-type indicators are:
B – Binary C – Alphanumeric F – Floating Point
N – zoned numeric P – Packed S – Signed
Also included is the field's length as described per digit or character.
The TO Record section of the screen has a Reformat column that is used to define
the Field Names of fields from the FROM Record that are to be copied to the TO
Record.

240 ISPF User Guide

Environment Utilities Sub-Menu

Reformat
Valid values for this field are:
■ The NUM (Relative field number) of a field of the "FROM" record whose value
is to be copied. When a relative field number is typed, the field number is
translated to a Field Name.
■ The Field Name of a field of "FROM" record whose value is to be copied.
■ A literal that specifies the value to be copied to the output record. Literals for
alpha-numeric fields must be in one of the following formats:
='aaaa' where 'aaaa' is the alpha-numeric value.
=X'xxxx' where 'xxxx' is the hexidecimal value.
■ Literals for numeric fields must be in the following format:
=nnn where 'nnn' is a numeric specification that may contain numeric digits,
a decimal place, and a leading minus sign.
■ Following are examples of valid literals.
='ABC' =1
=X'FFFFFF' =-33.33
■ Fields for which no reformat parameter is specified are set to blanks if
alphanumeric and zero if numeric.
Page the sections of the screen for the from and to records either together or
separately. To page both the top and bottom sections together, position the cursor
in the top three lines of the screen when the forward or backward paging request is
made. To page the from or the to section only, position the cursor anywhere within
the screen section that you want to page.

Environment Utilities Sub-Menu

The Environment Utilities Sub-Menu provides a list of the Environment Utility functions
that can be performed. Type an option value of 1 thru 3 to select the desired
Environment Utilities option.

----------- CA File Master Plus -- Environment Utilities Sub-Menu -----------

OPTION ===>

1 Current ISPF dataset allocation

2 Hardware and software environment

3 DASD unit configuration

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 241

Environment Utilities Sub-Menu

The functions performed by the three options are:

■ Current ISPF data set allocation – Invokes the ISRDDN TSO command to provide
information and modification functions for the data sets allocated to your TSO User
ID. This is a utility for managing data sets that are currently allocated to your TSO
session. We recommend you use the Help facility when you first type this option to
review the line commands that are available.
■ Hardware and software environment – Provides some miscellaneous information
about the hardware and software configuration of your system.
■ DASD unit configuration – Provides a list of the Unit Names defined to your system
and provides you with the ability to get information about each volume within each
Unit Name and each data set within each volume.

Current ISPF Data Set Allocation

The Current ISPF Data Set Allocation screen displays a list of all the data sets currently
allocated to your TSO session.

Current Data Set Allocations Row 1 of 72

Command ===> Scroll ===> PAGE

Volume Disposition Act DDname Data Set Name Actions: B E V M F C I Q

NEW,DEL > CAOESTOP NULLFILE (Dummy)
ISPFR1 SHR,KEEP > CIDTABL MOORO10.ISPF.ISPPROF
OSI005 SHR,KEEP > COMTLIB AD1DEV.COMMON.TABLES
MVSPP3 SHR,KEEP > EDCHKDD SYSPROG.JCLCHK70.PPOPTION(PROCCA31)
MVR1AD SHR,KEEP > ISPLLIB SYS1.DGTLLIB
OSI002 SHR,KEEP > ISPMLIB AD1DEV.COMMON.MESSAGES
MVSLIB SHR,KEEP > SYS2.ISPMLIB

242 ISPF User Guide

Environment Utilities Sub-Menu

Field Descriptions
ACT
Type any valid action as documented following:
B – ISPF Browse
E – ISPF Edit
V – ISPF View
M – Display Enhanced Member List
F – Free the entire ddname
C – ISPF Compress a PDS using the existing PDS allocation
I - Data set Information
Q – Display list of users or jobs using the data set
S – Alias for B
Z - Alias for C

Hardware and Software Environment

The Hardware and Software Environment screen displays a list of the current operating
system's levels and softwares.

BROWSE Environment.Display.for.system=XX01 XX0

Command ===> Scroll ===> CSR

********************************* Top of Data **********************************

Operating System.............z/OS IPL Date.....................2012-08-15

OS Level.....................01.10.00 IPL Time.....................21:13:54
System Name..................CA31 IPL Type.....................CLPA
SMFID........................CA31 IPL UCB/Volume...............2D47/MVR1AD
Plex Name....................PLEXC1 IPL Parm.....................24D731M
Hardware Name................MF01 CVTUSER......................00F96C08
LPAR Name....................CA31 Security System..............TOPS

DFP..........................3.3.2 DFSMS........................1.10.0
TSO..........................3.10.0 ICKDSF.......................1.17

Chapter 7: Utility Functions 243

Environment Utilities Sub-Menu

DASD Unit Configuration

The DASD Unit Configuration screen displays a list of all of the Unit Names (for example,
generic device types) that are defined to your system.

------------------- CA File Master Plus -- DASD Unit Names Row 1 to 10 of 6

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

Below is a list of the Unit Names defined to your system.

Select a Unit Name to receive summary information about
each volume associated within that Unit Name.

S UNIT NAME
_ DASD
_ SYSALLDA
_ SYSDA
_ TSO
_ 3380
_ 3390
*************************** END OF DASD UNIT NAMES ****************************

Type S to the left of any Unit Name to receive the Volume Summary screen with the
information for that Unit Name. The Volume Summary screen lists the volume serials
related to the selected Unit Name with summary information for each volume. From
within the Volume Summary screen, you can select a volume to receive the VTOC Utility
Data Set List for that volume, which contains a line item for each data set on the
volume.

Field Descriptions
LINE ITEM ACTION
Type S to select the Unit Name to receive a display of summary information about
each volume associated within that Unit Name.

244 ISPF User Guide

Chapter 8: Printing Data Sets
This chapter describes the print function of CA File Master Plus. The following file types
are supported:
■ Sequential files
■ PDS members
■ VSAM

This section contains the following topics:

Print Data Sets (see page 245)

Print Data Sets

To print data sets of various file types, use the Print Dataset screen.

To print a data set

1. Select PRINT from the Main Menu.
The Print Dataset screen opens.

---------------- CA File Master Plus -- Print Dataset --------------

COMMAND ===>

Specify Dataset to Print:

Dataset name ===> 'TECH.WORKPDS3'
Member name ===> ('*' = all members, blank/wildcard = mem list)
Volume ===> (If dataset not cataloged)

Print mode ===> S C = Character L = List

H = Hex S = Single Record Formatted
Starting Key/Rec# ===>
Print limit ===>
Execution mode ===> E S = Submit JCL E = Edit JCL

Record Layout for Formatted Print:

Layout dataset ===>
Layout member ===>

Selection Criteria below or Selection Criteria Member ===>

===>
===>
===>

Chapter 8: Printing Data Sets 245

Print Data Sets

2. Complete the following fields:

Dataset name
Specifies the data set name of the data set to be printed. The data set can be
sequential, PDS, or VSAM.
DSN fields on the screen are supported by wildcard and DSN list syntaxes. Type any
of the following syntaxes to select the DSN you want.
■ Wildcarded DSN containing an asterisk (*) or a percent sign (%) for unknown
characters of the DSN.
■ D to request a directory of DSN Lists.
■ D dddddd where 'dddddd' is the name of a DSN list.
Member name
Defines the member name of the member you want to print. Do one of the
following:
■ Type the member name of the member to print a PDS data set.
Note: A single asterisk prints all members. Leave this field blank to receive a
directory of the members in the data set.
■ Type a wildcarded member name to receive a directory of members that match
that wildcard. From a member directory, select the member to be processed.
Volume
Specifies the volume serial number of the volume on which the data set resides if
the data set to be processed is uncataloged.
Print mode
Specifies the print mode to print the data set. Type one of the following values:
C—(Character)–Record printed with 100 bytes to a line with unprintable characters
displayed as blank.
H—(Hex)–Three line display with character over hex value.
S—(Single Record Format)–A display line for each field in the record with each line
containing a field name and the field's value.

246 ISPF User Guide

Print Data Sets

Starting Key/Rec #
Defines the starting location in this field if printing begins at a specified location
within the input file. The format of the starting location varies depending on the file
types and based on the following rules:
■ Sequential file–starting record number (numeric)
■ VSAM KSDS–Key of start position in C'xxx' format or X'hhhh' format (for
example, C'0001' or X'40400000')
■ VSAM ESDS–RBA of start position in X'hhhh' format (Ex. X'60F0E8')
■ VSAM RRDS–Relative Record Number of start position (numeric)
Print limit
Specifies the maximum number of records to be printed.
Note: If you have not specified a value or if the value in the Print Limit field equals
zero, no limit is placed on the number of records printed.
Execution Mode
Provides the following print execution modes:
S—Generate and submit JCL to perform the function.
E—Generate JCL to perform the function and initiate an edit session on the JCL.
Alter the JCL (as needed) and submit the JCL or save it to another location.
Layout dataset
Specifies the DSN of the record description copy member PDS that describes the file
to be processed.
Layout member
Specifies the member name of the record description copy member that describes
the file to be processed.
Leave this field blank to receive a directory of the members in the record layout
PDS, if the print mode is single record format.
Type a wildcarded member name to receive a directory of members that match
that wildcard.
Selection Criteria
Specifies selection criteria to filter the records or members to be printed.
Note: Selection criteria are ignored if you type a single asterisk in the print member
name. If you want to apply selection criteria to all members, leave the print
member name blank.

Chapter 8: Printing Data Sets 247

Print Data Sets

Selection criteria are used to restrict your view to certain members or records
based on the following types of parameters:
■ A condition that evaluates data values in each record or member
■ Presence of a character string within a library member, record, or specified
columns
■ Specification of the first record displayed based on relative record number,
VSAM key, or VSAM RBA
■ Limit to the number of records displayed
For a complete explanation of selection criteria and examples of valid syntax, see
the chapter "Filters."
Use a catalogued selection criteria parameter member that has been defined using
CA File Master Plus Option 0.3.
Use the primary LAYOUT command.

248 ISPF User Guide

Chapter 9: Filters
CA File Master Plus users can create filters to identify specific records or members using
selection criteria. Applying a filter to a data set restricts the data view, making it easier
for users to work with large data sets.

Selection criteria statements are the individual search terms used to identify the specific
records or members you seek. A selection criteria statement consists of a field, an
operator, and a literal, or the value to which the field is compared.

Selection criteria members are collections of selection criteria statements and are saved
in a selection criteria data set for future reuse. Filter and selection criteria member are
often used interchangeably.

CA File Master Plus supports two types of filters:

■ Cataloged filters are selection criteria members that are stored in a selection
criteria data set. Any CA File Master Plus user can reuse or modify a cataloged filter
at any time.
■ Uncataloged filters are used once and are not saved. As a result, uncataloged filters
are generally used for simpler searches. You can use as many selection criteria
statements as needed to locate records or members.

Consider both filter complexity and potential reuse when deciding which type of filter to
use.

This section contains the following topics:

Using Cataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus (see page 250)
Using Uncataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus (see page 255)
Selection Criteria Specifications (see page 257)

Chapter 9: Filters 249

Using Cataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus

Using Cataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus

This process describes how to use a cataloged filter to limit your view of a data set to
specific members or records.

Viewing Specific Members or Records Using a Cataloged Filter

Define
Develop Selection Update the
a Plan Criteria SETUP Screen
Statements

Yes

Refine Review the

No Apply the Filter
Results? Results

To use a cataloged filter to view specific records or members in a data set, complete the
following procedures:
1. Develop a plan (see page 251)
2. Define Selection Criteria Statements (see page 251)
3. Update the SETUP Screen (see page 253)
4. Apply the filter (see page 254)
5. Review the results (see page 254)

250 ISPF User Guide

Using Cataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus

Develop a Plan
The first step in using a filter to view specific data in a data set is to develop a detailed
plan. A good plan identifies the exact results you are looking for and the components
needed to achieve the results. Consider the data you want in your filtered view and the
criteria that best identify that data.

Follow these steps:

1. Clearly define the results you want. For example, you are an insurance claims
analyst and want to identify all automobile claims made in Boston since 2010.
2. Identify the data set that contains the records or members to which you want to
apply the filter.
3. Determine which criteria are required to achieve those results. For example, claim
type=auto; claim year>2010; city=Boston; state=MA.
4. Identify the selection criteria data set that contains the selection criteria member
you need. If no appropriate selection criteria member exists, identify the data set
where you want to save the selection criteria member you create.

Define Selection Criteria Statements

Filters, also named selection criteria members, contain selection criteria statements that
identify records or members in a data set. Cataloged filters use selection criteria
members stored in a PDS. Consider the selection criteria members that currently exist
and determine if any of them meet your needs entirely. If no existing selection criteria
member meets your needs, you can modify an existing member or create a selection
criteria member. Changes to existing selection criteria members are saved to the
selection criteria data set.

Follow these steps:

1. Select FILTER from the Main Menu (option 5).
The Define or Update a Selection Criteria screen opens.
2. Complete the following fields:
DSN
Identifies the data set name of the data set that contains the selection criteria
member that you want to modify. A wildcarded DSN retrieves a list of data sets
from which you select the data set that you want.
If you are creating a selection criteria member, this field defines the selection
criteria data set in which you want to store the new member.

Chapter 9: Filters 251

Using Cataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus

Member name
Defines the member name of the filter you want to modify or create.
Leave blank or type a wildcarded member name to display a directory of
existing selection criteria members from which you can select the member you
want to update.
3. Press Enter to validate the entries.
The Update Selection Criteria screen opens. The Selection DSN and Selection
Member fields display the information you entered in the previous step.
4. Complete the following fields:
Description
Describes the purpose of the selection criteria member.
Layout data set
Defines the data set name that contains the record layout to use to build
condition lines for the selection criteria member.
Layout member set
Defines the member name of the record layout to use to build condition lines
for the selection criteria member.
5. Type LAYOUT at the command prompt.
The Selection Criteria Condition screen opens.
6. Move your cursor to the line containing the selection criteria that you want to use.
7. Complete the following fields:
OP
Defines the condition for the selection criteria statement.
Valid values:
= or EQ—Equal
^= or NE—Not equal
> or GT—Greater than
< or LT—Less than
>= or GE—Greater than or equal
<= or LE—Less than or equal
CO—Contains

252 ISPF User Guide

Using Cataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus

Compare Value/Field Name

Defines the literals to which the field is compared or the field name of another
field to which the field is compared.
Valid values:
■ Alphanumeric literals contain a value within quotes. Precede the first
quote with one of the following letters:
C—Compares the exact string within the quotes.
T—Compares the string within quotes without regard to case.
X—Compares the hexadecimal values.
■ Numeric literals are defined without quotes or within quotes preceded by
a designation of the field format (such as P'0' or N'0').
■ Multiple literals evaluate a field against multiple values.
For example, as an insurance claims analyst, you would create the following
selection criteria statements to find all automobile claims in Boston since 2010:
■ Claim_year GT C’2010’
■ Claim_type EQ T’auto’
■ City EQ T'boston’
■ State EQ T'ma’
8. Type End.
You are returned to the Define or Update a Selection Criteria screen.
9. Type End.
You are returned to the main menu.

Update the SETUP Screen

Before you can apply a filter, identify the selection criteria data set containing the
selection criteria member that you want to use as your filter.

Follow these steps:

1. Select SETUP from the Main Menu (option 0.3).
The Define & Update Processing Parms screen opens.
2. Enter the name of the data set that contains the selection criteria member you
want to use in the Selection Criteria field.
3. Press Enter to validate the entry.
4. Type End.
You are returned to the main menu.

Chapter 9: Filters 253

Using Cataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus

Apply the Filter

With the selection criteria member defined and the setup completed, apply the filter to
view your results. CA File Master Plus supports filtering in the Browse, Edit, Copy,
Search, Update, Compare, and Print options. This procedure shows how to apply the
filter using the Browse option.

Follow these steps:

1. Select BROWSE from the main menu (option 1).
The Browse Dataset screen opens.
2. Enter the name of the data set that contains the data to which you want to apply
the filter in the Dataset name field.
3. Enter the name of the member that contains your selection criteria statements in
the Selection Criteria Member field.
4. Press Enter to validate the entry and apply the filter.
A list of the records or members that meet your filter criteria are displayed.

Review the Results

You have now successfully applied the cataloged filter and see the list of data that
meets the criteria specified in your selection criteria member.

Review the results of your search to determine if you have achieved the results that you
want. If necessary, refine your search by repeating the following procedures:
1. Develop a plan (see page 251)
2. Define Selection Criteria Statements (see page 251)
3. Apply the filter (see page 254)

254 ISPF User Guide

Using Uncataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus

Using Uncataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus

This process describes how to use an uncataloged filter to limit your view of a data set
to specific members or records.

Viewing Specific Members or Records Using an Uncataloged Filter

Apply Selection
Develop
Criteria
a Plan
Statements

Yes

Refine Review the

No
Results? Results

To use an uncataloged filter to view specific records or members in a data set, complete
the following procedures:
1. Develop a plan (see page 256)
2. Apply Selection Criteria Statements (see page 256)
3. Review the results (see page 257)

Chapter 9: Filters 255

Using Uncataloged Filters in CA File Master Plus

Develop a Plan
The first step in creating an uncataloged filter to view specific data in a data set is to
develop a detailed plan. A good plan identifies the exact results you are looking for and
the components needed to achieve the results. Consider the data you want in your
filtered view and the criteria that best identify that data. Use an uncataloged filter if you
do not need to use many selection criteria and if you do not want to save the search
criteria statements for future use.

Follow these steps:

1. Clearly define the results you want. For example, you are an insurance claims
analyst and want to identify all automobile claims since 2010.
2. Identify the data set that contains the records or members to which you want to
apply the filter.
3. Determine which criteria are required to achieve those results. For example, claim
type=auto; claim year>2010.

Apply the Selection Criteria Statements

To create an uncataloged search, enter selection criteria statements into the Selection
Criteria field of the option screen you want to use to view the filtered data. CA File
Master Plus supports filtering in the Browse, Edit, Copy, Search, Update, Compare, and
Print options. This procedure shows how to apply an uncataloged filter using the Browse
option.

Follow these steps:

1. Select BROWSE from the main menu (option 1).
The Browse Dataset screen opens.
2. Enter the name of the data set that contains the data to which you want to apply
the filter in the Dataset name field.
3. Enter the first selection criteria statement in the first line of the Selection Criteria
field.
4. Enter any additional criteria on subsequent lines.
For example, as an insurance claims analyst, you would create the following
selection criteria statements to find all automobile claims since 2010:
■ Claim_year GT C’2010’
■ Claim_type EQ T’auto’
5. Press Enter to validate the entry and apply the uncataloged filter.
A list of the records or members that meet your filter criteria are displayed.

256 ISPF User Guide

Selection Criteria Specifications

Review the Results

You have now successfully applied the uncataloged filter and see the list of data that
meets the specified selection criteria statements.

Review the results of your search to determine if you have achieved the results that you
want. If necessary, refine your search by repeating the following procedures:
1. Develop a plan (see page 256)
2. Apply the Selection Criteria Statements (see page 256)

Selection Criteria Specifications

See the following table for sample selection criteria specifications. For a complete
explanation of the syntaxes, request field-level help.

Selection Criteria Specification Description

MEMBER Specifies that subsequent selection criteria
apply to PDS member selection only. This
parameter and subsequent selection
criteria are ignored if specified for non-PDS
data sets.
RECORD Specifies that subsequent selection criteria
apply to record selection only.
101 = C'NY' Position 101 for a length of 2 equals 'NY'
1(3) = C'001' Position 1 for a length of 3 equals '001'
C'TEXAS' Character string 'TEXAS' anywhere in the
record
'TEXAS' Character string 'TEXAS' anywhere in the
record
1(3) = C'001' & 101 = C'NY' Compound condition
10(4) EQP Pos 10 for a length of 4 is a valid packed
value
80 = C'NY' C'NJ' C'MA' Position 80 equals one of the three values
80 = C'NY,NJ,MA' Position 80 equals one of the same three
values
100(2) = P'0,1,999' Two-byte packed field equals one of three
values

Chapter 9: Filters 257

Selection Criteria Specifications

Position 100 for a length of 7 equals

100 = '100,000'
C"100,00" Note: Quotes are required when the search
string contains a comma
82(2) > 84 Compare position 82 to position 84 for
length of 2
101(20) CO C'NEW YORK' Looks for the character string in columns
101-120
INLIM(5000) Stop reading/selecting after reading 5000
records.
SELLIM(1000) Only select 1000 records based on selection
criteria
STARTKEY='56789' Select keyed VSAM records starting with
key '56789'
STARTREC=1001 Select records starting with record number
1001
STARTRBA=X'1FD8' Select records starting with the record with
RBA x'1FD8'
INLIM=5000 Stop reading or selecting after reading 5000
records.
SELLIM=1000 Only select 1000 records based on selection
criteria

258 ISPF User Guide

Chapter 10: Record Layouts
Record layouts provide a powerful symbolic view of your file data for both record
selection and formatted data display. For record selection, record layouts provide a
simple symbolic method for typing selection conditions using field definitions instead of
record offsets and data types. For displaying data, they add context and clarity by
separating your data into individual fields and formatting the value of each field based
on its definition.

CA File Master Plus supports two basic types of record layouts, ordinary layouts and
custom record layouts.

This section contains the following topics:

Ordinary Layouts (see page 259)
Custom Record Layouts (see page 260)
Use Layout Functions (see page 261)
View Formatted Record Layout (see page 263)
How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout (see page 266)

Ordinary Layouts
An ordinary layout is a COBOL or PL/I record definition, the kind you would define in a
copy member to be compiled with your COBOL or PL/I application program. Use an
ordinary record layout wherever CA File Master Plus supports the use or record layouts
to map your record data, including the following activities:
■ Browsing or editing a file using single-record or multi-record formatted display
mode
■ Printing data from any online or batch function
■ Reformatting file data using the Reformat (Option 3.11) function
■ Generating record selection criteria using the Filter (Option 5) function
■ Using dynamic selection criteria for use with any online or batch function
■ Defining a custom record layout using the Layout (Option 6) function

When using an ordinary COBOL or PL/I record layout with any CA File Master Plus
function, the Layout Dataset always refers to the library in which the copy member
containing your COBOL or PL/I record layout resides. The library can be a partitioned
data set or a CA Librarian or CA Panvalet library. The Layout Member always refers to
the copy member containing your COBOL or PL/I record layout.

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 259

Custom Record Layouts

Ordinary layouts cannot contain procedural statements or other program source

statements. To map file data using a record layout embedded in a multi-layout copy
member or source program, you must define a custom record layout.

Because an ordinary layout member contains only one record layout, use the same field
definitions to format each file record. If your file contains more than one type of data
record and requires more than one record layout, you must define a custom record
layout.

Custom Record Layouts

A custom record layout lets you create one or more customized views of your file data
based on one or more ordinary layouts. A custom record layout member can only be
created using the CA File Master Plus Layout (Option 6) function. Use a custom record
layout in place of an ordinary layout almost anywhere that the use of layouts is
supported, including the following situations:
■ Browsing or editing a file using single-record or multi-record formatted display
mode
■ Printing data from any online or batch function
■ Generating record selection criteria using the Filter (Option 5) function
■ Using dynamic selection criteria for use with any online or batch function

You cannot use a custom record in the following situations:

■ Reformatting file data using the Reformat (Option 3.11) function
■ Defining a custom record layout using the Layout (Option 6) function

While an ordinary layout provides a single view of your file data based on a single
COBOL or PL/I copy member, a custom record layout lets you create as many different
views as you like for each file. Each view is based on an ordinary COBOL or PL/I record
layout and can be customized to meet your individual needs. When you create a custom
record layout with multiple views, you also define the exact data-specific conditions for
which each view should be used. You also decide which fields should be included in
formatted displays, and which portion of each record should be mapped by your layout.

You can use custom record layouts to accomplish the following tasks:
■ Define multiple views for a file containing more than one record type
■ Control which view should be used for each record based on content
■ Select which fields should be included or excluded from each view
■ Use partial record layouts to map only selected portions of your records
■ Use record layouts residing within multi layout copy books or source programs

260 ISPF User Guide

Use Layout Functions

Custom record layouts must reside in a partitioned data set with 80-byte records. They
may coexist with your ordinary COBOL or PL/I record layouts; however, custom record
layouts are typically maintained in a separate partitioned data set defined in the CA File
Master Plus Parm Files (Option 0.3) screen. When using a custom record layout, the
Layout Dataset always refers to the partitioned data set containing your custom record
layout definition. The layout member refers to the member name given to the custom
record layout when it was created.

Because a custom record layout may contain multiple views, it is common for different
records within the same file to be displayed using different field definitions. When each
view is defined within the Layout (Option 6) function, you also define the selection
conditions for which the view should be used. Selection conditions compare one or
more layout fields to other layout fields or to literal values. Before any record is
formatted, the selection conditions for each view are evaluated. When the conditions
for a view are satisfied, that view is used to format the record data, showing only the
fields defined in the custom record layout.

Use Layout Functions

Use the layout function to perform the following tasks:
■ Browse, edit or display the field definitions for an ordinary COBOL or PL/I record
layout
■ Create, delete, or update a custom record layout member

To use layout functions

1. Select LAYOUT from the Main Menu.
The Record Layout screen opens.

---------------- CA File Master Plus -- Record Layout --------------

OPTION ===>

V - View Formatted Record Layout

U - Update Custom Record Layout

Record Layout DSN ===> 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB'

Member ===> ________

Previously-used Record Layout DSNs are listed below:

'PROJECT1.COPYLIB'
'PROJECT2.COPYLIB'
'PROJECT3.COPYLIB'

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 261

Use Layout Functions

2. Select V (View formatted record layout) or U (Update Custom Record Layout) in the
option command.
View Formatted Record Layout
Displays a formatted view of a stand-alone record layout (or COBOL or PL/I
copybook).
Update Custom Record Layout
Creates or updates a custom record layout. Custom record layouts are used to
format records from a data set from COBOL and PL/I copybooks, and:
■ Are embedded within a program or other type of file
■ Begin after a specified offset within a record
■ Contain redefined fields that are to be used based on specific record values
or content
■ Only selected fields display
3. Complete the following fields:
Record Layout DSN
Defines an ordinary COBOL or PL/I record layout. Type the data set name of the
library containing the layout member. The library can be a partitioned data set
or a CA Librarian or CA Panvalet library.
To create, delete or update a custom record layout, type the name of the
partitioned data set containing your custom record layout definitions.
Type the value in this field using a wildcard to display a list of data set names,
or get the value from a DSN list.
You can also retrieve the data set name by placing the cursor on a previously
used name and pressing Enter.
Member
Defines the name of the copy member containing an ordinary COBOL or PL/I
record layout, or the name of a custom record layout member.
Leave this field blank or type a wildcard to display a list of members from the
library.

262 ISPF User Guide

View Formatted Record Layout

View Formatted Record Layout

You can view an ordinary COBOL or PL/I record layout.

To view formatted record layouts

1. Select LAYOUT from the Main Menu.
The Record Layout screen opens.
2. Type V in the Options field, and press Enter.
A formatted view of the standalone record layout displays.

View Record Layout Member Directory

When you do not know a member name, you can type a blank or wildcarded member to
see a list of members.

To view the record layout member directory

1. Access the Record Layout screen (see Use Layout Functions), and type a blank or
wildcarded member name in the Member field.
The Select Member to process from screen displays a list of members from the
library.

Select member to process from 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB'---- Row 1 to 17 of 29

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

V - View Formatted Record Layout B - ISPF Browse 1 - File Master Browse

U - Update Custom Record Layout E - ISPF Edit 2 - File Master Edit

Name Msg Size Created Changed ID

_ COLUMNS 81 2002/10/25 2003/01/14 13:36:38 TECH1
_ CUSTOM1 *Custom Layout 53 2003/03/10 2003/03/19 11:22:19 TECH1
_ CUSTOM2 *Custom Layout 26 2003/03/11 2003/03/18 10:25:00 TECH1
_ CUSTOM3 *Custom Layout 39 2003/03/22 2003/03/29 15:39:45 TECH2
_ CUSTOM4 *Custom Layout 34 2003/03/25 2003/03/25 13:21:25 TECH1
_ CUSTOM5 *Custom Layout 32 2003/03/26 2003/03/26 09:24:55 TECH1
_ CUSTREC 37 2001/02/09 2003/03/25 11:21:04 TECH1
_ CUSTREC2 37 2003/03/03 2003/03/17 14:33:50 TECH1
_ CUSTREC3 37 2003/03/07 2003/03/17 14:34:21 TECH1
_ CUSTREC4 38 2003/03/17 2003/03/17 22:42:24 TECH1
_ FNEW 8 2003/01/23 2003/01/23 15:47:35 TECH1
_ FOLD 7 2003/01/23 2003/01/23 15:47:20 TECH1
_ GSCCL001 19 2002/12/17 2002/12/17 08:14:33 TECH1
_ MAXARRAY 3 2003/03/20 2003/03/20 10:41:32 TECH1
_ NUMBERS 117 2002/11/13 2002/11/13 15:52:22 TECH1
_ P0218NEW 62 2002/11/07 2002/11/08 15:56:08 TECH1
_ P0218OLD 52 2002/11/07 2002/11/07 13:48:34 TECH1

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 263

View Formatted Record Layout

he following information is displayed for each layout member:

Name
Identifies the name of each layout member.
Msg
Identifies a custom record layout by the message *Custom Layout.
Size
Identifies the number of records in each layout member.
Created
Identifies the date and time the member was created.
Changed
Identifies the date and time of the last update of each member.
ID
Identifies the user ID associated with the last update of each member.
2. Type one of the following valid line action codes for any layout member:
V—View Formatted Record Layout—displays a formatted view of an ordinary
COBOL or PL/I record layout. You cannot view custom record layouts using this
option.
U—Update Custom Record Layout—updates or creates a custom record layout
B—ISPF Browse—browses a layout file using ISPF BROWSE
E—ISPF Edit—edits a layout file using ISPF EDIT
1—File Master Browse—browses a layout file using CA File Master Plus
2—File Master Edit—edits a layout file using CA File Master Plus

To assist you in locating the member you want, the View Record Layout Member
Directory supports the following primary commands:
LOCATE | L
Followed by a value, positions to the first member directory entry whose sort
sequence field is greater than or equal to the specified value.
For example, when the directory list is sorted by the Name column, the L ABC
positions the member list to the first member in the list whose member name is
greater than or equal to the name ABC.

264 ISPF User Guide

View Formatted Record Layout

SORT
Sorts the directory by any of the columns in the directory by typing SORT XXX or
SORT XXX Y where XXX is one of the column literals and Y is A for ascending or D for
descending.
For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory in descending order of Created
Date, and SORT ID A sorts the directory in ascending order of User ID.

View Record Layout Screen

After the layout member is resolved, the ordinary COBOL or PL/I record layout is
formatted, showing the individual field definitions within the layout.

To view record layout screens

1. Select LAYOUT from the Main Menu.
The Record Layout screen opens.
2. Type option V.
3. Type the Record Layout DSN field.
4. Type the member name, and press Enter.
The Record Layout screen opens.

----- Record Layout 'CUSTREC' of 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB'------- Row 1 of 31

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

Field Name Pos Format Len

01 CUST-RECORD 1 163 163
05 CUST-CUSTOMER-NUM 1 N 1 1
05 CUST-CUSTOMER-TYPE-CODE 2 C 10 10
05 CUST-ACCT-OPENED-DATE 12 N 8 8
05 CUST-DOB 20 N 8 8
05 CUST-1ST-TRANSACTION-DATE 28 6 6
10 CUST-1ST-TRANSACTION-MM 28 N 2 2
10 CUST-1ST-TRANSACTION-DD 30 N 2 2
10 CUST-1ST-TRANSACTION-YY 32 N 30 2
05 CUST-CURRENT-BAL 34 P 4.2 4
05 CUST-ORIG-BAL 38 P 4.2 4
05 CUST-PAYMENT-AMT 44 P 4.2 4
05 CUST-PAYMENT-PERIOD 48 N 2 2
05 CUST-NAME 50 C 25 25
05 CUST-ADDR-1 75 C 30 30
05 CUST-ADDR-2 105 C 30 30
05 CUST-PYMT-HISTORY 135 18 18
10 CUST-PYMT-ENTRY 135 9 9 Occurs 12
15 CUST-XYZ 135 C 5 5 Redefined
15 CUST-XYZ-REDEFINED 135 N 5 5 Redefinition
15 CUST-PYMT-RECEIVED 140 PS 5.2 4

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 265

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

This screen displays the following fields:

Field Name
Identifies the field level number and field name with indentation to indicate
the hierarchy of the fields.
The indentation rules for this column are as follows:
■ The indentation will be 2 as long as the entire name of each field fits within
the space provided.
■ The indentation will be 1 if the previous point is not true and the entire
name of each field fits within the space provided.
■ The indentation will be 0 if both the previous points are not true.
■ Table index values will overwrite the rightmost characters of the field
name if the field name and table index values cannot fit in the space
provided.
Pos
Identifies the field's starting position.
Format
Identifies the data-type indicator followed by either the number of digits or
characters allowed for the field as defined by the field definition.
Valid data-type indicators are:
B—Binary C—Alphanumeric F—Floating point
N—Any numeric field P— Packed S— Signed
Len
Identifies the length of the field in bytes.
Note: For packed or binary numeric fields, this value is not equal to the number
of digits.

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

When you want to create or update a custom record layout, you will want to perform
the following tasks:
■ Select a member from the directory to process
■ Define layout descriptions
■ Create a new custom record layout
■ Select a layout
■ Update a custom record layout

266 ISPF User Guide

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

Before you create or update a custom record layout, you may need to select a member
from the member directory.

To select a member from the directory

1. Select LAYOUT from the Main Menu.
The Record Layout screen opens.
2. Type option U to update the custom record layout.
3. Type the record layout DSN.
4. Type a wildcard or blank in the Member field, and press Enter.
The Select member to process from screen opens, displaying a list of members from
the library. Only custom record layout members are displayed in the member list.

Select member to process from. 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB'----- Row 1 to 4 of 4

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

I - Insert Custom Record Layout D - Delete Custom Record Layout Mem

S - Update Custom record Layout

Name Description Changed Size ID

_ CUSTOM1 Custom Record Layout #1 2003/03/19 11:22:19 53 TECH1
_ CUSTOM2 Custom Record Layout #2 2003/03/18 10:25:00 26 TECH1
_ CUSTOM3 Custom Record Layout #3 2003/03/29 15:39:45 39 TECH2
_ CUSTOM4 Custom Record Layout #4 2003/03/25 13:21:25 34 TECH1
_ CUSTOM5 Custom Record Layout #5 2003/03/26 09:24:55 32 TECH1
******************* End of Custom Record Layout Member List *******************

The following information is displayed for each layout member:

Name
Identifies the name of each layout member.
Description
Identifies the layout provided when the custom record layout was created.
Changed
Identifies the date and time of the last update of each member.
Size
Identifies the number of records in each layout member.
ID
Identifies the user ID associated with the last update of each member.

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 267

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

5. Type one of the following valid line action codes on any layout member, and press
Enter:
I—Insert custom record layout: creates a new custom record layout member in the
library
D—Delete custom record layout: removes an existing member from the library
S—Update custom record layout: selects an existing custom record layout for
update, and the custom record layout member update screen opens.
The corresponding action is performed.

To assist you in locating the member you want, the Custom Record Layout Update
Member directory supports the following primary commands:
LOCATE | L
Followed by a value, positions to the first member directory entry whose sort
sequence field is greater than or equal to the specified value.
For example, when the directory list is sorted by the Name column, the L ABC
positions the member list to the first member in the list whose member name is
greater than or equal to the name ABC.
SORT
Sorts the directory by any of the columns in the directory by typing SORT XXX or
SORT XXX Y where XXX is one of the column literals and Y is A for ascending or D for
descending.
For example, SORT CREATED sorts the directory in descending order of Created
Date, and SORT ID A sorts the directory in ascending order of User ID.

Update CRL Descriptions

After you have chosen the member name, you will want to define the layout
description, define the record offset (described later), or create the views for the
custom record layout.

To define layout descriptions

1. Select LAYOUT from the Main Menu.
The Record Layout screen opens.
2. Type option U to update the custom record layout.
3. Type the record layout DSN.
4. Type the custom record layout member name, and press Enter.

268 ISPF User Guide

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

The Custom Record Layout Member Update screen displays for a new layout:

----- CA File Master Plus -- Custom Record Layout Member Update -----
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

Custom Layout DSN ===> 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB'

Custom Layout Member ===> CUSTOM5
Description ===> ___________________________________________________
Record Offset ===> (Optional)

I - Insert Entry D - Delete Entry S - Display / Update Entry

A Member Layout DSN Default

_ __________ ____________________________________________ _
____________________________________________
******************** End of Custom Record Layout Entries **********************

If you are creating a new layout, there are initially no views defined, so the
scrollable list at the bottom of this screen should contain only one empty line.
When updating an existing layout, all of your existing views should be listed on the
bottom portion of this screen.
5. Complete the following fields, and press Enter:
Custom Layout DSN
Identifies the DSN of the library in which the custom record layout has been
created.
Custom Layout Member
Identifies the member name of the CRL. This is retrieved from the Member
field.
Description
Defines the custom record layout in a brief free-format description. This can be
used for identification. This is a required field.
Record Offset
Defines the offset within the file record data corresponding to the first field in
the record layout. The offset value applies to every view defined within the
custom record layout.
If the first field in the COBOL or PL/I record layout does not correspond to the
start of the record data, type the record offset that corresponds to the start of
the first field in the layout.

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 269

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

Values:
Numeric, but may contain a leading + or - sign.
If the record layouts contain a record descriptor word for variable-length
records, type -4 in this field to indicate that the layout begins mapping the
record data four bytes before the start of the record.
There is only one record offset for each custom record layout, and its value
applies to every view defined within the layout.
A
Defines the action for the screen.
Values:
I—Insert—Creates a new view within the custom record layout.
D—Delete—Removes an existing view from the layout. Once deleted, a view
cannot be restored.
S—Display—Selects an existing view for update.
Member
Defines the name of a source or copy member containing the ordinary COBOL
or PL/I record layout that will be used as the base for the view when inserting a
new view into the custom record layout.
Values:
■ A single COBOL or PL/I record layout
■ Multiple COBOL or PL/I record layouts
■ An entire COBOL or PL/I source program with embedded record layouts
If it contains more than one record layout, a list of record layouts is displayed.
Select a single record layout to be used for the view.
After you enter a view, this field becomes protected and cannot be changed.
Values:
Blank, or type a wildcard to display a list of members from the library.
Layout DSN
Defines the name of the library containing the ordinary COBOL or PL/I layout
member when inserting a new view into the custom record layout.
Values:
A partitioned data set, a CA Librarian or a CA Panvalet library, or a wildcard,
which displays a list of data set names, or can be resolved from a DSN list.
After you add a view, this field becomes protected and cannot be changed.

270 ISPF User Guide

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

Default
Defines the default view if you type Y in this column. The default view is used
for formatting file data when none of the selection conditions established for
any of the views is matched.
6. To create a new view, type I on the action line to insert a new entry in the list.
If there are no views defined to this layout, a blank entry should already be
displayed
7. Select an ordinary COBOL or PL/I record layout to use as the base for this view. This
must be a separate member residing in any source or copy library. It can exist by
itself as a standalone copy member, or as part of a larger copy member containing
multiple record layouts, or even as an embedded layout within an entire COBOL or
PL/I program.
8. Type the library and member names for the record layout you have selected in the
layout DSN and member fields, respectively. Press Enter to view the layout.
If the member that you have selected contains more than one record layout, the
Layout Selection screen displays.

------------ CA File Master Plus -- Layout Selection Row 1 to 2 of 2

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

Custom Layout DSN ===> 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB'

Custom Layout Member ===> CUSTOM5
Description ===> Custom Record Layout #5
Layout File Name ===> TECH2.LAYOUT(CUSTREC)

S - Select Layout

A 01 Level Field Name

_ 01 CUST-RECORD
_ 01 CR1-RECORD
******************************* Bottom of data ********************************

9. Select only one layout to use from the list provided as the base layout for your new
view.
In this example, the copy member CUSTREC contains two record layouts named
CUST-RECORD and CR1-RECORD.
10. Type S in the line action column next to the record you would like to select, and
press Enter to select that record layout.

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 271

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

Update Custom Layout

Once the layout record has been resolved, you will be able to update the layout.

To update a custom layout

1. Perform the procedures in the previous topics until you have a layout selected.
The Custom Layout Field Update screen displays. This screen is used to:
■ Define the data-specific selection conditions under which this layout view
should be used to format file data
■ Identify which fields should be included in formatted displays

------ CA File Master Plus -- Custom Layout Entry Field Update ------
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

Custom Layout DSN ===> 'CUSTOMER.PROJECT.COPYLIB'

Custom Layout Member ===> CUSTOM5
Description ===> Custom Record Layout #5
Custom Layout Entry ===> TECH2.LAYOUT(CUSTREC)

Line Actions: S/SS - Select Field/Block X/XX - Unselect Field/Block

O
A X FIELD Pos Format A OP Compare Value or Field Name
__ 01 CUST-RECORD 1 C 300 _ __ _______________________________
__ 05 CUST-CUSTOMER-N 1 N 9 _ __ _______________________________
__ 05 CUST-CUSTOMER-T 10 C 2 _ __ _______________________________
__ 05 CUST-ACCT-OPENED 12 C 6 _ __ _______________________________
_ 10 CUST-ACCT-OPA 12 N 2 _ __ _______________________________
__ 10 CUST-ACCT-OPB 14 N 2 _ __ _______________________________
__ 10 CUST-ACCT-OPC 16 N 2 _ __ _______________________________
__ 05 CUST-DOB 18 C 6 _ __ _______________________________
__ 10 CUST-DOB-YY 18 N 2 _ __ _______________________________
__ 10 CUST-DOB-MM 20 N 2 _ __ _______________________________
__ 10 CUST-DOB-DD 22 N 2 _ __ _______________________________

272 ISPF User Guide

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

The following information is displayed for each layout member:

Custom Layout DSN
Identifies the DSN of the library in which your custom record layout has been
created.
Custom Layout Member
Identifies the member name of your layout.
Description
Identifies a brief free-format description of your custom record layout that you
can use for identification.
Custom Layout Entry
Identifies the library and member name for the layout displayed on this screen
in the column under A.
2. Type one of the following valid line action codes next to the field you want to
change:
S—Select Field
Selects a field to be included in your view.
SS—Select Block
Selects a block of fields. Use on the first and last rows of the block.
X—Unselect Field
Excludes a field from your view. Excluding a field does not remove the field
from the layout file, nor does it affect the position or size of any other fields. It
simply prevents the excluded field from displaying when your file data is
formatted using this view.
XX—Unselect Block
Excludes a block of fields. Use on the first and last rows of the block.
3. Complete the following fields, and press Enter.
X
Indicates that a field is excluded from your view.
Field Name
Identifies the field level number and field name with indentation to indicate
the hierarchy of the fields.
The indentation rules for this column are as follows:
■ The indentation will be 2 as long as the entire name of each field fits within
the space provided.
■ The indentation will be 1 if the previous point is not true and the entire
name of each field fits within the space provided.

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 273

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

■ The indentation will be 0 if both the previous points are not true.
■ Table index values will overwrite the rightmost characters of the field
name if the field name and table index values cannot fit in the space
provided.
Pos
Identifies the starting position within the record of the field.
Format
Identifies the data-type indicator followed by either the number of digits or
characters allowed for the field as defined by the field definition.
Valid data-type indicators are:
B—Binary C—Alphanumeric F—Floating point
N—Any numeric field P—Packed S—Signed
O/A
Defines the column to join multiple selection conditions using an AND or an OR
relationship.
If you only define a single selection condition for a view, leave this field blank.
For multiple conditions, this column joins a condition to the previous condition
in either an AND or OR relationship. Valid values are:
A—both conditions must be true.
O—at least one of the conditions must be true.
Blank—the default relationship between conditions is AND.
OP
Builds a condition. Type one of the following valid operands:
= EQ—equal
^= NE—not equal
<= LE—less than or equal to
>= GE—greater or equal to
< LT—less than
> GT—greater than
CO—Contains (such as the specified literal is anywhere in the field)
Compare Value or Field Name
Creates a selection condition. Type either a field name or one or more literal
values to which this field will be compared using the operator defined in the OP
column. If you type a field name, it must be in the displayed layout.
You may enclose a literal value in apostrophes or quotes, and it may contain a
leading type indicator. Valid type indicators include:

274 ISPF User Guide

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

C—Case-sensitive character data

N—Numeric, packed or binary data
P—Packed numeric data
T—Text
X—Hexadecimal data
If you do not specify a type indicator, the type of field with which the literal is
being compared will be assumed.
Literals are padded to match the size of the field to which they are being
compared. Numeric literals are padded on the left with zeros, while all other
literals are padded on the right with blanks.
Separate multiple literal values by commas or spaces.

Literal Examples:
C'NY' C'NJ' C'MA' C'CT'
P'1'
X'010203'
5,7,9,11,13

Selection Condition Creation

For each view, you must define the selection conditions for which the view will be used.
When file data is formatted using either single-record or multi-record formatting mode,
the selection conditions are evaluated for each record to determine which view should
be used, based on the record data.

The conditions are evaluated in the order that the views are defined to the custom
record layout. When the conditions for a view are satisfied, that view is used to format
the record data, showing only the fields defined in the custom record layout.

Comparing any field in the record layout with either another field or one or more literal
values creates a selection condition. Use the fields to the right of the field definition to
define selection conditions.

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 275

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

Example: Simple Condition

For a simple condition involving only one field, type a valid operator in the OP column
and one or more comparison values in the compare value column.

Example:

Type GT in the OP column next to CUST-DOB-YY, and 50 in the compare value column.

You have created the following selection condition:

IF CUST-DOB-YY GT 50

Whenever the value of CUST-DOB-YY is greater than 50, this view is used to format the
record data.

Example: Complex Condition

For complex conditions involving more than one field, fill in the same condition columns
for each of the fields, then join the conditions by typing AND or OR in the A/O column.

Example:
1. Type EQ in the OP column next to CUST-ACCT-OPENED-YY and 99 in the compare
value column.
2. Type EQ in the OP column next to CUST-ACCT-OPENED-MM and 12 in the compare
value column.
3. Type AND in the A/O column next to CUST-ACCT-OPENED-MM.
You have created the following selection condition:
IF CUST-ACCT-OPENED-YY EQ 50 and CUST-ACCT-OPENED-MM EQ 12

A complex selection condition is rare, but you may type as many conditions as necessary
to meet your needs. You may also type as many literal values as you like for a single
field.

Example:
1. Type NE in the OP column next to CUST-STATE.
2. Type C'NY' C'NJ' C'CT' C'MA' C'RI' in the compare value column.
You have created the following selection condition:
IF CUST-STATE EQ 'NY' or 'NJ' or 'CT' or 'MA' or 'RI'

If none of the selection conditions defined for any of your views is met for any file
record, the default view will be used for formatting. If no default view has been
established, the data will be formatted as a single character field.

276 ISPF User Guide

How to Create or Update a Custom Record Layout

Field-Level Inclusion and Exclusion

For each view, you may select which fields from the base layout should be included
when each record is formatted.

By default, when you create a new view, all fields are included. Use the Unselect (X or
XX) line action to remove fields from the view, or the Select (S or SS) line action to add
fields which you had previously removed.

While viewing the list of fields in your view, only those fields that are included in the
view are highlighted. Those that are excluded will be dimmed and marked with an X.

Excluding a field does not remove the field from the layout definition, nor does it affect
the record position or length of any other field in the layout. It simply prevents a field
from being displayed when the record data is formatted.

Field-level selection is not required for any view.

Chapter 10: Record Layouts 277

Chapter 11: DSN List Directory
This chapter describes the DSN list directory option of CA File Master Plus.

This section contains the following topics:

Select a DSN (see page 279)
Select a DSN List for Processing (see page 280)
Update DSN Lists (see page 281)
Insert DSN Lists (see page 283)
Delete DSN Lists (see page 284)

Select a DSN
To view a list of the DSNs defined to the DSN list Parm PDS, and to select a DSN for
processing, use the DSN List Directory screen.

To select a DSN
1. Select DSN LIST from the Main Menu.
The DSN Lists screen opens.

CA File Master Plus --- DSN Lists in'FM85.INST.DSNLIST' Row 1 to 3 of 3

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S - Select DSN List U - Update I - Insert D - Delete

S DSN List Desc

_ #1 desc for #1
_ #2 dsn list #2
_ TEST testdsn list

******************************* END OF DSN LISTS ******************************

You can also display this directory with the following methods:
■ Select option D from the Main Menu to access the DSN List facility, and then
navigate to other functions for any of the data sets in any of the DSN lists.
■ Type D into any panel field where a data set name is specified, to use the DSN
list facility to locate the DSN you want for the panel.

Chapter 11: DSN List Directory 279

Select a DSN List for Processing

This screen displays the following information:

DSN List
Displays the name of the DSN list. This name corresponds to the member name
within the DSN List Parm PDS in which the DSN List is stored.
Desc
Displays a description for the DSN list that you created or updated using the
Update DSN List screen.
2. Type S (selects the DSN List for processing) next to the DSN list you want to process,
and press Enter.

Select a DSN List for Processing

To invoke various functions for any of the data sets in a DSN list, use the Use DSN List
Dataset screen.

To select a DSN list for processing

1. Select DSN LIST from the Main Menu.
The DSN Lists screen opens.
2. Select S (selects the DSN List for processing) next to the DSN list you want to
process, and press Enter.
The Use DSN List Dataset screen opens.

----- CA File Master Plus -- Use DSN List Dataset ----- Row 1 of 6
COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

1 - Browse 3.6 - PDS Utility 3.11 - Reformat

2 - Edit 3.7 - VSAM Utility 4 - Print
3.1 - Library Utility 3.8 - Search Utility B - ISPF Browse
3.2 - Dataset Utility 3.9 - Update Utility E - ISPF Edit
3.3 - Copy Utility 3.10 - Compare V - ISPF View

DSN List PDS ===> FM85.INST.DSNLIST

DSN List ===> #1
Desc ===> desc for #1

ACT DATA SET

____ TECH.WORKPDS
____ TECH.WORKPDS2
____ TECH.WORKPDS3
____ TECH.WORKPDS4
____ TECH.JCL.CNTL
____ TECH.WORK.MEMLIST
************************** END OF DSNS FOR DSN LIST ***************************

280 ISPF User Guide

Update DSN Lists

This screen displays the following information:

DSN List PDS
Identifies the name of the DSN list PDS.
DSN List
Identifies the name of the DSN list. This name corresponds to the member
name within the DSN list parm PDS in which the DSN list is stored.
Desc
Identifies a description for the DSN list that is entered when the DSN list is
created or updated using the Update DSN List screen
3. Select one of the options displayed below the command line, and type this function
to the left of the data set name to invoke the function. Press Enter.

Update DSN Lists

To update and maintain a DSN list, use the Update DSN List screen. You can also browse,
edit, view, insert, repeat, delete, move, and copy the data sets found within the DSN list
using this screen.

To update the DSN list

1. Select DSN LIST from the Main Menu.
The DSN Lists screen opens.
2. Select a DSN list, type U on the command line, and press Enter.
The Update DSN List screen opens.

------- CA File Master Plus -- Update DSN List -------- ROW 1 OF 6

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

1 - Browse I - Insert M - Move

2 - Edit R - Repeat C - Copy
E - ISPF Edit D - Delete B – Before
V - ISPF View A - After

DSN List PDS ===> FM8.5.INST.DSNLIST

DSN List ===> #1
Desc ===> desc for #1

ACT DATASET
__ TECH.WORKPDS
__ TECH.WORKPDS2
__ TECH.WORKPDS3
__ TECH.WORKPDS4
__ TECH.JCL CNTL
__ TECH.WORK MEMLIST

Chapter 11: DSN List Directory 281

Update DSN Lists

This screen displays the following information:

DSN List PDS
Identifies the name of the DSN list PDS where the DSN lists are stored. This DSN
is defined in option 0.3 which is used to define the DSN of each of the
processing parameter data sets.
DSN List
Identifies the name of the DSN list. This name corresponds to the member
name within the DSN list parm PDS in which the DSN list is stored.
Desc
Identifies a description for the DSN list that you created or updated using the
Update DSN List screen.
3. Optionally, select any of the following ACTs for a data set, and press Enter.
1—Browses the selected data set.
2—Edits the selected data set.
E—ISPF edits the selected data set.
V—ISPF views the selected data set.
I—Inserts a data set after the selected data set. When you type a wildcarded
data set name, another panel is displayed with all of the catalogued data sets
that match the wildcard. From this list you can select the ones you want to add
or, by using the command line command S *, you can select all of data sets that
appear in the list.
R—Repeats the selected data set.
D—Deletes the selected data set.
M—Moves the selected data set to another position within the DSN list.
C—Copies the selected data set to another position within the DSN list.
B—Uses the before line item to position the placement of the moved or copied
data set to the line above the selected line.
A—Uses the after line item to position the placement of the moved or copied
data set to the line below the selected line.
The respective action is performed on the selected data set.

282 ISPF User Guide

Insert DSN Lists

Insert DSN Lists

To begin a new DSN, use the Update DSN List screen (insert mode).

To insert DSN lists

1. Select DSN LIST from the Main Menu.
The DSN Lists screen opens.
2. Select a DSN list, type I on the command line, and press Enter.
The Update DSN List screen opens with no entries.

------- CA File Master Plus -- Update DSN List -------- ROW 1 OF 1

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR
1 - Browse I - Insert M - Move
2 - Edit R - Repeat C - Copy
E - ISPF Edit D - Delete B – Before
V - ISPF View A - After

DSN List PDS ===> FM8.5.INST.DSNLIST

DSN List ===> ________
Desc ===> ________________________________________

ACT DATASET
__

This screen displays the following information:

DSN List PDS
Identifies the DSN of the DSN list PDS where the DSN lists are stored. This DSN
is defined in option 0.3, which is used to define the DSN of each of the
processing parameter data sets.
3. Complete the following fields, and press Enter. These fields will be blank when you
first see the screen.
DSN List
Defines the name of the DSN list. This name corresponds to the member name
within the DSN list parm PDS in which the DSN list is stored.
Desc
Describes the DSN list that you created or updated using the Update DSN List
screen.
4. Type a data set name under the Dataset heading.
Dataset
Defines the data set name to be included in the DSN list. Type the name
without apostrophes.

Chapter 11: DSN List Directory 283

Delete DSN Lists

5. To add more data sets to the DSN list, type I for insert on the command line.
When you type wildcarded data set names, another panel displays with all of the
catalogued data sets that match the wildcard. From this list you can select the ones
you want to add or, by using the command line command S *, you can select all of
data sets that appear in the list.

Delete DSN Lists

To confirm the deletion of a DSN list member from the DSNLIST data set, use the
Confirm Member Delete screen.

To delete a DSN list member

1. Select DSN LIST from the Main Menu.
The DSN Lists screen opens.
2. Select a DSN list, type D on the command line, and press Enter.
The Confirm Member Delete screen opens.

CA File Master Plus --- DSN Lists in 'FM85.INST.DSNLIST' ROW 1 OF 4

COMMAND ===> SCROLL ===> CSR

S - Select DSN List U - Update I - Insert D - Delete

S DSN List Desc

D #1 desc for #1
_ #2 desc for #2
_ TEST te .---------------------------------------------------------.
_ XX | CA File Master Plus ------------- Confirm Member Delete |
**************** | COMMAND ===> | **
| |
| Data Set Name: |
| FM85.INST.DSNLIST |
| |
| Member to be Deleted: |
| #1 |
| |
| Y Confirm subsequent member deletes? |
| |
| ENTER to confirm delete. |
| CANCEL or END to cancel delete. |
'---------------------------------------------------------'

Note: This screen opens only if the confirm member deletes value is set to Y in
setup option 0.3. If this value is N, then the member is deleted without asking for
confirmation.
For more details see the section Confirm Member Delete in the chapter "Using CA
File Master Plus".

284 ISPF User Guide

Index
A INSERT • 80, 98
KEY • 80
audience • 12 LEFT • 80
line • 95
B LOCATE • 81
build alternate index MF • 84
IDCAMS control cards • 167 move • 99
VSAM utility • 167 NEXT • 84
NULLS • 85
C NUMEXT • 85
catalog utility PDSCHG • 86
catalog data set list • 134 PREV • 86
field descriptions • 135 PRINTLOG • 50
catalog utility data set list PROFILE • 87
FIND • 136 RCHANGE • 88
SORT • 136 REPEAT • 88, 98
cataloged filter • 18 REPLACE • 88
change log RESET • 89
print • 50 RFIND • 90
command notations • 13 RIGHT • 90
commands SAVE • 90
AUTOSAVE • 68 SELECT • 91
BOTTOM • 68 SF • 91
BOUNDS • 68 SORT • 91
BROWSE • 69 STATS • 92
CANCEL • 69 SUBMIT • 92
CAPS • 69 TOP • 92
CHANGE • 69 UNSORT • 93
CHAR • 71 UP • 93
COLS • 71 V • 93
COPY • 72, 99 commonly used data sets • 17
COUNTS • 72 compare utility • 109
CREATE • 73 compare utility member directory
DELETE • 73 CANCEL • 234
DOWN • 74 field descriptions • 235
DSINFO • 75 LOCATE • 234
edit • 67, 75 MEMBER • 234
END • 75 SORT • 234
EXCLUDE • 75 copy command • 99
FIND • 77, 94 copy utility • 127
FINDLIM • 79 copy utility member directory
FLIP • 79 CANCEL • 132
HELP • 79 field descriptions • 133
HEX • 79 LOCATE • 132
HILITE • 79 MEMBER • 132

Index 285
SORT • 132 Define Generation Data Group screen • 125
current data set allocations • 242 field descriptions • 118
custom record layouts PDS data set information • 118
create or update • 266 Sequential File Multiple Volumes screen • 124,
member updates • 268 125
usage • 18 data sets, printing • 245
define alternate index file
D field descriptions • 163
DASD Unit Configuration • 244 specify DSNs • 162
data set information define and update processing parms
direct access file • 119 customer record layout • 45
sequential file • 119 list PDS • 45
VSAM ESDS • 182 define generation data group
VSAM ESDS, ERASE • 182 field descriptions • 126
VSAM ESDS, field descriptions • 182 display DSN lists • 22
VSAM ESDS, RECOVERY • 182 DSNs
VSAM ESDS, REUSE • 182 delete list member • 284
VSAM ESDS, SPANNED • 182 insert list • 283
VSAM ESDS, SPEED • 182 list for processing • 280
VSAM ESDS, WRITECHECK • 182 select • 279
VSAM KSDS • 175 update lists • 281
VSAM RRDS • 187
VSAM RRDS, ERASE • 187
E
VSAM RRDS, RECOVERY • 187 edit commands
VSAM RRDS, REUSE • 187 support, line commands • 67
VSAM RRDS, SPEED • 187 support, primary commands • 67
VSAM RRDS, WRITECHECK • 187 editing
VSAM variable length RRDS • 192 VSAM ESDS files • 67
VSAM variable length RRDS, ERASE • 193 VSAM paths • 103
VSAM variable length RRDS, field descriptions •
193 F
VSAM variable length RRDS, RECOVERY • 193 filter types
VSAM variable length RRDS, REPLICATE • 193 cataloged • 18
VSAM variable length RRDS, REUSE • 193 uncataloged • 18
VSAM variable length RRDS, SPANNED • 193 FIND • 136
VSAM variable length RRDS, SPEED • 193
VSAM variable length RRDS, WRITECHECK • 193 I
data set information #2
IDCAMS control cards
VSAM ESDS • 185
build alternate index • 167
VSAM ESDS, field descriptions • 186
modify VSAM file • 170
VSAM RRDS • 190
rename VSAM component • 168
VSAM RRDS, field descriptions • 191
insert command • 98
VSAM variable length RRDS • 195
VSAM variable length RRDS, field descriptions • L
196
data set reformat • 236 library utility
data set utility browse member • 113
allocate new PDS screen • 121 delete • 113
edit member • 113

286 ISPF User Guide

field descriptions • 112, 114 ordinary • 259
ISPF browse • 113 ordinary, mapping record data • 259
ISPF edit • 113 usage • 18
member directory • 113 view formatted • 263
print • 113 view screens • 265
rename • 113 record length
line commands • 95 assigning line commands • 101
load library member directory • 115 decreasing existing record • 101
load library utility increasing existing record • 101
browse • 115 recover overlaid or deleted members • 151
delete • 115 rename VSAM component
field descriptions • 116 field description • 169
ISPF browse • 115 IDCAMS control cards • 168
rename • 115 variations • 168

M S
main menu screens
extended help • 17 Allocate New Sequential File or PDS • 121
screen-level help • 17 Build Alternate Index • 167
member directory Catalog Utility • 134
field description • 21 Catalog Utility Data Set List • 136
LOCATE • 21 Compare Utility Member Directory • 234
select member • 267 Confirm Data Set Delete • 26
SORT • 21 Confirm Member Delete • 25, 284
modify VSAM file Copy Utility Member Directory • 132
ERASE • 170 Current Data Set Allocations • 242
field description • 170, 182 Custom Record Layout Member Update • 268
IDCAMS control cards • 170 Custom Record Layout Update Member Directory
INHIBIT • 170 • 266
NOERASE • 170 DASD Unit Configuration • 244
NOWRITECHECK • 170 Data Set Information #2 VSAM RRDS • 190
SMS management class • 170 Data Set Information #2 VSAM Variable Length
SMS storage class • 170 RRDS • 195
UNINHIBIT • 170 Data Set Information #2, VSAM ESDS • 185
WRITECHECK • 170 Data Set Information VSAM VRRDS • 192
Data Set Information, direct access file • 119
P Data Set Information, sequential file • 119
PDS Data Set Information, VSAM RRDS • 187
directory of PDS containing member • 147 Data Set Reformat • 236
PDS utilities sub-menu • 144 Data Set Reformat Parm • 239
update PDS allocation • 149 Data Set Rename • 26
PDS utility • 109 Data Set Utility • 117
printing Dataset Information VSAM ESDS • 182
change log • 50 Dataset Information VSAM KSDS • 175, 179
data sets • 245 Define Alternate Index File • 162
Define and Update Processing Parms • 45
R Define Generation Data Group • 125
Define Path • 172
record layouts

Index 287
Define VSAM File-Multiple Volumes • 174 catalog utility data set list • 136
Directory of PDS Containing Member • 147
Display DSN Lists • 22 U
DSN List directory • 279 update utilities sub-menu
DSN List Member Directory • 47 field descriptions • 208
Environment Utilities Sub-Menu • 241 Utilities Menu
Library Utility • 111 catalog • 109
Library Utility Member Directory • 113 compare • 109
Load Library Utility Member Directory • 115 copy • 109
Locate PDSs with Specified Member • 145 data set • 109
Member Directory • 21 environment • 109
Modify VSAM File • 170 library • 109
Override Print Output Control • 27 PDS • 109
PDS Dataset Information • 118 reformat • 109
PDS Utilities Sub-Menu • 144 search • 109
Print Output Control Parms • 43 update • 109
Processing Defaults and Job statements • 41 VSAM • 109
Recover Overlaid or Deleted Members • 151 VTOC • 109
Rename Component • 168 utility functions
Search Utilities Sub-Menu • 203 edit JCL • 18
Search Utility From/To String Sub-Menu • 214 online • 18
Search Utility Member Directory • 205, 212 submit JCL • 18
Search Utility Update Fields • 216
Select DSN to Resolve Wildcarded DSN • 20 V
Select Member to Process • 64
volume summary
Select Member to Process from • 267
VTOCutility • 143
Sequential File Multiple Volumes • 124, 125
VSAM utility
Setup and Processing Parameters • 40
build AIX, field description • 168
Update DSN List • 281, 283
define alternate index file • 162
Update PDS Allocation • 149
define path • 172
Update Utilities Sub-Menu • 207
VTOC utility
Use DSN List Dataset • 280
option codes • 138
Utilities Menu • 109
volume selection information • 138
Volume Summary • 143
volume summary • 143
VSAM Linear Data Set • 198, 201
VTOC utility data set list
VTOC Utility • 138
unit names list • 140
VTOC Utility DataSet List • 140
volume serial list • 140
search utility member directory
wildcarded unit names • 140
field descriptions • 214
wildcarded volume serials • 140
LOCATE • 205, 212
MEMBER • 205, 212
SORT • 205, 212
select member to process
field descriptions • 206
field descriptions • 56
LOCATE • 56
MEMBER • 56
SORT • 56
SORT

288 ISPF User Guide